knowledge innovation vision

engineering 2005

k n o w l e d g e

i n n o v a t i o n

v i s i o n

DEAR PROFESSOR:

Welcome to the engineering program at Oxford University Press and our 2005 catalog.

As a university press, Oxford’s mission is to support and improve education. Together

with our authors, we are a community of dedicated professionals who are committed

to this objective.

Engineering is a dynamic profession that demands a high degree of understanding and

creativity from its practitioners. The engineering program at Oxford University Press

is committed to ensuring that students have a solid foundation in the fundamentals as

well as a chance to grasp the excitement of advanced research and cutting-edge projects.

We concentrate on making our books fit their respective courses in both size and

content. Our authors are excited about undergraduate teaching—and can convey that

enthusiasm in accurate, concise prose.

With these guiding principles in mind, we are pleased to present new books that are

publishing this year, on topics ranging from fluid mechanics to computer architecture.

You will also find information on exciting new initiatives to further our goal of

supporting and improving engineering education. One example is the addition of

twelve new members to the Editorial Board of the Oxford Series in Electrical andComputer Engineering. Some of the brightest minds in academia today are coming

together to expand and improve the series. Meet them and learn more on pages 16-17.

As the editor responsible for developing books for the higher education engineering

curriculum, I would like to hear from you so that, together, we can find the solutions

to your teaching challenges. Please contact me if:

■ You have an idea for an innovative text designed for a course in the core curriculum.

■ You are interested in helping us develop new projects and revisions of existing texts

by acting as a reviewer.

■ You have used an Oxford text in the past and have suggestions for its improvement.

With your help, we can continue to provide innovative materials that help engineering

instructors prepare their students for today’s changing world and the challenges of

tomorrow.

Enjoy the catalog!

Best regards,

Danielle ChristensenEngineering EditorHigher Education Group

Please contact your Oxford sales representative at

1-800-280-0280 for additional information on any of our engineering titles

Danielle ChristensenEngineering Editor

Higher Education [email protected]

Be Sure To Visit Our Website:www.oup.com/us/highered

The Higher Education Group at Oxford

University Press is at your service.

Our sales representatives are available to

assist you in selecting appropriate texts and

materials that meet your course needs.

Contact one of them for examination copies,

solutions manuals, news of forthcoming books,

and information on which books would

best fit the way you want to teach.

To speak with a representative, please call

1-800-280-0280. Visit our website,

www.oup.com/us/highered,

to contact your sales representative

directly, search for complete details on any

Oxford University Press publication,

purchase new books, and so much more!

COVER PHOTO:Exterior View of Radcliffe Camera

in Oxford, England

A cyclist enters Radcliffe Square in the English university city of Oxford.

The square is dominated by a Palladian-style circular library known as the Radcliffe Camera,

designed by the architect James Gibbs,1739-1749, from an earlier plan by Hawksmoor.

© Adam Woolfitt/CORBIS

ENGINEERING PROFESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Engineering as a Profession . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Social Aspects of Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Ethics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Engineering Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Engineering Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Technical Writing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Experiment Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45The Oxford Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17Introduction to Electrical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19Digital Logic/Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22Microelectronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-26

Spotlight on Editorial Production Design (EDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Systems and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-31Probability/Random Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-32Electromagnetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33Machines and Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-34Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-37Photonics/Optoelectronics and Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-39Circuit Design, Filters, and Fabrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-44Semiconductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-45

COMPUTER ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-55Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-48Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-50Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-53Artificial Intelligence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54Professional Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-73The Oxford Series on Advanced Manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-57The MIT-Pappalardo Series in Mechanical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58-59Mechanics of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-63Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63-65Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Thermal and Fluid Sciences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66-67Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-69Materials Science. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-71Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71-73Aerospace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

BIOMEDICAL AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74-83The Oxford University Press Series in Biomedical/Bioengineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Bioengineering/Biomedical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-77Topics in Chemical Engineering: A Series of Textbooks and Monographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Polymers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79-80Reactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-81Rheology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-82Professional Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-83

CIVIL AND ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-86Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-85Soils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85-86Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

ENGINEERING ECONOMICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87-88

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89-90

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91-96Professional Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

PHYSICS AND PHYSICAL SCIENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97-100Professional Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101-104

con

tents

Engineering as a Professionen

gin

eeri

ng

pro

fess

ion

4 | w w w . o u p . c o m / u s / h i g h e r e d

ENGINEERS AND THEIR PROFESSIONFifth EditionJOHN D. KEMPER and BILLY R. SANDERS,both at University of California, Davis

Thoroughly updated to reflect modern engi-

neering practice, the fifth edition of Engineersand Their Profession offers in-depth coverage

of the engineering enterprise and engineers’

involvement in key areas of human endeavor.

Comprehensive and accessible, it is an ideal

text for an upper-level undergraduate course

in engineering professionalism.

The book provides a broad overview and

helps students make the transition from college

to industry by describing the reality of the

business world that they will soon enter. This

revised edition includes extensive coverage of

ethics and personal responsibility, making it

especially useful for engineering professionals.

The text is enhanced by study questions at the

end of each chapter and numerous figures and

tables throughout.

Engineers and Their Profession, Fifth

Edition, covers essential design and technical

topics while also emphasizing the human

aspect of this challenging and rewarding field.

2000 • 368 pp. • 54 illus. • 0-19-512057-4 paper • APS KEMP5

ContentsPreface

PART I: THE ENGINEERING PROFESSION

1. Is Engineering Really a Profession?

2. The Branches of Engineering

3. Engineering Challenges

4. Engineering Employment

5. Engineering Education

6. Creativity

7. Design and Development

8. Salaries and Other Rewards

PART II: PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES OF ENGINEERS

9. Professional Registration

10. Management

11. Ethics and Public Responsibility

12. Engineering Societies

13. Intellectual Property: Patents, Copyrights,Trade Secrets, and Trademarks

14. Product Liability

PART III: REFERENCE MATERIAL

Appendixes:

1. Definitions

2. Code of Ethics, National Society of Professional Engineers

3. Guidelines to Professional Employment for Engineers and Scientists

Notes

Index

INTRODUCTION TO THE ENGINEERINGPROFESSIONSecond EditionJOHN D. KEMPER,University of California, Davis

Many freshman engineering students have

questions about the profession. What branch

of engineering appeals to me the most? What

is the relationship of engineering to the en-

vironment? Which skills are required to be

a successful engineer?

This book helps answer these questions.

With his engaging style, John Kemper reveals

the human aspect of this profession, while

providing students with essential design and

technical material. This unique approach pres-

ents engineering in a social context, and pro-

vides suggestions about study habits, test-tak-

ing, and successful problem-solving.

* A Solutions Manual is available. (0-03-096615-9)

1993 • 624 pp. • illus. • 0-19-510727-6cloth • APS SEE46

ContentsPreface

1. The Historical Development of Engineering

2. Modern Engineering Challenges

3. Getting Started in Engineering

E N G I N E E R I N G P R O F E S S I O N | 5

4. The Engineering Profession

5. Safety and Professional Responsibility

6. The Branches of Engineering

7. Presentation of Engineering Results

8. Statistics

9. SI and Other Unit Systems

10. Communication: Written, Oral, and Graphical

11. Engineering Design

12. Creativity

13. Patents

14. Statics and Dynamics

15. Mechanics of Materials

16. Work, Energy, and Heat

17. Electrical Engineering

18. Computers

19. Engineering Economics

Appendixes

Answers to Problems

Index

INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERINGW. LIONEL CRAVER, JR., DARRELL C.SCHRODER, and ANTHONY J. TARQUIN,all at University of Texas at El Paso

This comprehensive volume provides a

survey of the typical curricula for engineering

students. Concise and structured, the text

offers instructors the flexibility to choose and

emphasize certain topics within the course.

Each author is an expert in a different branch

of engineering—electrical engineering, civil

engineering, and mechanical engineering.

1987 • 595 pp. • illus. • 0-19-510725-X cloth • APS SGE03

A SOCIAL HISTORY OFAMERICAN TECHNOLOGYRUTH SCHWARTZ COWAN,State University of New York at Stony Brook

This book surveys the history of American

technology from the early 17th century

to the present, focusing on the key indivi-

duals, ideas, and systems that have shaped

the important technological developments

throughout American history. Cowan demon-

strates how technological change has always

been closely related to social development and

examines the important relationship between

social history—the family, women and work,

and the home—with that of technological

developments in the factory, business, and

the scientific community. In a fascinating

concluding chapter, Cowan examines the vast

social implications of recent technological

developments and how these technologies are

causing crucial changes in America’s political,

economic, and social structure.

1997 • 352 pp. • 31 illus. • 0-19-504605-6paper • APS COWAN

Contents

PART 1. IN THE BEGINNING

A Social History of American Technology

1. The Land, the Natives, and the Settlers

2. Husbandry and Huswifery in the Colonies

3. Colonial Artisans

PART 2. INDUSTRIALIZATION

4. Early Decades of Industrialization

5. Transportation Revolutions

6. Inventors, Entrepreneurs, and Engineers

7. Industrial Society and Technological Systems

8. Daily Life and Mundane Work

9. American Ideas about Technology

PART 3. TWENTIETH-CENTURYTECHNOLOGIES

10. Automobiles and Automobility

11. Taxpayers, Generals, and Aviation

12. Communications Technologies and Social Control

13. Biotechnology

Index

BEYOND ENGINEERINGHow Society ShapesTechnologyROBERT POOL

We have long recognized technology as a driv-

ing force behind historical and cultural

change. The invention of the printing press

initiated the Reformation. The development

of the compass ushered in the Age of

Exploration and the discovery of the New

World. In Beyond Engineering, science writer

Robert Pool turns this equation around and

examines how society shapes technology—

analyzing developments in nuclear energy,

automobiles, commercial electricity, and per-

sonal computers. Drawing on such disparate

fields as history, economics, risk analysis,

management science, sociology, and psycho-

logy, the text illuminates the complex and

often fascinating interplay between machines

and society.

1999 • 368 pp. • 0-19-512911-3paper • APS POOLBE

ContentsAcknowledgments

Introduction: Understanding Technology

1. History and Momentum

2. The Power of Ideas

3. Business

4. Complexity

5. Choices

6. Risk

7. Control

8. Managing the Faustian Bargain

9. Technical Fixes, Technological Solutions

Notes

Index

S ocial Aspec ts of Engineering


THE ENGINES OF OUR INGENUITY An Engineer Looks atTechnology and CultureJOHN H. LIENHARD,University of Houston (Emeritus)

A million people tune in twice each week to

hear John H. Lienhard’s radio program “The

Engines of Our Ingenuity.” Now Lienhard has

gathered together his reflections on the nature

of technology, culture, human inventiveness,

and the history of engineering in this fascina-

ting book. The Engines of Our Ingenuity offers

a series of intriguing glimpses into technology

—as a mirror, as a danger, as a product of heroic

hubris. The book brims with insightful obser-

vations and ranges far and wide with stories of

inventors, mathematicians, and engineers.

The result is less history than autobiography

—for the autobiography of all of us is written

in our machines.

2003 • 272 pp. • 68 illus. • 0-19-516731-7paper • APS LIENH

ContentsPreface

1. Mirrored by Our Machines

2. God, the Master Craftsman

3. Looking Inside the Inventive Mind

4. The Common Place

5. Science Marries into the Family

6. Industrial Revolution

7. Inventing America

8. Taking Flight

9. Attitudes and Technological Change

10. War and Other Ways to Kill People

11. Major Landmarks

12. Systems, Design, and Production

13. Heroic Materialism

14. Who Got There First

15. Ever-Present Dangers

16. Technology and Literature

17. Being There

Correlation of the Text with the Radio Program

Notes

Index

FUNDAMENTALS OFETHICS FOR SCIENTISTSAND ENGINEERSEDMUND G. SEEBAUER,University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign,and ROBERT L. BARRY,University of Illinois at Chicago

Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists andEngineers represents a new approach to intro-

ductory ethics that is both practical and

accessible. Classical virtue theory is employed

to provide a time-tested, simple, and easily

remembered basis for ethical reasoning. The

text is modularized for easy use in both stand-

alone ethics courses and as self-contained

units within engineering core courses.

To ground the ethical analysis in practical

reality, each chapter contains a real-life case

together with several fictional cases. The

fictional cases breathe renewed vigor into the

study of ethics by employing a new learning

device: the “ethical serial.” Each fictional case

can be understood individually, but the cases

are also unified by use of a single set of college-

aged characters whose personalities are devel-

oped throughout the book. These characters

mimic real people far more closely than those

in other texts and act in situations that are

directly familiar to students.

The book is composed of four units. The

first two focus on ethical reasoning, outlining

within the context of science and engineering

the notions of character formation and inten-

tion central to virtue theory. To prepare

students to handle complex ethical questions,

these units extend virtue theory in a readily

understandable way, accounting systematically

for the consequences that follow an ethical

decision. The second two units focus on

practical issues such as intellectual property,

conflict of interest, whistle-blowing, and

authorship in scientific publication. These

units also treat more advanced topics like risk,

resource allocation, conflicting ethical methods,

and intuition in ethical decision making.

* An Instructor’s Manual is available.(0-19-514419-8)

2002 • 288 pp. • 4 illus. • 0-19-513488-5 paper • APS SEEETH

Features■ Avoids heavy emphasis on complex

philosophical ethics

■ Uses a simple “virtue ethics” approach to analysis

■ Provides homework problems and solutionsthat are objective and easy to grade

■ Offers numerous case studies, both real and fictional

ContentsPreface

UNIT 1. FOUNDATIONAL PRINCIPLES

1. Approaching the Subject of Ethics

2. The Person and the Virtues

3. Analyzing Exterior Acts: Some First Steps

4. Analyzing Interior Intentions: Some First Steps

UNIT 2. RESOLVING ETHICAL CONFLICTS

5. Toward a Hierarchy of Moral Values

6. Starting Moral Judgments:Evaluating Exterior Acts

7. Completing Moral Judgments:The Decisive Role of Intention

8. Moral Responsibility

UNIT 3. JUSTICE: APPLICATIONS

9. Truth: Person-to-Person

10. Truth: Social

11. Fairness: Person-to-Person

12. Fairness: Social

UNIT 4. ADVANCED TOPICS

13. Resource Allocation

14. Risk

15. Dealing with Differing Ethical Systems

16. Habit and Intuition

E t h i c s


COMPUTERS, ETHICS,AND SOCIETYThird EditionEdited by M. DAVID ERMANN, University of Delaware, and MICHELE S. SHAUF

In today’s world, computers can have complex

and contradictory effects on human life. They

can enhance our quality of life by creating

access to previously unimagined worlds. On

the other hand, as computers become increas-

ingly important in our everyday lives, their

potential to strip away our privacy and auto-

nomy increases exponentially. Computers,Ethics, and Society, now in its third edition,

offers a comprehensive, interdisciplinary set of

readings on the ethical and social implications

of computer technology. Taking into account

technological, social, and philosophical issues,

the contributors consider topics such as the

work-related ramifications of automation, the

ethical obligations of computer specialists,

and the threats to privacy that come with

increased computerization.

Thoroughly up-to-date in its coverage, this

collection includes articles on specific ethical

dilemmas related to contemporary issues and

events. Essays new to the third edition cover

such topics as cyber-terrorism, the ethics of

downloading music from Internet sites, and

the question of whether human beings may

someday be “replaced” by artificial intelli-

gence and computer technology. An ideal text

for sociology, philosophy, and computer sci-

ence courses, Computers, Ethics, andSociety, Third Edition, reminds students that

although technology has the potential to

improve or undermine our quality of life,

societal forces ultimately have the power to

decide how computers will affect our lives.

2002 • 256 pp. • 0-19-514302-7paper • APS ERMSHA

Contents

I. ETHICAL CONTEXTS:PHILOSOPHICAL ETHICS

1. The Best Action is the One with the Best Consequences, John Hospers

2. The Best Action is the One in Accord with Universal Rules, James Rachels

3. The Best Action is the One that Exercises the Mind’s Faculties, Aristotle

II. PROFESSIONAL ETHICS

4. ACM Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct,Association for Computing Machinery

5. Using the ACM Code, Ronald E. Anderson,Deborah G. Johnson, Donald Gotterbarn,and Judith Perrolle

6. Can We Find a Single Ethical Code?,Robert N. Barger

7. The Morality of Whistle-Blowing, Sissela Bok

8. The Ethics of Systems Design, Batya Friedman and Peter H. Kahn, Jr.

9. Are Hacker Break-ins Ethical?, Eugene H. Spafford

10. Using Computers as Means, not Ends,Herbert L. Dreyfus and Stuart E. Dreyfus with Tom Athanasiou

III. HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL CONTEXTS

11. Technology is a Tool of the Powerful,Philip Bereano

12. A History of the Personal Computer, Robert Pool

13. Informing Ourselves to Death, Neil Postman

14. Why the Future doesn’t Need Us, Bill Joy

15. Boolean Logic, Michael Heim

IV. SOCIAL CONTEXTS

16. Privacy in a Database Nation, Simson Garfinkel

17. The GNU Manifesto, Richard M. Stallman

18. Crossing the Digital Divide, Jessica Brown

19. Gender Bias in Instructional Technology,Katy Campbell

20. Computers and the Work Experience,Anthony M.Townsend

21. Information Technologies and Our Changing Economy, Martin Carnoy

22. Music: Intellectual Property’s Canary in the Digital Coal Mine, National Research Council

23. The Case for Collective Violence, Craig Summers and Eric Markusen

24. Activism, Hacktivism, and Cyberterrorism,Dorothy E. Denning

ENVIRONMENTAL ETHICS TODAYPETER S. WENZ,University of Illinois, Springfield

Environmental Ethics Today is essential read-

ing for anyone interested in the future of the

environment, our species, and species diversity.

This wide-ranging introduction to major

issues and questions in environmental ethics

employs an accessible, journalistic style—

featuring current facts, real controversies,

individual stories, and a vivid narrative—that

engages students and gives meaning to abstract

philosophical concepts.

Topics discussed include pollution permits

for corporations, medical experimentation

on animals, genetic engineering, economic

globalization, biodiversity, and much more.

Theories and methods such as utilitarianism,

contractarianism, and hermeneutics are intro-

duced as needed to help students understand

and attempt to resolve environmental conflicts.

An exceptional primary text for courses in

environmental ethics and environmental values,

Environmental Ethics Today is also excellent

reading for general courses in moral problems,

business ethics, and environmental studies.

2000 • 368 pp. • 13 illus. • 0-19-513384-6 paper • APS WENVIR

ContentsPrefaceAcknowledgments

INTRODUCTION

PART I: ANTHROPOCENTRISM

1. Overpopulation, Markets, and Human Rights

2. Energy, Economics, and Future Generations

3. Competing Human-Centered Values

continued on the next page

Head to B Come


E t h i c s

PART II: NONANTHROPOCENTRISM

4. Animal Liberation and Utilitarianism

5. Animal Rights and Medical Research

6. Species Diversity and Gaia

7. The Land Ethic

PART III: ENVIRONMENTAL SYNERGISM

8. Human Rights, Agriculture, and Biodiversity

9. Ecofeminism and Environmental Justice

10. Religion and Nature

PART IV: APPLICATIONS

11. Personal Choices, Consumerism, and Human Nature

12. Public Policies, Efficiency, and Globalization

FINAL REFLECTIONS—IS OPTIMISMJUSTIFIED?

Glossary

Notes

Index

ENVIRONMENTAL ETHICSWhat Really Matters,What Really WorksEdited by David Schmidtz and ElizabethWillott, both at University of Arizona

Featuring sixty-two accessible selections—from

classic articles to examples of cutting-edge

original research—Environmental Ethics:What Really Matters, What Really Worksaddresses both of the principal areas of inquiry

in the field: the exploration of morality from an

environmental perspective and the analysis of

the current state of our environment.

Aiming to determine what issues really

matter, the first section of the book responds

to such questions as: What is value? What

types of things have value? Is the value of a

human being fundamentally different from the

kind of value we find elsewhere in nature?

What role do consumer goods and services

play in a good life? and Is there room for envi-

ronmental consciousness in a good life?

The second section turns to the question

of solving our environmental problems. It

strives to go beyond the “hype” to present

informed perspectives on the true nature of

those problems and investigates important

questions like: What is causing or exacer-

bating these problems? and What solutions

have been tried? The selections present

philosophical, biological, and social scientific

approaches to the major issues.

Environmental Ethics features first-hand

descriptions from people who have actually

been involved in such projects as wildlife

management in Africa, ecofeminist initiatives

in India, and radical activism on the high seas.

It also provides current data on population

issues and community-based wildlife initia-

tives. Ideal for undergraduate courses in

environmental ethics, environmental issues,

and applied ethics, this unique text is also a

helpful resource for graduate students and

professors, as it retains most of the footnotes

from the original articles.

2001 • 592 pp. • 14 illus. • 0-19-513909-7 paper • APS SCHMID

ContentsAcknowledgments

Why Environmental Ethics? Elizabeth Willott and David Schmidtz

PART 1: WHAT REALLY MATTERS? ESSAYS ON VALUE IN NATURE

1. The Dawn of Reverence

2. Animal Liberation and the Land Ethic

3. Extending the Realm of Rights

4. Species Equality and Respect for Nature

5. Environmental Holism

6. How Wild Does Nature Have to Be?

7. Rethinking the Good Life

8. Ecofeminism in Theory and Practice

PART 2: WHAT REALLY WORKS? ESSAYS ON HUMAN ECOLOGY

9. Human Population

10. What It Takes To Preserve Wilderness

11. Sustainable Use and Institutional Structure

12. Poverty as an Environmental Problem

13. Vanishing Resources

14. Cost–Benefit Analysis and Environmental Policy

15. Environmentalism in Practice

INNOVATIONMANAGEMENTStrategies, Implementation,and ProfitsSecond EditionALLAN AFUAH, University of Michigan

Innovation is the key to gaining and maintaining

a competitive advantage in the business world.

In this second edition, Afuah explicitly

incorporates coverage of the Internet as a tech-

nological change and offers an entirely new

chapter, “Strategies for Sustaining Profits.”

The text’s unique multi-functional approach

integrates the important contributions of

economics, organizational theory, marketing,

and finance to innovation management. This

approach provides students with a full presen-

tation of appropriate management theory and

detailed coverage of practical concerns such

as the role of government regulation, choosing

a profit site, and the transfer of innovation.

The impact of the public and international

sectors is highlighted with chapters on global-

ization, innovation in emerging economies,

and the role of government in promoting

innovation.

In addition to a strong analytical and

theoretical foundation, the book offers many

pedagogical examples. Most chapters conclude

with short practice cases designed to supple-

ment the numerous examples within each

chapter. These cases are followed by a list of key

terms and questions to stimulate discussion.

Innovation Management, Second Edition,

is an ideal text for business school programs

and also provides guidance for executives and

managers seeking a better understanding of

the value of innovation.

2003 • 400 pp. • 101 illus. • 0-19-514230-6 cloth • APS AFUAH2

Engineering Management

Please see our titles in Engineering Economics on pages 87-88.


Contents1. Introduction and Overview

PART 1: FUNDAMENTALS

2. Models of Innovation

3. The Underpinnings of Profits: Assets,Competences, and Knowledge

4. Sources and Transfer of Innovation

PART 2. STRATEGIZING

5. Recognizing the Potential of an Innovation

6. Reducing Uncertainty: The Role of Technological Trends, Market Regularities,and Innovation Strategy

7. Choosing a Profit Site: Dynamic Competitive Analysis

8. Strategic Choice or Environmental Determinism

9. Identifying Potential Co-competitors

10. Strategies for Sustaining Profits

PART 3. IMPLEMENTING AND PROTECTION OF PROFITS

11. Financing Entrepreneurial Activity

12. Implementation of the Decision to Adopt

PART 4. GLOBALIZATION

13. Globalization for Innovations

14. Innovating for Emerging Economies

15. Role of National Governments in Innovation

16. The Internet: A Case in Technological Change

17. Strategic Innovation Process

Appendix 1: Standards and Dominant Designs

Appendix 2: Organizational Structures

Appendix 3: Organizational Boundaries

GlossaryCase 1: Netscape CorporationIndex

THE HUMAN SIDE OF MANAGINGTECHNOLOGICALINNOVATIONA Collection of ReadingsSecond EditionEdited by RALPH KATZ,Northeastern University

The Human Side of Managing Technologi-cal Innovation, Second Edition, provides a

unique collection of articles that increase the

sensitivity and understanding of individuals

who are managing or influencing innovation

and change processes within organizations. It

also offers practicing managers and staff

professionals new ideas, tools, and insights for

problem-solving, organizing, and functioning

more effectively.

The book is ideal as a complementary text

for any course that emphasizes product,

process, organizational, or technological

innovation. It may also be used in advanced

undergraduate or graduate courses as well as in

organizational workshops and seminars that

focus primarily on how managers, individual

professionals, project teams, and functional

groups deal with problems and issues related

to the management of technology-based

innovation.

The text is organized into seven sections

that cover such topics as motivating profes-

sionals, measuring productivity, organizing

and leading cross-functional development

teams, enhancing creativity and decision-

making, developing human resource capabi-

lities, building and maintaining innovative

climates, managing lead users for new product

innovation, and using technology as a strategic

resource.

2003 • 752 pp. • 73 illus. • 0-19-513531-8 paper • APS KATZ2

ContentsIntroduction

PART 1. THE MOTIVATION AND LEADER-SHIP OF TECHNICAL PROFESSIONALS

The Motivation of Professionals

1. Motivating Professionals in Organizations,Ralph Katz

2. How Bell Labs Creates Star Performers,Robert Kelley and Janet Caplan

3. Organizational Socialization and the Reduction of Uncertainty, Ralph Katz

The Management of Creativity in Organizations

4. Managing Creative Professionals, Albert Shapero

5. How to Manage Geeks, Russ Mitchell

6. Managing Creativity: A Japanese Model,Min Basadur

7. Managing Innovation: When Less Is More,Charlan Jeanne Nemeth

The Transition from Technical Specialist to Managerial Leadership

8. Why Managers Fail, Michael Badawy

9. “How Do You Feel?”, Tony Schwarz

10. Beyond the Charismatic Leader: Leadership and Organizational Change,David Nadler and Michael Tushman

PART 2. THE MANAGEMENT OF INNOVATIVEGROUPS AND PROJECT TEAMS

The Management of High Performing Technical Teams

11. How a Team at Digital Equipment Designed the ‘Alpha’ Chip, Ralph Katz

12. The Java Saga, David Bank

13. Hot Groups, Harold Leavitt and Jean Lipman-Blumen

The Management of Crossfunctional Groups and Project Teams

14. The Discipline of Teams, Jon Katzenbach and Douglas Smith

15. Managing Creative Performance in R&D Teams, Ralph Katz

Managing Organizational Roles and Structures in Project Groups

16. Organizing and Leading “Heavyweight”Development Teams, Kim Clark and Steven Wheelwright

17. Lessons for an Accidental Profession,Jeffrey Pinto and Om Kharbanda

18. How Project Performance is Influenced by the Locus of Power in the R&D Mix,Ralph Katz and Thomas Allen

PART 3. LEADERSHIP ROLES IN THE INNOVATION PROCESS

Formal Problem-Solving Roles inLeading Innovation

19. Enlightened Experimentation: The New Imperative for Innovation, Stefan Thomke



20. How Internet Companies Build Software,Alan MacCormack

21. Meeting the Challenge of Global Team Management, Edward F. McDonough III and David Cedrone

Informal Critical Roles in Leading Innovation

22. Critical Functions: Needed Roles in the Innovation Process, Edward Roberts and Alan Fusfeld

23. Innovation through Intrapreneuring,Gifford Pinchot III

24. Virtual Teams: Technology and the Workplace of the Future, Anthony Townsend, Samuel DeMarie, and Anthony R. Hendrickson

PART 4. MANAGING KNOWLEDGE WORKWITHIN INNOVATIVE ORGANIZATIONS

Managing Technical Communications and Technology Transfer

25. Distinguishing Science from Technology,Thomas Allen

26. Communication Networks in R&D Laboratories,Thomas Allen

27. A Study of the Influence of Technical Gatekeeping on Project Performance and Career Outcomes in an R&D Facilty,Ralph Katz and Michael Tushman

28. Why Information Technology Inspired But Cannot Deliver Knowledge Management,Richard McDermott

Managing Performance and Productivity inTechnical Groups and Organizational Settings

29. Project Management Scorecard, Dennis Sleven

30. Measuring R&D Effectiveness, Robert Szakonyi

31. Assessing the Value of Your Technology,James Tipping, Eugene Zeffren, and Alan Fusfeld

32. Metrics to Evaluate R,D, & E, John R. Hauser and Florian Zettelmeyer

PART 5. MANAGING INNOVATIVE CLIMATESIN ORGANIZATIONS

Managing Innovative Climates

33. A Skunkworks Tale, Thomas Peters

34. The One-Firm Firm: What Makes It Successful,David Maister

35. 3M’s Post-it Notes: A Managed or Accidental Innovation?, P. Ranganath Nayak and John Ketteringham

36. Making Teflon Stick, Anne Cooper Funderburg

Maintaining Innovative Climates

37. That’s Easy for You to Say, Lucien Rhodes

38. Organizational Issues in the Introduction of New Technologies, Ralph Katz and Thomas Allen

39. Implementing Radical Innovation in Mature Firms: The Role of Hubs, Richard Leifer,Gina Colarelli, and Mark Price

40. Dreams to Market: Crafting a Culture of Innovation, Karen Anne Zien andSheldon A. Buckler

PART 6. THE MANAGEMENT OF ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESSES FOR INNOVATION DECISION-MAKING PROCESS

41. Managing Organizational Deliberations in Nonroutine Work, William Pasmore

42. Speed and Strategic Choice: How Managers Accelerate Decision Making, Kathleen Eisenhardt

43. Vasa Syndrome: Insights From a 17th-Century New Product Disaster, Eric Kessler, Paul Bierly,and Shanthi Gopalakrishnan

Organizational Practices, Policies, and Rewards

44. Winning the Talent War for Women,Douglas M. McCracken

45. Danger: Toxic Company, Jeffrey Pfeffer

46. Managing Dual Ladder Systems in R, D, & E Settings, Ralph Katz and Thomas Allen

Managing Across Functions for Rapid Product Development

47. A Six-Step Framework for Becoming a Fast-Cycle-Time Competitor, Christopher Meyer

48. Shortening the Product Development Cycle,Preston Smith and Donald Reinertsen

49. First to Market, First to Fail? Real Causes of Enduring Market Leadership,Gerard Tellis and Peter Golder

PART 7. MANAGING THE INNOVATIONPROCESS IN ORGANIZATIONS

Managing the Cross-functional Relationshipsto Enhance New Product Development

50. Managing Relations between R&D and Marketing in New Product Development Projects, William Souder

51. Examining Some Myths about New Product “Winners”, Robert Cooper

52. The Rules of Innovation, Clayton Christensen

Managing User Innovation for New Product Development

53. Product Concept Development Through the Lead-User Method, Eric von Hippel and Ralph Katz

54. Shifting Innovation to Users Through Toolkits,Eric von Hippel and Ralph Katz

PART 8. ORGANIZATIONAL FRAMEWORKSFOR INNOVATION AND NEW PRODUCTDEVELOPMENT

55. Modular Platforms and Innovation Strategy,Marc Meyer

56. The Elements of Platform Leadership,Michael Cusumano and Annabelle Gawer

57. Managing Technological Innovation in Organizations, Ralph Katz

58. Ally or Acquire? How Technology Leaders Decide, Edward B. Roberts and Wenyun Liu

MANAGING STRATEGICINNOVATION AND CHANGE A Collection of ReadingsSecond Edition

MICHAEL L. TUSHMAN, Harvard Universityand PHILIP ANDERSON, INSEAD

Managing Strategic Innovation and Change,Second Edition, is designed for MBA or

professional management courses that focus

on technological innovation and change. It is

an ideal companion to The Human Side ofManaging Technological Innovation, Second

Edition, by Ralph Katz (2003) and InnovationManagement: Strategies, Implementation,and Profits, Second Edition, by Allan Afuah

(2003).

The editors, Michael Tushman and Philip

Anderson, are acknowledged leaders in the

field of management strategy. Focusing on

the general management challenges that

innovative firms face, they draw from a variety

of disciplines to show the links between

innovation, organizational competencies,

organizational architectures, executive teams,

and managing change.

2004 • 704 pp. • 93 illus. • 0-19-513578-4 paper • APS TUSH2

Featured Topics■ Technological evolution

■ Technology strategy

■ Globalization

■ Organizational learning

■ Management of innovation

Recurring Themes■ The systems nature of technology

■ The importance of history and path dependence



■ The cross-functional nature of innovationmanagement

■ The paradox between efficiency and adaptability

■ The role of executive leadership in managing through turbulence

ContentsPreface

PART 1. INTRODUCTION AND OVERVIEW

1. Innovation Streams, Organization Designs, and Organizational Evolution, Michael L.Tushman and Wendy K. Smith

2. Capabilities, Cognition, and Inertia:Evidence from Digital Imaging,Mary Tripsas and Giovanni Gavetti

PART 2. INNOVATION OVER TIME AND IN HISTORICAL CONTEXT

Technology Cycles

3. Managing Through Cycles of Technological Change, Philip Anderson and Michael L.Tushman

4. Technological Discontinuities and Flexible Production Networks: The Case of Switzerland and the World Watch Industry, Amy Glasmeier

Discontinuous Innovation, DisruptiveTechnology, and Technological Substitution

5. Gunfire at Sea: A Case Study of Innovation,Elting Morrson

6. Customer Power, Strategic Investment, and the Failure of Leading Firms, Clayton M. Christensenand Joseph L. Bower

7. Architectural Innovation: The Reconfiguration of Existing Product Technologies and the Failure of Existing Firms, Rebecca M. Henderson and Kim B. Clark

8. The Dynamics of Standing Still: Firestone Tire and Rubber and the Radial Revolution,Donald N. Sull

Dominant Designs

9. The Panda’s Thumb of Technology,Stephen Jay Gould

10. The Art of Standards Wars,Carl Shapiro and Hal R. Varian

11. Managing in an Age of Modularity,Carliss Y. Baldwin and Kim B. Clark

Era of Incremental Change

12. Nobody Ever Gets Credit for Fixing Problemsthat Never Happened: Creating and SustainingProcess Improvement, Nelson P. Repenning and John D. Sterman

13. Tailoring Process Management to SituationalRequirements: Beyond the Control andExploration Dichotomy, Kathleen M. Sutcliffe,Sim B. Sitkin, and Larry D. Browning

PART 3. ORGANIZATION ARCHITECTURESAND MANAGING INNOVATION

14. Managerial Problem Solving:A Congruence Approach, Michael L.Tushmanand Charles O’Reilly III

15. Building Your Company’s Vision,James C. Collins and Jerry I. Porras

16. Managing Professional Careers: The Influence of Job Longevity and Group Age, Ralph Katz

17. Strong Cultures and Innovation:Oxymoron or Opportunity, Francis J. Flynn and Jennifer A. Chatman

18. Understanding Power in Organizations,Jeffrey Pfeffer

19. The Weird Rules of Creativity, Robert I. Sutton

20. The Ambidextrous Organization: ManagingEvolutionary and Revolutionary Change,Michael L.Tushman and Charles O’Reilly III

21. Core Capabilities and Core Rigidities:A Paradox in Managing New ProductDevelopment, Dorothy Leonard-Barton

PART 4. INNOVATION AND BUSINESS STRATEGY

22. Dynamic Capabilities and StrategicManagement, David J.Teece, Gary Pisano,and Amy Shuen

23. Strategy, Value Innovation, and the KnowledgeEconomy, W. Chan Kim and Renée Mauborgne

24. Crafting R&D Project Portfolios, Ian C. MacMillanand Rita Gunther McGrath

PART 5. KNOWLEDGE, LEARNING,AND INTELLECTUAL CAPITAL

25. Making the Most of Your Company’sKnowledge: A Strategic Framework, Georg vonKrogh, Ikujiro Nonaka, and Manfred Aben

26. Crisis Construction and OrganizationalLearning: Capability Building in Catching-up at Hyundai Motor, Linsu Kim

27. Learning From Collaboration: Knowledge and Networks in the Biotechnology andPharmaceutical Industries, Walter W. Powell

28. Organizing Knowledge, John Seely Brown and Paul Duguid

PART 6. MANAGING LINKAGES

Cross-Functional Linkages

29. Organizing and Leading “Heavyweight”Development Teams, Kim B. Clark and Steven C. Wheelwright

30. Making Teamwork Work: BoundaryManagement in Product Development Teams,Deborah Gladstein Ancona and David F. Caldwell

Organizational Linkages

31. Strategic Linking, David A. Nadler and Michael L.Tushman

32. Coevolving: At Last a Way to Make Synergies Work, Kathleen M. Eisenhardt and D. Charles Galunic

33. Strategies for Managing Internal Competition,Julian Birkinshaw

Extra-Organizational Linkages and Venturing

34. Technology Brokering and Innovation in aProduct Development Firm, Andrew Hargadonand Robert I. Sutton

35. Involving Suppliers in New ProductDevelopment, Robert B. Handfield, Gary L. Ragatz,Kenneth J. Petersen, and Robert M. Monczka

36. Creating New Ventures from Bell LabsTechnologies, Henry W. Chesbrough and Stephen J. Socolof

PART 7. EXECUTIVE LEADERSHIP ANDMANAGING INNOVATION AND CHANGE

37. Convergence and Upheaval: Managing theUnsteady Pace of Organizational Evolution,Michael L.Tushman, William H. Newman, andElaine Romanelli

38. Time Pacing: Competing in Markets That Won’t Stand Still, Kathleen M. Eisenhardt and Shona L. Brown

39. Implementing New Designs: ManagingOrganizational Change, David A. Nadler and Michael L.Tushman

40. Beyond the Charismatic Leader:Leadership and Organizational Change,David A. Nadler and Michael L.Tushman

41. Strategy as Vector and the Inertia ofCoevolutionary Lock-In, Robert A. Burgelman

42. Change in the Presence of Fit:The Rise, the Fall, and the Renaissance of Liz Claiborne, Nicolaj Siggelkow

Head to B Come


A V A I L A B L E I N A P R I L !

MANAGING INNOVATIONSTEVE CONWAY, University of Leicester and FRED STEWARD, Brunel University

Managing Innovation analyzes the importance

of innovation in the practice of successful

manufacturing and service-based organiza-

tions in the public, private, and volunteer sectors

in a sectoral, national, and global context. It

examines innovation as a managerial, social,

political, and emotional process. The text is

reinforced by chapter summaries, case studies,

review questions, and a companion website. It

is ideal for advanced undergraduate courses in

business, engineering, and computer science

management.

* An Instructor’s Manual and PowerPoint® slides are available to adopters.

April 2005 • 400 pp. • 100 illus. • 0-19-926226-8 paper • APS CONWAY

Please contact your Oxford sales representative at 1-800-280-0280 for additional information.

Contents

SETTING THE SCENE1. Introduction: Key Themes, Concepts,

and Definitions

2. Tensions and Contradictions in Managing Innovation

3. The Network Model of Innovation

MAPPING TECHNOLOGICAL CHANGE AND OPPORTUNITY

4. Micro Models: S-Curve, Dominant Design,Product-Process Cycle

5. Macro Models: Technological Trajectories,Cycles and Discontinuity

6. Strategy and Core-Competence

THE MANAGEMENT OF INNOVATION WITHIN ORGANIZATIONS

7. Organizing for Innovation: Organization Structure and Culture

8. Emergent Structures and Sub-Cultures:The Roles of Social Networks

9. Managing the Activities in the Innovation Process

10. Managing the Knowledge Creation and Diffusion Process

THE IMPACT OF CONTEXT ON THE MANAGEMENT OF INNOVATION11. Systems of Innovation: Sectoral, Regional,

and National

12. Sources of Innovation: Users, Suppliers,Competitors, and Universities

13. Networks of Innovators: Collaboration and Cooperation

14. Networks of Stakeholders: The Social and Political Shaping of Innovation

Index

STRATEGIC CORPORATEMANAGEMENT FOR ENGINEERINGPAUL S. CHINOWSKY, Georgia Institute ofTechnology, and JAMES E. MEREDITH, UnitedState Army Corps of Engineers (Retired)

Strategic Corporate Management for Engin-eering bridges the gap between business and

engineering textbooks and reference books.

This groundbreaking volume applies the

concepts of strategic management to the

specifics of the civil engineering industry. Ideal

for courses in engineering organizations,

organizational or project management, and

construction management, Strategic Cor-porate Management for Engineering also

serves as a valuable resource for professionals.

Addressing a critical need in the civil

engineering industry, it provides students,

educators, and professionals with the basic

tools to compete effectively in the changing

global marketplace for engineering and

construction services.

2000 • 416 pp. • 106 illus. • 0-19-512467-7 paper • APS CHINOW

ContentsPreface

Acknowledgments

PART 1. PREPARING FOR STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT

1. Strategic Management: A Background

2. The Strategic Management Foundation

PART 2. INTERNAL STRATEGICMANAGEMENT ISSUES

3. The First Steps: Visions, Missions, and Goals

4. Core Competencies of the Civil Engineering Firm

5. Knowledge and Information Resources

6. Organization Education

PART 3. EXTERNAL STRATEGICMANAGEMENT ISSUES

7. Fiscal Management: Putting a Focus on Long-Term Bottom-Lines

8. Evaluating Market Opportunities

9. Competition: Battle in the Civil Engineering Arena

10. Putting Strategic Management into Action

COMPUTER-AIDEDPROJECT MANAGEMENTGEORGE SUHANIC

Ideal for upper-division undergraduate and

graduate level courses in civil, mechanical, and

construction engineering, Computer-AidedProject Management builds a bridge from the

genesis of project management principles

through today’s software. It shows what fun-

damental project management principles are,

what they do, and how they work in the

software environment. It demonstrates these

principles with a unique emphasis on case

studies. An important feature of systems

project management—the use of “scope” and

“quality”—is discussed. The book adopts a

unique systems perspective that includes

project coding, an essential skill in project

database management.

2000 • 496 pp. • 142 illus. • 0-19-511591-0paper • APS SUHAN

ContentsAbbreviations, Acronyms, & Definitions

Preface

Acknowledgments

Project Management As Paradigm

PART 1. INTRODUCTION

1. Introduction

PART 2. SYSTEMS OF PROJECTMANAGEMENT

2. The Project Definition Structure

3. The Work Breakdown Structure

4. The Project Functional Organization

5. The Project Budget & Cost Control System

6. The Project Planning & Schedule Control System

PART 3. CASE HISTORIES AND EXERCISES

7. Corporate Engineering Department Case History

8. Rapid Transit Expansion Program (RTEP) Case Exercise

9. Research Center Case History

10. High Speed Rail (HSR) Project Case Exercise

11. International Airport Project Case Exercise

12. Research Center CPM Schedule Exercise

13. Construction Cost/Schedule Integration

PART 4. PROJECT MANAGEMENT SUPPORT SYSTEMS

14. Procurement and Purchasing

15. Material Management


NEW!


DISCUSSION OF THE METHODConducting the Engineer’sApproach to Problem SolvingBILLY VAUGHN KOEN,University of Texas, Austin

Discussion of the Method describes how engi-

neers learn and solve problems and generalizes

it to a universal method for problem-solving.

Delving into the connection between engi-

neering and philosophy, this groundbreaking

text illustrates how the theoretical and the

practical can merge to form real-world solu-

tions. Furthermore, the methodology covered

in this innovative book is extremely user-

friendly and easily synthesized with individual

approaches to problem-solving.

The Method: An Over view■ Part I describes the problem situation that

calls for the talents of the engineer andemphasizes how frequently this situation is encountered.

■ Part II defines the engineering method.

■ Part III lists examples of techniques usedto implement the engineering method,describes several alternative definitions ofthe engineering method, and renders themethod in its final form.

■ Part IV generalizes the engineering methodto universal method.

■ Part V gives a concise, justified statement of universal method.

■ Part VI delivers a specific example of theuniversal method in use.

Discussion of the Method is an ideal supple-

ment for introductory and advanced courses

in engineering, philosophy, and other disci-

plines, as well as a compelling read for general

audiences.

2003 • 276 pp. • 51 illus. • 0-19-515599-8 paper • APS KOEN

ContentsFigures and Tables

Preface

Introduction

1. Some Thoughts on Engineering

1.1. The Engineer

1.2. Characteristics of an Engineering Problem

1.3. Example Engineering Problems

2. The Principal Rule of the Engineering Method

2.1. Definition of Engineering Design

2.2. The Heuristic

2.3. State of the Art

2.4. Principal Rule of the Engineering Method

3. Some Heuristics Used by the Engineering Method

3.1. Definition of Engineering Design (BIS)

3.2. The Heuristic Method

3.3. Nature of Our Argument

3.4. Representative Engineering Heuristics

3.5. Alternate Definitions of Engineering

3.6. Nature as a Designer

3.7. Preferred Definition of the Engineering Method

3.8. Engineering Worldview

4. The Universale Organum

4.1 Difficulties in Explaining the Koan

4.2. Compelling Belief in Koan

4.3. Comparison of Heuristic and Skeptical Positions

4.4. Overall sota

4.5. A Discourse on Method

4.6. Engineering, Philosophy, and the Universal Method

5. Summary of the Method

6. Application of the Method

6.1. Traditional Utopia

6.2. Utopia as Program for Change

6.3. Eutopia

6.4. Mundus Institute of Technology

6.5. Research in Progress

An Anachronistic Preface

Heuristics

Index

REPORTING TECHNICALINFORMATIONTenth EditionThe late KENNETH W. HOUP,Pennsylvania State University,

THOMAS E. PEARSALL,University of Minnesota,

ELIZABETH TEBEAUX, Texas A & M University,

and SAM DRAGGA, Texas Tech University

Keeping pace with current technology and

research, Reporting Technical Information,

Tenth Edition, introduces students to all

aspects of technical communication, including

letters, proposals and progress reports, recom-

mendation reports, research reports, instruc-

tions, and oral reports. It provides information

on such topics as when to use e-mail (rather

than conventional letters and memos), writing

for a specific audience, using illustrations, and

searching the Internet for information on jobs

and potential employers. Each chapter opens

with a real-world scenario that shows students

how the information in the chapter applies to

an on-the-job situation. Comprehensive and

up-to-date, the tenth edition of ReportingTechnical Information maintains the repu-

tation of an exceptional text for courses in

technical and professional writing and com-

munication.

* A Test Bank on three 3.5” Windows disks isavailable. (0-19-515131-3)

* A companion website is available:www.houp10e.com

2001 • 720 pp. • 92 illus. • 0-19-514612-3 paper • APS HOUP10


Engineering Design Technic al Writing

-

-

–

–

New EditionForthcoming!


Features■ Chapter 6, Writing Ethically, provides

realistic exercises dealing with ethicaldilemmas, guides students to relevant Websites, and includes illustrative material fromthe codes of various professional groups.

■ Chapter 7, Writing for InternationalReaders, offers a concise yet comprehen-sive introduction to the differences among world cultures and the effects of these differences on communication. It coverssuch issues as the importance of personalrelationships, individualism versus collectivism, various views of truth, and the power and value of time.

■ Chapter 8, Gathering, Evaluating, andDocumenting Information, helps studentsformulate research questions and pointsthem to several sources of informationincluding interviewing, the electroniclibrary catalog, indexes, and the Internet.

■ Chapter 17 contains information onempirical research reports.

ContentsEach chapter ends with Exercises.

Preface

1. An Overview of Technical Writing

1.1. Some Matters of Definition

1.2. The Substance of Technical Writing

1.3. The Nature of Technical Writing

1.4. The Attributes of Good Technical Writers

1.5. The Qualities of Good Technical Writing

1.6. A Day in the Life of Two Technical Writers

PART 1. FOUNDATIONS

2. Composing

2.1. Situational Analysis

2.2. Discovery

2.3. Arrangement

2.4. Drafting and Revising

2.5. Editing

3. Writing Collaboratively

3.1. Planning

3.2. Drafting

3.3. Revising and Editing

3.4. Collaboration in the Workplace

3.5. Collaboration on the Internet

3.6. Group Conferences

4. Writing for Your Readers

4.1. Goals of Communication

4.2. The Planning Process

5. Achieving a Readable Style

5.1. The Paragraph

5.2. Lists and Tables

5.3. Clear Sentence Structure

5.4. Specific Words

5.5. Pomposity

5.6. Good Style in Action

5.7. Choosing a Style for International Readers

6. Writing Ethically

6.1. Understanding Ethical Behavior

6.2. Recognizing Unethical Communication

6.3. Behaving Ethically

6.4. Dealing with Unethical Behavior in Others

7. Writing for International Readers

7.1. Establishing a Perspective on InternationalCommunication

7.2. Understanding Readers from Various Cultures

7.3. Considering Culture in the Planning Process

7.4. Example International Documents for Examination

7.5. Writing Business Communications toReaders in Other Cultures

7.6. Culture and Graphics

7.7. A Final Word

7.8. Guides to Doing Business in Culturesaround the World

PART 2. TECHNIQUES

8. Gathering, Evaluating, and Documenting Information

8.1. Asking the Right Questions

8.2. Looking for Answers

8.3. Evaluating Answers

8.4. Citing Sources

9. Presenting Information

9.1. Chronology

9.2. Topical Organization

9.3. Exemplification

9.4. Analogy

9.5. Classification and Division

9.6. Definition

9.7. Description

10. Analyzing Information

10.1. Classical Argument

10.2. Pro and Con

10.3. Induction and Deduction

10.4. Comparison

10.5. Toulmin Logic

11. Document Design

11.1. Understanding the Basics of Document Design

11.2. Designing Effective Pages and Screens

11.3. Choosing Readable Type

11.4. Appreciating the Importance ofDocument Design

12. Using Illustrations

12.1. Choosing Illustrations

12.2. Creating Illustrations

12.3. Designing Illustrations Ethically

PART 3. APPLICATIONS

13. Correspondence

13.1. Determining Your Purpose

13.2. Analyzing the Audience

13.3. Composing Letters, Memos, and E-Mail

13.4. Finding the Appropriate Style

13.5. Special Considerations for E-Mail

13.6. Special Considerations for International Correspondence

13.7. Keeping Copies of Correspondence

14. The Strategies and Communications of the Job Hunt

14.1. Preparation

14.2. The Correspondence of the Job Hunt

14.3. Interviewing

15. Proposals and Progress Reports

15.1. The Relationship between Proposals and Progress Reports

15.2. Proposals

15.3. Progress Reports

15.4. Physical Appearance of Proposals and Progress Reports

15.5. Style and Tone of Proposals and Progress Reports

15.6. Other Forms of Proposals and Progress Reports

16. Recommendation Reports

16.1. An Informal Report:The Church Repair Project

16.2. A Formal Report: The Oil Spill Problem

16.3. A Feasibility Report:Department Store Location

16.4. A Final Word

17. Empirical Research Reports

17.1. Audience Adaptation

17.2. Introduction and Literature Review

17.3. Materials and Methods

17.4. Results

17.5. Discussion

17.6. A Final Word

18. Instructions

18.1. Situational Analysis for Instructions

18.2. Possible Components of Instructions

18.3. Accessible Format

18.4. Reader Checks

19. Oral Reports

19.1. Preparation

19.2. Delivery Techniques

19.3. Arranging Content

19.4. Presentation

19.5. Visual Aids

Appendix A: Handbook

Appendix B: Formal Elements of Document Design

Chapter Notes

Index

Head to B ComeTechnic al Writing


TECHNICALCOMMUNICATIONPrinciples and PracticeMEENAKSHI RAMAN and SANGEETASHARMA, both at Birla Institute ofTechnology and Science, India

This book presents a comprehensive treatment

of the basics of technical communication,

both oral and written. The text covers contem-

porary topics such as technical proposals,

research papers, technical theses, dissertations,

and instruction manuals. It demonstrates

attractive presentation styles and layouts, con-

tains numerous exhibits specific to technical

applications, and includes appendixes on

common errors, punctuation, spelling, and

proofreading symbols. Also included are

recent developments in communication tech-

nology such as the use of the Internet and

contemporary software including PowerPoint®,

LaTeX®, and ChiWriter®. It is ideal for under-

gradaute courses in technical communication.

2004 • 608 pp. • 0-19-566804-9paper • APS RAMTEC

Contents

PART I: OVERVIEW

1. Basics of Technical Communication

2. Barriers to Communication

3. Technology in Communication

PART II: ORAL FORMS

4. Active Listening

5. Effective Presentation Strategies

6. Interviews

7. Group Communication

PART III: CONSTITUENTS OF EFFECTIVE WRITING

8. Words and Phrases

9. Sentence Construction

10. Paragraph Development

11. The Art of Condensation

12. Reading Comprehension

PART IV: WRITTEN FORMS

13. Letters, Memos, and E-mails

14. Reports

15. Technical Proposals

16. Research Papers, Dissertations, and Theses

17. Instruction Manuals and Technical Descriptions

Index

Appendixes

FUNDAMENTALCONCEPTS IN THEDESIGN OF EXPERIMENTSFifth EditionCHARLES R. HICKS, Purdue University, andKENNETH V. TURNER, Jr., Anderson University

This fifth edition offers comprehensive cover-

age of the key elements of experimental design

used by applied researchers to solve problems

in the field. Wide-ranging and accessible, it

shows students how to use applied statistics

for planning, running, and analyzing experi-

ments. Featuring more than 350 problems

taken from the authors’ actual industrial con-

sulting experiences, the text gives students

valuable practice with real data and problem

solving. The problems emphasize the basic

philosophy of design and are simple enough

for students with limited mathematical back-

grounds to understand. The authors provide

extensive coverage of the analysis of residuals,

the concept of resolution in fractional

replications, Plackett-Burman designs, and

Taguchi techniques. SAS (Statistical Analysis

System) computer programs are incorporated

to facilitate analysis.

* A Solutions Manual is available.(0-19-513520-2)

1999 • 576 pp. • 168 illus. • 0-19-512273-9 cloth • APS HICKS5

ContentsPreface

1. The Experiment, the Design, and the Analysis2. Review of Statistical Inference3. Single-Factor Experiments with No Restrictions

on Randomization4. Single-Factor Experiments: Randomized Block

and Latin Square Designs5. Factorial Experiments6. Fixed, Random, and Mixed Models7. Nested and Nested-Factorial Experiments8. Experiments of Two or More Factors:

Restrictions on Randomization9. 2f Factorial Experiments

10. 3f Factorial Experiments11. Factorial Experiment: Split-Plot Design12. Factorial Experiment: Confounding in Blocks13. Fractional Replication14. The Taguchi Approach to the Design

of Experiments15. Regression16. Miscellaneous Topics

Glossary of TermsReferencesStatistical TablesAnswers to Selected ProblemsIndex

Experiment Design

T H E O X F O R D S E R I E S I N

Electrical and Computer EngineeringTHE OXFORD SERIES IN ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING is dedicated to

teaching tomorrow’s engineers to analyze, to design, to problem-solve, and to apply

their knowledge in the world they will live in. Written by authors with unparalleled

expertise in academia and industry, each series volume is held to a standard of

excellence and innovation: combine the latest technology with pedagogy that

helps students learn and instructors teach.

It has been a busy year for THE OXFORD SERIES IN ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER

ENGINEERING. We have assembled an Editorial Board of advisors in all areas

of electrical and computer engineering to support series editor Adel S. Sedra, and

Oxford University Press engineering editor Danielle Christensen in researching

and building the series. This board of top engineering educators will represent six

key areas of the Electrical and Computer Engineering curriculum:

■ Circuits and Electronics

■ Communications and Signal Processing

■ Computer Engineering

■ Controls and Systems

■ Electromagnetics and Optics

■ Power Electronics and Power Systems

The board will assist in identifying topics and courses where new textbooks are

needed, advising on trends in the topic areas and courses, and locating the best

authors to write the books. The first eight members of the board include:

■ Cynthia Furse, University of Utah■ John Hayes, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor■ Pradeep Khosla, Carnegie Mellon University■ Phillip Krein, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign■ Gordon Roberts, McGill University■ Edgar Sanchez-Sinencio, Texas A&M University■ Mark Spong, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign■ Anastasios (Tas) Venetsanopoulos, University of Toronto

Oxford University Press is always on the lookout for educators who can show

students a better approach or an innovative twist. Please let us know if you have an

idea for an engineering textbook. Or perhaps you are interested in helping us

develop new projects and revisions of existing texts by acting as a reviewer. We are

interested in what you have to say and invite you to contact Danielle Christensen

at (212) 726-6206 or [email protected].


elec

tric

alen

gin

eeri

ng

THE OXFORD SERIES IN ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERINGAdel S. Sedra, SERIES EDITOR

■ Allen and Holberg, CMOS Analog Circuit Design, 2/e

■ Bobrow, Elementary Linear Circuit Analysis, 2/e

■ Bobrow, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering, 2/e

■ Burns and Roberts, An Introduction to Mixed-SignalIC Test and Measurement

■ Campbell, The Science and Engineering ofMicroelectronic Fabrication, 2/e

■ Chen, Digital Signal Processing

■ Chen, Linear System Theory and Design, 3/e

■ Chen, Signals and Systems, 3/e

■ Comer, Digital Logic and State Machine Design, 3/e

■ Comer, Microprocessor-based System Design

■ Cooper and McGillem, Probabilistic Methods ofSignal and System Analysis, 3/e

■ DeCarlo and Lin, Linear Circuit Analysis, 2/e

■ Dimitrijev, Understanding Semiconductor Devices

■ Fortney, Principles of Electronics

■ Franco, Electric Circuits Fundamentals

■ Ghausi, Electronic Devices and Circuits

■ Guru and Hiziroglu, Electric Machinery and Transformers, 3/e

■ Guru and Warrier, Electric Circuits

■ Houts, Signal Analysis in Linear Systems

■ Jones, Introduction to Optical Fiber Communication Systems

■ Krein, Elements of Power Electronics

■ Kuo, Digital Control Systems, 2/e

■ Lathi, Linear Systems and Signals, 2/e

■ Lathi, Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, 3/e

■ Lathi, Signal Processing and Linear Systems

■ Martin, Digital Integrated Circuit Design

■ Miner, Lines and Electromagnetic Fields for Engineers

■ Parhami, Computer Architecture

■ Parhami, Computer Arithmetic

■ Roberts and Sedra, SPICE, 2/e

■ Roulston, An Introduction to the Physics of Semiconductor Devices

■ Sadiku, Elements of Electromagnetics, 3/e

■ Santina, Stubberud, and Hostetter, Digital ControlSystem Design, 2/e

■ Sarma, Introduction to Electrical Engineering

■ Schaumann and Van Valkenburg,Design of Analog Filters

■ Schwarz and Oldham, Electrical Engineering, 2/e

■ Sedra and Smith, Microelectronic Circuits, 5/e

■ Stefani, Shahian, Savant, and Hostetter,Design of Feedback Control Systems, 4/e

■ Tsividis, Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor, 2/e

■ Van Valkenburg, Analog Filter Design

■ Warner and Grung, MOSFET Theory and Design

■ Wolovich, Automatic Control Systems

■ Yariv, Optical Electronics in Modern Communications, 5/e

■ Zak, Systems and Control

E L E C T R I C A L E N G I N E E R I N G | 17


INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICALENGINEERINGMULUKUTLA S. SARMA,Northeastern University

Comprehensive, up-to-date, and problem-

oriented, Introduction to Electrical Engineer-ing is ideal for courses that introduce

non-electrical engineering majors to the lan-

guage and principles of electrical engineering.

It can also be used in undergraduate survey

courses taken by electrical engineering majors.

Covering a uniquely broad range of topics, this

text discusses the underlying concepts and

methods behind various electrical engineering

applications—from consumer gadgets and

biomedical electronics to sophisticated instru-

mentation systems, computers, and electric

machinery. Sarma highlights basic physical

concepts while also emphasizing mathematical

techniques, motivating students to learn the

material in a logical sequence beginning with

physical principles and extending to process-

es, modeling, using analytical techniques, and

finally, designing.

* A Student CD-ROM is packaged with each copy of the text.


* An Instructor’s CD-ROM containing PowerPointOverheads is available. (0-19-514472-4)

* A companion website is available:www.mssarma.org

2000 • 896 pp. • 1568 illus. • 0-19-513604-7 cloth • APS SARMA

The Oxford Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering

Features■ Incorporates practical and open-ended

case studies at the end of each chapter

■ Includes more than 1,000 end-of-chapterproblems, a wealth of examples, and morethan 1,500 illustrations

■ Offers comprehensive chapters on signal processing, control systems, andcommunication systems

■ Provides integrated coverage of MATLAB and SPICE

■ Adopts a modern focus on design and teamwork

■ Contains complete solutions to 20% of the end-of-chapter problems on theenclosed CD

■ Includes helpful appendixes on the FE examination; mathematical relations; solution of simultaneous equations; complex numbers; Fourier series; Laplace transforms; and more

ContentsEach chapter ends with a Problems section.

List of Case Studies and Computer-Aided AnalysisPrefaceOverview

PART 1: ELECTRIC CIRCUITS

1. Circuit Concepts

1.1. Electrical Quantities1.2. Lumped-Circuit Elements1.3. Kirchhoff’s Laws1.4. Meters and Measurements1.5. Analogy between Electrical and Other

Nonelectric Physical Systems1.6. Learning Objectives1.7. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Resistance Strain Gauge

2. Circuit Analysis Techniques

2.1. Thévenin and Norton Equivalent Circuits2.2. Node-Voltage and Mesh-Current Analyses2.3. Superposition and Linearity2.4. Wye-Delta Transformation2.5. Computer-Aided Circuit Analysis: SPICE2.6. Computer-Aided Circuit Analysis: MATLAB2.7. Learning Objectives2.8. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Jump Starting a Car

3. Time-Dependent Circuit Analysis

3.1. Sinusoidal Steady-State Phasor Analysis3.2. Transients in Circuits3.3. Laplace Transform3.4. Frequency Response3.5. Computer-Aided Circuit Simulation for

Transient Analysis, AC Analysis, and Fre-quency Response Using PSpice and PROBE

3.6. Use of MATLAB in Computer-Aided Circuit Simulation

3.7 Learning Objectives3.8. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Automotive Ignition System

4. Three-Phase Circuits and Residential Wiring

4.1. Three-Phase Source Voltages and Phase Sequence

4.2. Balanced Three-Phase Loads4.3. Measurement of Power

4.4. Residential Wiring and SafetyConsiderations

4.5. Learning Objectives4.6. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Physiological Effects of Current and Electrical Safety

PART 2: ELECTRONIC ANALOG AND DIGITAL SYSTEMS

5. Analog Building Blocks and Operational Amplifiers

5.1. The Amplifier Block5.2. Ideal Operational Amplifier5.3. Practical Properties of Operational

Amplifiers5.4. Applications of Operational Amplifiers5.5. Learning Objectives5.6. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Automotive Power-Assisted Steering System

6. Digital Building Blocks and Computer Systems

6.1. Digital Building Blocks6.2. Digital System Components6.3. Computer Systems6.4. Computer Networks6.5. Learning Objectives6.6. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Microcomputer-Controlled Breadmaking Machine

7. Semiconductor Devices

7.1. Semiconductors7.2. Diodes7.3. Bipolar Junction Transistors7.4. Field-Effect Transistors7.5. Integrated Circuits7.6. Learning Objectives7.7. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Electronic Photo Flash

8. Transistor Amplifiers

8.1. Biasing the BJT8.2. Biasing the FET8.3. BJT Amplifiers8.4. FET Amplifiers8.5. Frequency Response of Amplifiers8.6. Learning Objectives8.7. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Mechatronics: Electronics Integrated with Mechanical Systems

9. Digital Circuits

9.1. Transistor Switches9.2. DTL and TTL Logic Circuits9.3. CMOS and Other Logic Families9.4. Learning Objectives9.5. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Cardiac Pacemaker, a BiomedicalEngineering Application

PART 3: ENERGY SYSTEMS

10. AC Power Systems

10.1. Introduction to Power Systems10.2. Single- and Three-Phase Systems10.3. Power Transmission and Distribution10.4. Learning Objectives10.5. Practical Application: A Case Study—

The Great Blackout of 1965

Introduction to Electrical Engineering


11. Magnetic Circuits and Transformers

11.1. Magnetic Materials11.2. Magnetic Circuits11.3. Transformer Equivalent Circuits11.4. Transformer Performance11.5. Three-Phase Transformers11.6. Autotransformers11.7. Learning Objectives11.8. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Magnetic Bearings for Space Technology

12. Electromechanics

12.1. Basic Principles of ElectromechanicalEnergy Conversion

12.2. EMF Produced by Windings12.3. Rotating Magnetic Fields12.4. Forces and Torques in Magnetic-Field

Systems12.5. Basic Aspects of Electromechanical

Energy Converters12.6. Learning Objectives12.7. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Sensors or Transducers

13. Rotating Machines

13.1. Elementary Concepts of Rotating Machines13.2. Induction Machines13.3. Synchronous Machines13.4. Direct-Current Machines13.5. Learning Objectives13.6. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Wind-Energy-Conversion Systems

PART 4: INFORMATION SYSTEMS

14. Signal Processing

14.1. Signals and Spectral Analysis14.2. Modulation, Sampling, and Multiplexing14.3. Interference and Noise14.4. Learning Objectives14.5. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Antinoise Systems, Noise Cancellation

15. Communication Systems

15.1. Waves, Transmission Lines, Waveguides,and Antenna Fundamentals

15.2. Analog Communication Systems15.3. Digital Communication Systems15.4. Learning Objectives15.5. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Global Positioning Systems

PART 5: CONTROL SYSTEMS

16. Basic Control Systems

16.1. Power Semiconductor-Controlled Drives16.2. Feedback Control Systems16.3. Digital Control Systems16.4. Learning Objectives16.5. Practical Application: A Case Study—

Digital Process Control

Appendixes

A. ReferencesB. Brief Review of Fundamentals of

Engineering (FE) ExaminationC. Technical Terms, Units, Constants, and

Conversion Factors for the SI SystemD. Mathematical RelationsE. Solution of Simultaneous EquationsF. Complex NumbersG. Fourier SeriesH. Laplace Transforms

Index

FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICALENGINEERINGSecond EditionLEONARD S. BOBROW,University of Massachusetts, Amherst

This highly successful survey of the fun-

damental principles of modern electrical

engineering offers an in-depth examination of

four major topics: circuits, electronics, digital

systems, and electromagnetics. Advanced

concepts such as resistive analysis, time- and

frequency-domain analysis, sequential and

combinational logic, and elementary system

principles are discussed in detail. This up-

dated edition includes a new chapter on

the circuit analysis software SPICE, with a

particular focus on the PC version of PSPICE.

Numerous drill exercises illustrating concepts

from the text have been added, and 346 out

of the 1182 end-of-chapter problems appear

for the first time.


1996 • 1184 pp. • 1118 illus. • 0-19-510509-5 cloth • APS SEE40


ContentsPART 1: CIRCUITS

1. Basic Elements and Laws2. Circuit Analysis Principles3. Time-Domain Circuit Analysis4. AC Analysis5. Important Circuit and System Concepts

PART 2: ELECTRONICS6. Diodes7. Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)8. Field-Effect Transistors (FETs)9. Transistor Amplifiers

10. Electronic Circuits and Amplifiers

PART 3: DIGITAL SYSTEMS11. Digital Logic12. Logic Design13. Digital Devices

PART 4: ELECTROMAGNETICS14. Electromagnetics15. Machines

PART 5: SPICE16. SPICE

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERINGAn Introduction Second EditionSTEVEN E. SCHWARZ andWILLIAM G. OLDHAM, both at University of California, Berkeley

This comprehensive revision of a popular text

helps non-electrical engineering majors—the

future users, rather than the designers of electri-

cal devices, systems, and machines—gain a con-

ceptual understanding of electrical engineering.

Early coverage of systems and an emphasis on

an IC (integrated circuits) “building block”

approach motivates non-majors. The text

features integration of analog and digital tech-

nology with cutting-edge coverage of op-amps,

feedback and analog systems. A section on

SPICE introduces students to computerized

analysis of circuits. Chapter-end applications

capture student interest by relating material

to contemporary topics such as automobile

suspension systems, high-fidelity audio, and

hand-held computers.

* A Solutions Manual is available. (0-03-096850-X)

1993 • 782 pp. • illus. • 0-19-510585-0 cloth • APS SEE02


ContentsIntroduction and Overview

PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO CIRCUITS1. Principles of Electric Circuits2. Introduction to dc Circuit Analysis3. Techniques of dc Analysis4. Active Circuit Elements

PART 2: TIME-VARYING SIGNALS IN CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

5. Inductance and Capacitance6. Sinusoidal Signals7. Phasor Analysis8. Transient Response of Passive Circuits

PART 3: ANALOG SIGNALS AND TECHNIQUES9. Principles of Analog Systems

10. Practical Analog Technology

PART 4: DIGITAL SIGNALS AND THEIR USES11. Digital Building Blocks12. Introduction to Digital Systems

PART 5: ACTIVE DEVICES AND CIRCUITS13. Semiconductor Devices14. Transistor Amplifiers15. Digital Circuits

PART 6: MAGNETIC DEVICES, ELECTRICPOWER, AND MACHINES16. Electric Power17. Electromechanical Devices

ReferencesAnswers to Even-Numbered ProblemsIndex


DIGITAL LOGIC ANDSTATE MACHINE DESIGNThird EditionDAVID J. COMER, Brigham Young University

From one of the best-known and successful

authors in the field comes the third edition of

Digital Logic and State Machine Design.

The text is concise and practical and covers

the important area of digital system design

specifically for undergraduates. Comer’s pri-

mary goal is to illustrate that sequential cir-

cuits can be designed using state machine

techniques. These methods apply to sequen-

tial circuit design as efficiently as Boolean alge-

bra and Karnaugh mapping methods apply to

combinatorial design. After presenting the

techniques, Comer proceeds directly into

designing digital systems. In this edition, state

machines are introduced earlier than in previ-

ous editions, and chapters on programmable

logic devices and computer organization have

been added.




ContentsIntroduction to Digital Systems

1. Binary Systems and Logic Circuits

2. Boolean Algebra and Mapping Methods

3. Logic Function Realization with MSI Circuits

4. Flip-Flops, Counters, and Registers

5. Introduction to State Machines

6. Synchronous State Machine Design

7. Interfacing and Design of Synchronous Systems

8. Programmable Logic Devices

9. Digital Computing

10. Asynchronous State Machines

Appendix 1. Logic Families

Appendix 2. Pulse Generating Circuits

Answers to Drill Problems

Answers to Selected Problems

Index

LOGIC CIRCUIT DESIGNALAN W. SHAW, Utah State University

With Shaw’s conversational writing style,

sophomore engineering and computer science

majors will find this text’s coverage of combi-

national and sequential logic design easy to

understand and a pleasure to read. The text is

remarkably clear and provides extensive exam-

ples. Its design-first organization allows stu-

dents to master a simple systematic design

process, then move to design and analysis of

more complex circuits. The use of polarized

notation offers students an easy-to-learn nota-

tion that clarifies the thought process in

design, allows a simplification of the sign

process, and improves documentation. Soft-

ware simulation is stressed in all designed

circuits, allowing students to test circuits

before committing them to hardware. An early

introduction to programmable logic devices

reflects their importance in design.


Contents1. Introduction

2. Decimal, Binary, Octal, and Hexadecimal Numbers

3. Boolean Functions

4. Combinational Logic Circuits

5. Examples of Combinational Logic Circuits

6. Programmable Logic Devices

7. Sequential Machines

8. Two-State State Machines (Flip-Flops)

9. Many-State Synchronous State Machines

10. State Machine Design and Analysis:Additional Topics

11. Examples of Sequential Logic Circuits

12. Digital Systems Design

Appendix

Index

ELECTRIC CIRCUITSAnalysis and DesignBHAG GURU AND RAVI K. WARRIER,both at Kettering University

Electric Circuits: Analysis and Design pres-

ents a clear, accessible treatment of the basic

theory of electrical circuits. The authors have

carefully selected the material in the text to

provide an excellent stepping stone to all areas

of electrical engineering. Its chapters are

organized so that the book can be used to sat-

isfy the requirements of any curriculum.

The book begins by introducing the basic

circuit laws and theorems using resistive cir-

cuits only. This material is not restricted to DC

sources only. Time-varying voltage and cur-

rent sources are also considered so students

are exposed to circuit configurations they will

see in the real world. In addition, the effect of

temperature on resistance—an important factor

that is often ignored by other textbooks—is

covered. The text moves on to the inductor

and capacitor, magnetic circuits, Laplace

transforms, three-phase circuits, resonant

circuits, and Fourier series and its applications.

Electric Circuits: Analysis and Design is

ideal for introductory undergraduate courses

in electrical circuits.

Features■ Focuses on fundamental circuit theory

versus the rote memorization of formulae

■ Provides a separate chapter on the opera-tional amplifier

■ Employs numerous worked examples andpractice problems throughout the text

■ Includes a primer on solving first- and second-order differential equations for additionalpractice and review

■ Contains tables of Laplace transforms andtheir properties for easy reference and review

Digital Logic/Design Circuits

NEW TITLEforthcoming inS E P T E M B E R 2 0 0 5 !


September 2005 • 700 pp. • 1000 illus.

0-19-517723-1 • cloth •APS GURU

*An Instructor’s Manual is available to adopters.



ContentsEach chapter begins with an Introduction and ends with Problems.

1. Basic Circuit Concepts

2. Kirchhoff’s Laws and Their Applications

3. Various Circuit Analysis Techniques

4. Inductors and First-Order Inductive Circuits

5. Capacitors and First-Order Capacitive Circuits

6. Second-Order Circuits

7. Steady-State Analysis of AC Circuits

8. Frequency Response and Resonance

9. Magnetically Coupled Circuits

10. Three-Phase Circuits

11. Operational Amplifiers

12. Laplace Transforms and Their Applications

13. Transfer Function and Frequency Response

14. Fourier Series and Its Applications

15. Fourier Transforms

Appendix: Review of Differential Equations

LINEAR CIRCUITANALYSISTime Domain, Phasor,and Laplace TransformApproaches

Second Edition

RAYMOND A. DeCARLO and PEN-MIN LIN,both at Purdue University

Designed for an introductory electric circuitscourse, the second edition of Linear CircuitAnalysis provides authoritative and in-depthyet highly accessible coverage of traditionallinear circuit analysis topics. This second edition represents a comprehensive revision,featuring:

■ Complete integration and extensive use ofMATLAB in solving problems and examples

■ Frequent use of SPICE, especially with opamp circuits

■ Twenty percent more examples and numer-ous additional illustrations

■ Approximately three times as many exercisesimmediately following the examples

■ More than 1000 end-of-chapter problems(approximately 25% more than the first edition, categorized and graded from thesimpler to the more complex; this editionincludes many new basic problems)

■ Excellent pedagogical elements includingcase studies, motivational real-world illus-trations, and key terms and concepts

* A Solutions Manual CD is available.(0-19-514218-7)

* PowerPoint Overheads are available.(0-19-514724-3)

* A companion website is available.www.decarlolin.org

2001 • 1024 pp. • 1905 illus. • 0-19-513666-7 cloth • APS DECARL


A Student CD—Packaged with Each Copy of the Text—Contains:■ Complete Solutions for Students to 10%

of the Homework Exercises. These solutionshave been solved step-by-step by the authors.

■ Additional MATLAB Problems. Designedto challenge students and extend their un-derstanding of software tools, these com-plex MATLAB problems are contained onthe CD in an Adobe Acrobat file. Solutionsare available at www.decarlolin.org under“MATLAB Solutions.”

■ Laboratory Manual. A 214-page laboratorymanual on the in-text CD includes courseobjectives, laboratory safety instructions,fifteen experiments, and nine useful appen-dixes.

■ A FREE Copy of the Multisim 2001 Text-book Edition. This powerful SPICE simu-lation software contains a fully functionalversion of Multisim 2001 and includes a1500 component database, 6 virtual instru-ments, 6 analyses, the Simplified VersionInterface, and Save and Print capabilities.

ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary, Terms andConcepts, and Problems.

1. Introduction and Basic Concepts2. Kirchhoff’s Current & Voltage Laws and

Series-Parallel Resistive Circuits3. Nodal and Loop Analyses4. The Operational Amplifier5. Linearity, Superposition, and Source

Transformations6. Thévenin, Norton, and Maximum Power

Transfer Theorems7. Inductors, Capacitors, and Duality8. First-Order RL and RC Circuits9. Second-Order Linear Circuits

10. Sinusoidal Steady-State Analysis by Phasor Methods

11. Sinusoidal Steady-State Power Calculations12. Balanced Three-Phase Circuits13. Laplace Transform Analysis, 1: Basics14. Laplace Transform Analysis, 2: Circuit

Applications15. Laplace Transform Analysis, 3: Transfer

Function Applications16. Time Domain Circuit Response Computations:

The Convolution Method17. Resonant and Bandpass Circuits18. Magnetically Coupled Circuits and Transformers19. Two-Ports20. Analysis of Interconnected Two-Ports21. Principles of Basic Filtering22. Fourier Series with Applications to

Electronic Circuits

APPENDIXES:A1. MatricesA2. Solving Circuit Problems with MATLAB:

Chapters 1 to 12A3. Use of SPICE in Linear Circuits

Index


LINEAR CIRCUITSAnalysis and SynthesisA. RAMAKALYAN,National Institute of Technology,Tiruchirapalli, India

This book provides in-depth coverage of top-ics in circuit analysis and synthesis. It main-tains a balance between theory and problem-solving techniques and presents the materialin an easy-to-read, accessible manner. Basiccircuit concepts are reinforced through actualdesign problems. Illustrative examples,thought-provoking exercises, and PSpice®

problems are interspersed throughout the textto help students develop problem-solvingskills. Linear Circuits: Analysis and Synthesisis ideal for introductory undergraduate coursesin electric circuits.

2005 • 648 pp. • 500 illus. • 0-19-567001-9paper • APS RAMAKA

ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary and Exercises.

1. Introduction

2. The Elements

3. Graphs, Networks, and Circuits

4. Analysis of Resistive Circuits

5. Transients with Energy Storage Elements

6. Sinusoidal Sources and Response

7. Frequency Response of Networks

8. Power Circuits

9. Two-Port Parameters

10. Generalized Frequency Response

11. Synthesis of Networks

12. General Linear Systems

Apendixes

ELECTRIC CIRCUITSFUNDAMENTALSSERGIO FRANCO,San Francisco State University

This exciting book teaches the foundations ofelectric circuits and develops a thinking styleand a problem-solving methodology that isbased on physical insight. Franco introducesideal transformers and amplifiers early on tostimulate student interest by giving a taste ofactual engineering practice. This is followed byextensive coverage of the operational amplifierto provide a practical illustration of abstract butfundamental concepts such as impedancetransformation and root location control—always with a vigilant eye on the underlyingphysical basis. SPICE is referred to throughoutthe text as a means for checking the results ofhand calculations, and in separate end-of-

chapter sections, which introduce the mostimportant SPICE features where students willfind them most useful. More than 350 workedexamples, 400-plus exercises, and 1000 end-of-chapter problems help students develop anengineering approach to problem solving basedon conceptual understanding and physicalintuition rather than on rote procedures.

* A Student Problem Manual is available.(0-03-098252-9)

* Transparency Masters are available.(0-03-003533-3)

* An Instructor’s Manual is available.(0-19-510577-X)



ContentsForeword by Adel S. Sedra

1. Basic Concepts2. Resistive Circuits3. Circuit Analysis Techniques4. Circuit Theorems and Power Calculations5. Transformers and Amplifiers6. Operational Amplifiers7. Energy Storage Elements8. Transient Response of First-Order Circuits9. Transient Response of Second-Order Circuits

10. AC Response11. AC Circuit Analysis12. AC Power and Three-Phase Systems13. AC Resonance14. Network Functions15. Two-Port Networks and Coupled Coils16. The Laplace Transform17. Fourier Analysis Techniques

AppendixesAnswers to Odd-Numbered ProblemsIndex

ELEMENTARY LINEARCIRCUIT ANALYSISSecond EditionLEONARD S. BOBROW,University of Massachusetts, Amherst

A “student-friendly” introduction to the basicsof electric circuit analysis, this sophomore-level text covers traditional material, as well assuch modern topics as op-amps and the use ofdigital computers for circuit analysis. Thepresentation is very lucid and thorough withclearer and more complete explanations ofKirchhoff ’s laws and nodal analysis than incomparable texts. Bobrow also places greateremphasis on signals and waveforms. This textfeatures evaluation of initial conditions,phasor diagrams, and coverage of SPICE.




Contents1. Basic Elements and Laws2. Circuit Analysis Techniques3. Important Circuit Concepts4. Energy-Storage Elements5. First-Order Circuits6. Second-Order Circuits7. Computer-Aided Circuit Analysis8. Sinusoidal Analysis9. Power

10. Important AC Concepts11. The Laplace Transform12. Two-Port Networks13. Fourier Series

Appendix A. Matrices and DeterminantsAppendix B. SPICE

ALLAN’S CIRCUITSPROBLEMSALLAN D. KRAUS,University of Akron (Emeritus)

This book provides more than 400 linear

circuit analysis problems of varying degrees

of difficulty solved and tested by the author.

2001 • 560 pp. • 250 illus. • 0-19-514248-9 paper • APS KRAUS

Contents1. Introduction and Basic Concepts

2. Kirchhoff’s Current and Voltage Laws

3. Nodal and Loop Analyses

4. The Operational Amplifier

5. Superposition and Source Transformation

6. Thevenin, Norton, and Maximum Power Transfer Theorems

7. Inductors, Capacitors, and Duality

8. First Order RL and RC Circuits

9. Second Order RL and RC Circuits

10. Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis by Phasor Methods

11. Sinusoidal Steady State Power Calculations

12. Three Phase Power Systems

Circuits

NEW!

micro

electron

ics


S P O L I G H T O N

Editorial Design Production (EDP)If you won the lottery, would you still come to work every day?

Karen Shapiro would. A managing editor in Higher Education’s Editorial Design Production(EDP) group, Karen finds the work she does today as challenging and fun as she did when she first joined Oxford University Press in 1996. And that says a lot about the high esteem inwhich Karen and her work are held by her colleagues throughout the Higher Education Group.When it was time for the fifth edition of Microelectronic Circuits by Adel S. Sedra and KennethC. Smith to go into production in early 2003, it was Karen who shepherded the new editionfrom manuscript to printed book.

“It was big year for Oxford University Press, and this was the one book that could not miss its publication date,” says Karen. So how did Microelectronic Circuits, Fifth Edition, get published not just on time but one week ahead of schedule?

“It was a real team effort on the part of the entire EDP department, Editorial, the author, andour vendors,” said Karen. Adel Sedra proofed the answers to selected problems, then faxed the corrections to me. I emailed and faxed the compositor who then emailed the pdf files of thecorrections back to me to be proofed again. After approval, the compositor uploaded the files to the printer, who then output the files and had blues to me the next day!”

Karen has worked with numerous authors on many titles over the past nine years, but workingwith Adel Sedra was a truly exceptional experience. “Although Adel was under tremendouspressure to keep the book on track, I can honestly say that a more gracious, generous, andpleasant author does not exist. Working so closely with him, it was easy to understand whyMicroelectronic Circuits is the market leader. His preface and part openers are incredibly clearand succinct. He breaks down information in such a way that you get it. Because he is soengaged in the subject matter, he is open to and fascinated by any new idea.” To see the resultof their efforts, please turn to page 24.

Karen and her fellow production editors at Oxford University Press share a huge responsibility.They work with all internal departments—Editorial, Marketing, and Manufacturing—as well aswith freelance copyeditors, designers, and outside vendors. As the primary contact for anauthor, no one at the Press knows a particular book better than the production editor. As Karendescribes it, “When a new book is published, we all get very excited. Why? Because it is up tous to make sure that, in the end, the book is exactly what the author intended, and we havemaintained the integrity of the product.”

The enthusiasm Karen has for her work is exceeded only by her professionalism and workethic, which is not surprising given that she graduated from New York University with a majorin journalism and minors in Latin, politics, and philosophy. Through a senior-year internshipprogram at NYU, Karen joined Careers Magazine, where one article that she wrote (“Get aJob”) became a cover story and was awarded “Best Feature Article for Education Purposes”by the Association of Educational Publishers (EdPress). Asked by Random House to write and edit some sales materials, Karen stayed on and rose through the editorial ranks to assistant editor. Her editor-in-chief then took Karen along to Hearst, where the two of them created theirown imprint. It was here that Karen learned all aspects of publishing—from acquisition to salesto production. When circumstances changed and she moved to HarperCollins, Karen wantedto be a part of how books got made. It was also at HarperCollins that she met Elyse Dubin.When Elyse left HarperCollins for Oxford University Press to become director of its EDPdepartment, she called Karen and asked her to join the group. Nine years later, Karen cannotsee herself doing anything else. “I get to contribute something every day to create books thatwill be used by students who are going to go on to do wonderful, incredible things. What could be better than that?”


MICROELECTRONICCIRCUITSFifth EditionADEL S. SEDRA, University of Waterloo, andKENNETH C. SMITH, University of Toronto

Now in a fifth edition, this market-leading

textbook continues its standard of excellence

and innovation built on the solid pedagogical

foundation that instructors expect from Adel

S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith. All material in

this edition is thoroughly updated to reflect

changes in technology—CMOS technology in

particular. These technological changes have

shaped the book’s organization and topical

coverage, making it the most current resource

available for teaching tomorrow’s engineers

how to analyze and design electronic circuits.

2003 • 1392 pp. • 1208 illus. • 0-19-514251-9cloth • APS SEDRA5


Features■ Streamlined Organizational Structure:

The “must-cover” topics are placed first ineach chapter; the more specialized materialappears last. The first five chapters, Part I,are organized to form a coherent single-semester introductory course. Similarly, thenext five chapters, Part II, present a body ofmaterial for a second one-semester course.The final four chapters, Part III, contain sig-nificant topics that can be used as enhance-ments or substitutes for some of the materi-al in earlier chapters as well as resources forproject or thesis work.

■ MOSFETs and BJTs: Chapter 4 (MOSFETs)and Chapter 5 (BJTs) are completely re-written. The MOSFET coverage is placedfirst but the two devices can be covered inany desired order.

■ IC MOS and Bipolar Amplifiers: Chapter6 (Single-Stage Integrated-Circuit Ampli-fiers) and Chapter 7 (Differential andMultistage Amplifiers) are completelyrewritten to introduce IC MOS and bipolaramplifiers in an accessible, systematic way.

■ Amplifier Frequency Response: Amplifierfrequency response is now presented whereneeded (a “just-in-time” approach). Thisincludes brief coverage of the frequencyresponses of the common source and com-mon emitter amplifiers in Chapters 4 and 5,respectively.

Enhanced Student Suppor t■ A new CD—packaged with every copy of

the text—includes a free student version ofPSpice and the files for all SPICE analysisand design examples.

■ Revised summary sections and many moresummary tables are presented.

■ Numerous new and varied review exercisesand end-of-chapter problems are providedin addition to more SPICE examples withschematic captures.

■ An accompanying website—www.sedrasmith.org—features:

• SPICE Models and example files

• Links to industry data sheets and academicsites of related interest

• A sample chapter available for download(Chapter 5. Bipolar Junction Transistors)

Enhanced Instruc tor Suppor t■ An Instructor’s Manual with Trans-

parency Masters contains solutions to allexercises and end-of-chapter problems plushard copy masters of transparency acetates.(0-19-517268-X)

■ PowerPoint Overheads on CD contain allof the figures with captions from the maintext. (0-19-517267-1)

■ Transparency Acetates offer key figuresselected from the main text. (0-19-517269-8)

■ Text materials for subjects that are nolonger covered in the text (JFETs, GaAsdevices and circuits, TTL digital circuits)are included on the Student CD and thewebsite.


ContentsEach chapter begins with an Introduction and ends with aSummary and Problems.

Preface

PART I. DEVICES AND BASIC CIRCUITS

1. Introduction to Electronics

1.1. Signals

1.2. Frequency Spectrum of Signals

1.3. Analog and Digital Signals

1.4. Amplifiers

1.5. Circuit Models for Amplifiers

1.6. Frequency Response of Amplifiers

1.7. Digital Logic Inverters

1.8. Circuit Simulation Using SPICE


2.1. The Ideal Op Amp

2.2. The Inverting Configuration

2.3. The Noninverting Configuration

2.4. Difference Amplifiers

2.5. Effect of Finite Open-Loop Gain andBandwidth on Circuit Performance

2.6. Large-Signal Operation of Op Amps

2.7. DC Imperfections

2.8. Integrators and Differentiators

2.9. The SPICE Op-Amp Model and Simulation Examples

3. Diodes

3.1. The Ideal Diode

3.2. Terminal Characteristics of Junction Diodes

3.3. Modeling the Diode Forward Characteristic

3.4. Operation in the Reverse BreakdownRegion—Zener Diodes

3.5. Rectifier Circuits

3.6. Limiting and Clamping Circuits

3.7. Physical Operation of Diodes

3.8. Special Diode Types

3.9. The SPICE Diode Model and Simulation Examples

4. MOS Field-Effect Transistors (MOSFETs)

4.1. Device Structure and Physical Operation

4.2. Current–Voltage Characteristics

4.3. MOSFET Circuits at DC

4.4. The MOSFET as an Amplifier and as a Switch

4.5. Biasing in MOS Amplifier Circuits

4.6. Small-Signal Operation and Models

4.7. Single-Stage MOS Amplifiers

4.8. The MOSFET Internal Capacitances and High-Frequency Model

4.9. Frequency Response of the CS Amplifier

4.10. The CMOS Digital Logic Inverter

4.11. The Depletion-Type MOSFET

4.12. The SPICE MOSFET Model and Simulation Example

Microelec tronics


5. Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)

5.1. Device Structure and Physical Operation

5.2. Current–Voltage Characteristics

5.3. The BJT as an Amplifier and as a Switch

5.4. BJT Circuits at DC

5.5. Biasing in BJT Amplifier Circuits

5.6. Small-Signal Operation and Models

5.7. Single-Stage BJT Amplifiers

5.8. The BJT Internal Capacitances and High-Frequency Model

5.9. Frequency Response of the Common-Emitter Amplifier

5.10. The Basic BJT Digital Logic Inverter

5.11. The SPICE BJT Model and Simulation Examples

PART II: ANALOG AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

6. Single-Stage Integrated-Circuit Amplifiers

6.1. IC Design Philosophy

6.2. Comparison of the MOSFET and the BJT

6.3. IC Biasing—Current Sources, CurrentMirrors, and Current-Steering Circuits

6.4. High-Frequency Response—GeneralConsiderations

6.5. The Common-Source and Common-Emitter Amplifiers with Active Loads

6.6. High-Frequency Response of the CS and CE Amplifiers

6.7. The Common-Gate and Common-BaseAmplifiers with Active Loads

6.8. The Cascode Amplifier

6.9. The CS and CE Amplifiers with Source(Emitter) Degeneration

6.10. The Source and Emitter Followers

6.11. Some Useful Transistor Pairings

6.12. Current-Mirror Circuits with Improved Performance

6.13. SPICE Simulation Examples

7. Differential and Multistage Amplifiers

7.1. The MOS Differential Pair

7.2. Small-Signal Operation of the MOS Differential Pair

7.3. The BJT Differential Pair

7.4. Other Nonideal Characteristics of the Differential Amplifier

7.5. The Differential Amplifier with Active Load

7.6. Frequency Response of the DifferentialAmplifier

7.7. Multistage Amplifiers

7.8. SPICE Simulation Example

8. Feedback

8.1. The General Feedback Structure

8.2. Some Properties of Negative Feedback

8.3. The Four Basic Feedback Topologies

8.4. The Series–Shunt Feedback Amplifier

8.5. The Series–Series Feedback Amplifier

8.6. The Shunt–Shunt and Shunt–SeriesFeedback Amplifiers

8.7. Determining the Loop Gain

8.8. The Stability Problem

8.9. Effect of Feedback on the Amplifier Poles

8.10. Stability Study Using Bode Plots

8.11. Frequency Compensation


9. Operational-Amplifier and Data-Converter Circuits

9.1. The Two-Stage CMOS Op Amp

9.2. The Folded-Cascode CMOS Op Amp

9.3. The 741 Op-Amp Circuit

9.4. DC Analysis of the 741

9.5. Small-Signal Analysis of the 741

9.6. Gain, Frequency Response, and Slew Rate of the 741

9.7. Data Converters-—An Introduction

9.8. D/A Converter Circuits

9.9. A/D Converter Circuits


10. Digital CMOS Logic Circuits

10.1. Digital Circuit Design: An Overview

10.2. Design and Performance Analysis of the CMOS Inverter

10.3. CMOS Logic-Gate Circuits

10.4. Pseudo-NMOS Logic Circuits

10.5. Pass-Transistor Logic Circuits

10.6. Dynamic Logic Circuits

10.7. Spice Simulation Example

PART III: SELECTED TOPICS

11. Memory and Advanced Digital Circuits

11.1. Latches and Flip-flops

11.2. Multivibrator Circuits

11.3. Semiconductor Memories: Types and Architectures

11.4. Random-Access Memory (RAM) Cells

11.5. Sense Amplifiers and Address Decoders

11.6. Read-Only Memory (ROM)

11.7. Emitter-Coupled Logic (ECL)

11.8. BiCMOS Digital Circuits


12. Filters and Tuned Amplifiers

12.1. Filter Transmission, Types, and Specification

12.2. The Filter Transfer Function

12.3. Butterworth and Chebyshev Filters

12.4. First-Order and Second-Order Filter Functions

12.5. The Second-Order LCR Resonator

12.6. Second-Order Active Filters Based on Inductor Replacement

12.7. Second-Order Active Filters Based on the Two-Integrator-Loop Topology

12.8. Single-Amplifier Biquadratic Active Filters

12.9. Sensitivity

12.10. Switched-Capacitor Filters

12.11. Tuned Amplifiers


13. Signal Generators and Waveform-Shaping Circuits

13.1. Basic Principles of Sinusoidal Oscillators

13.2. Op Amp–RC Oscillator Circuits

13.3. LC and Crystal Oscillators

13.4. Bistable Multivibrators

13.5. Generation of Square and Triangular Waveforms Using Astable Multivibrators

13.6. Generation of a Standardized Pulse—The Monostable Multivibrator

13.7. Integrated-Circuit Timers

13.8. Nonlinear Waveform-Shaping Circuits

13.9. Precision Rectifier Circuits


14. Output Stages and Power Amplifiers

14.1. Classification of Output Stages

14.2. Class A Output Stage

14.3. Class B Output Stage

14.4. Class AB Output Stage

14.5. Biasing the Class AB Circuit

14.6. Power BJTs

14.7. Variations on the Class AB Configuration

14.8. IC Power Amplifiers

14.9. MOS Power Transistors


Appendixes

A. VLSI Fabrication Technology

B. Two-Port Network Parameters

C. Some Useful Network Theorems

D. Single-Time-Constant Circuits

E. s-Domain Analysis: Poles, Zeros,and Bode Plots

F. Bibliography

G. Standard Resistance Values and Unit Prefixes

H. Answers to Selected Problems

Index


OPERATION ANDMODELING OF THE MOS TRANSISTORSecond EditionYANNIS TSIVIDIS, Columbia University

Extensively revised and updated, this second

edition of the highly praised text Operationand Modeling of The MOS Transistor has

become a standard in academia and industry.

The book provides a thorough treatment of

the MOS transistor—the key element of most

modern microelectronic chips.

* A Solutions Manual is available.Please contact your Oxford sales representative at 1-800-280-0280 for additional information.

1998 • 640 pp. • 270 illus. • 0-19-517014-8 cloth • APS TSIVID


Features■ Unified, careful treatment. The book

covers in depth the development of manyimportant models, ranging from the simpleto the sophisticated, with the connectionbetween models clearly identified. Manyaspects of modeling are covered, including:dc, ac, small-signal, large-signal transient,quasi-static, nonquasi-static, and noise.

■ Expanded coverage. New material isincluded on a number of topics, includingcharge sheet models, small-dimension effects,noise, and modeling for RF applications.

■ New chapter on modeling for CAD. Acompletely new chapter discusses the con-text, considerations, and pitfalls associatedwith the development of models for com-puter-aided design, and describes ways toevaluate them.

■ Extensive Bibliography. A thoroughlyupdated and greatly expanded bibliographyis provided.

ContentsEach chapter begins with an Introduction,and ends with References and Problems.

1. Semiconductors, Junctions,and MOSFET Overview

2. The Two-Terminal MOS Structure

3. The Three-Terminal MOS Structure

4. The Four-Terminal MOS Transistor

5. MOS Transistors with Ion-Implanted Channels

6. Small-Dimension Effects by D. Antoniadis,Massachusetts Institute of Technology

7. The MOS Transistor in Dynamic Operation—Large-Signal Modeling

8. Small-Signal Modeling for Low and Medium Frequencies

9. High-Frequency Small-Signal Models

10. MOSFET Modeling for Circuit Simulation

APPENDIXES

A Energy Bands and Related Concepts

B. Basic Laws of Electrostatics in One Dimension

C. Charge Density, Electric Field, and Potential in the pn Junction

D. Energy Band Diagrams for the Two-TerminalMOS Structure

E. Charge Density, Electric Field, and Potential in the Two-Terminal MOS Structure

F. General Analysis of the Two-Terminal MOS Structure

G. Careful Definitions for the Limits of Moderate Inversion

H. Energy Band Diagrams for the Three-Terminal MOS Structure

I. General Analysis of the Three-Terminal MOS Structure

J. Drain Current Formulation Using Quasi-Fermi Potentials

K. Results of a Detailed Formulation for the Drain Current and Drain Small-Signal Conductance in the Saturation Region

L. Evaluation of the Intrinsic Transient Source and Drain Currents

M. Charges for the Accurate Strong-Inversion Model

N. Quantities Used in the Derivation of the Non-Quasi-Static y-Parameter Model

Index

LINEAR SYSTEMS AND SIGNALSSecond EditionB. P. LATHI,California State University, Sacramento

Linear Systems and Signals, Second Edition,

presents a clear, comprehensive introduction

to signals and linear systems. The book

emphasizes physical appreciation of concepts

through heuristic reasoning, metaphors,

analogies, and creative explanations. Such an

approach is different from a purely deductive

technique that uses mere mathematical mani-

pulation of symbols and ignores the physical

meaning behind various derivations. This

deprives a student of the enjoyable experience

of logically uncovering the subject matter.

Here the author uses mathematics not so

much to prove axiomatic theory as to support

and enhance physical and intuitive under-

standing. Wherever possible, theoretical

results are interpreted heuristically and are

enhanced by carefully chosen examples and

analogies.

The organization of the text allows for a

great deal of flexibility in teaching continuous-

time and discrete-time concepts. The natural

order of the chapters in the book integrates the

two; however, the book can also be tailored to

teach these concepts sequentially.


2004 • 675 pp. • 400 illus. • 0-19-515833-4 cloth • APS LALIN2


Systems and SignalsMicroelec tronics


Features■ Covers new topics such as:

• Fourier applications to communication systems

• bode plots

• bandpass systems

• convergence of an infinite series

• group and phase delay

• impulse invariance method of designinganalog systems using digital filters

■ Offers MATLAB focus sessions at the end of each chapter

■ Includes more than 200 new workedexamples and end-of-chapter problems

■ Provides updated and revised illustrations throughout

■ Presents historical background notes tostimulate interest in the field

ContentsPreface

Each chapter ends with a Summary, References,

a MATLAB Session, and Problems.

B. BACKGROUND

B.1. Complex Numbers

B.2. Sinusoids

B.3. Sketching Signals

B.4. Cramer’s Rule

B.5. Partial Fraction Expansion

B.6. Vectors and Matrices

B.7. Miscellaneous

MATLAB Session B:Elementary Operations

MB.1. MATLAB Overview

MB.2. Calculator Operations

MB.3. Vector Operations

MB.4. Simple Plotting

MB.5. Element-by-Element Operations

MB.6. Matrix Operations

MB.7. Partial Fraction Expansions

1. SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

1.1. Size of a Signal

1.2. Some Useful Signal Operations

1.3. Classification of Signals

1.4. Some Useful Signal Models

1.5. Even and Odd Functions

1.6. Systems

1.7. Classification of Systems

1.8. System Model: Input-Output Description

1.9. Internal and External Descriptions of a System

1.10. Internal Description:The State-Space Description

MATLAB Session 1:Working with Functions

M1.1. Inline Functions

M1.2. Relational Operators and the Unit Step Function

M1.3. Visualizing Operations on theIndependent Variable

M1.4. Numerical Integration and EstimatingSignal Energy

2. TIME-DOMAIN ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS-TIME SYSTEMS

2.1. Introduction

2.2. System Response to Internal Conditions:The Zero-Input Response

2.3. The Unit Impulse Response h(t)

2.4. System Response to External Input:Zero-State Response

2.5. Classical Solution of Differential Equations

2.6. System Stability

2.7. Intuitive Insights into System Behavior

2.8. Appendix 2.1: Determining the Impulse Response

MATLAB Session 2: M-Files

M2.1. Script M-Files

M2.2. Function M-Files

M2.3. For-Loops

M2.4. Graphical Understanding of Convolution

3. TIME-DOMAIN ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE-TIME SYSTEMS

3.1. Introduction

3.2. Useful Signal Operations

3.3. Some Useful Discrete-Time Signal Models

3.4. Examples of Discrete-Time Systems

3.5. Discrete-Time System Equations

3.6. System Response to Internal Conditions:The Zero-Input Response

3.7. The Unit Impulse Response h[n]

3.8. System Response to External Input:The Zero-State Response

3.9. Classical Solution of Linear Difference Equations

3.10. System Stability: The External (BIBO)Stability Criterion

3.11. Intuitive Insights into System Behavior

3.12. Appendix 3.1: Impulse Response for a Special Case

MATLAB Session 3:Discrete-Time Signals and Systems

M3.1. Discrete-Time Functions and Stem Plots

M3.2. System Responses Through Filtering

M3.3. A Custom Filter Function

M3.4. Discrete-Time Convolution

4. CONTINUOUS-TIME SYSTEM ANALYSISUSING THE LAPLACE TRANSFORM

4.1. The Laplace Transform

4.2. Some Properties of the Laplace Transform

4.3. Solution of Differential and Integro-Differential Equations

4.4. Analysis of Electrical Networks:The Transformed Network

4.5. Block Diagrams

4.6. System Realization

4.7. Application to Feedback and Controls

4.8. Frequency Response of an LTIC System

4.9. Bode Plots

4.10. Filter Design by Placement of Poles and Zeros of H(s)

4.11. The Bilateral Laplace Transform

MATLAB Session 4:Continuous-Time Filters

M4.1. Frequency Response and Polynomial Evaluation

M4.2. Design and Evaluation of a Simple RC Filter

M4.3. A Cascaded RC Filter and Polynomial Expansion

M4.4. Butterworth Filters and the FIND Command

M4.5. Using Cascaded Second-Order Sectionsfor Butterworth Filter Realization

M4.6. Chebyshev Filters

5. DISCRETE-TIME SYSTEM ANALYSISUSING THE Z-TRANSFORM

5.1. The z-Transform

5.2. Some Properties of the z-Transform

5.3. z-Transform Solution of Linear Difference Equations

5.4. System Realization

5.5. Frequency Response of Discrete-Time Systems

5.6. Frequency Response from Pole-Zero Location

5.7. Digital Processing of Analog Signals

5.8. Connection Between the LaplaceTransform and the z-Transform

5.9. The Bilateral z-Transform

MATLAB Session 5:Discrete-Time IIR Filters

M5.1. Frequency Response and Pole-Zero Plots

M5.2. Transformation Basics

M5.3. Transformation by First-Order Backward Difference

M5.4. Bilinear Transformation

M5.5. Bilinear Transformation with Prewarping

M5.6. Example: Butterworth FilterTransformation

M5.7. Problems Finding Polynomial Roots

M5.8. Using Cascaded Second-Order Sectionsto Improve Design



6. CONTINUOUS-TIME SIGNAL ANALYSIS:THE FOURIER SERIES

6.1. Periodic Signal Representation byTrigonometric Fourier Series

6.2. Existence and Convergence of the Fourier Series

6.3. Exponential Fourier Series

6.4. LTIC System Response to Periodic Inputs

6.5. Generalized Fourier Series:Signals as Vectors

6.6. Numerical Computation of Dn

MATLAB Session 6:Fourier Series Applications

M6.1. Periodic Functions and the Gibbs Phenomenon

M6.2. Optimization and Phase Spectra

7. CONTINUOUS-TIME SIGNAL ANALYSIS:THE FOURIER TRANSFORM

7.1. Aperiodic Signal Representation by Fourier Integral

7.2. Transforms of Some Useful Functions

7.3. Some Properties of the Fourier Transform

7.4. Signal Transmission Through LTIC Systems

7.5. Ideal and Practical Filters

7.6. Signal Energy

7.7. Application to Communications:Amplitude Modulation

7.8. Data Truncation: Window Functions

MATLAB Session 7:Fourier Transform Topics

M7.1. The Sinc Function and the Scaling Property

M7.2. Parseval’s Theorem and Essential Bandwidth

M7.3. Spectral Sampling

M7.4. Kaiser Window Functions

8. SAMPLING: THE BRIDGE FROMCONTINUOUS TO DISCRETE

8.1. The Sampling Theorem

8.2. Signal Reconstruction

8.3. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Conversion

8.4. Dual of Time Sampling:The Spectral Sampling

8.5. Numerical Computation of the Fourier Transform: The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)

8.6. The Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)

MATLAB Session 8:The Discrete Fourier Transform

M8.1. Computing the Discrete Fourier Transform

M8.2. Improving the Picture with Zero Padding

M8.3. Quantization

9. FOURIER ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE-TIME SIGNALS

9.1. Discrete-Time Fourier Series (DTFS)


9.3. Properties of DTFT

9.4. LTI Discrete-Time System Analysis by DTFT

9.5. DTFT Connection with the CTFT

9.6. Generalization of the DTFT and the z-Transform

MATLAB Session 9:Working with the DTFS and the DTFT

M9.1. Computing the Discrete-Time Fourier Series

M9.2. Measuring Code Performance

M9.3. FIR Filter Design by Frequency Sampling

10. STATE-SPACE ANALYSIS

10.1. Introduction

10.2. A Systematic Procedure for Determining State Equations

10.3. Solution of State Equations

10.4. Linear Transformation of State Vector

10.5. Controllability and Observability

10.6. State-Space Analysis of Discrete-Time Systems

MATLAB Session 10:Toolboxes and State-Space Analysis

M10.1. z-Transform Solutions to Discrete-Time State-Space Systems

M10.2. Transfer Functions from State-SpaceRepresentations

M10.3. Controllability and Observability ofDiscrete-Time Systems

M10.4. Matrix Exponentiation and the Matrix Exponential

Index

SIGNAL PROCESSINGAND LINEAR SYSTEMSB. P. LATHI,California State University, Sacramento

This text presents a comprehensive treatment

of signal processing and linear systems suit-

able for advanced undergraduate courses in

electrical engineering. Based on B. P. Lathi’s

widely used book, Linear Systems andSignals, it features additional applications to

communications, controls, and filtering as well

as new chapters on analog and digital filters

and digital signal processing. Lathi empha-

sizes the physical appreciation of concepts

rather than the mere mathematical manipula-

tion of symbols. Avoiding the tendency to treat

engineering as a branch of applied mathemat-

ics, he uses mathematics to enhance physical

and intuitive understanding of concepts,

instead of employing it only to prove axiomatic

theory. Theoretical results are supported by

carefully chosen examples and analogies,

allowing students to intuitively discover mean-

ing for themselves.

* An Instructor’s Manual CD is available.(0-19-515214-X)

2000 • 864 pp. • 450 illus. • 0-19-521917-1paper • APS LATHI2


ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary.

Background

1. Introduction to Signals and Systems

2. Time-Domain Analysis of Continuous-Time Systems

3. Signal Representation by Fourier Series

4. Continuous-Time Signal Analysis:The Fourier Transform

5. Sampling

6. Continuous-Time System Analysis Using the Laplace Transform

7. Frequency Response and Analog Filters

8. Discrete-Time Signals and Systems

9. Time-Domain Analysis of Discrete-Time Systems

10. Fourier Analysis of Discrete-Time Signals

11. Discrete-Time System Analysis Using the z-Transform

12. Frequency Response and Digital Filters

13. State-Space Analysis


Supplementary Reading

Index

Systems and Signals


SIGNALS AND SYSTEMSThird EditionCHI-TSONG CHEN,State University of New York, Stony Brook

The third edition of Signals and Systemsprepares students for real-world engineering

applications. It is concise, focused, and practical.

The text introduces basic concepts in signals

and systems and their associated mathematical

and computational tools. It also stresses the

most important concepts in signal analysis (fre-

quency spectra) and system analysis (stability

and frequency responses) and uses them

throughout, including the study of seismometers

and accelerometers.

Signals and Systems, Third Edition,

introduces every term carefully and develops

every topic logically. It distinguishes ampli-

tudes and magnitudes, and lumped and

distributed systems. It presents engineering

concepts as early as possible and discusses

transform theory only as needed. The text also

employs transfer functions and state-space

equations only in the contexts where they are

most efficient. Transfer functions are used

exclusively in quantitative analysis and design,

and state-space equations are used exclusively

in computer computation and op-amp circuit

implementation. Thus, the students’ time is

focused on learning only what can be applied

immediately.

Including an author commentary on the best

way to approach the text, Signals and Systems,Third Edition, is ideal for sophomore- and

junior-level undergraduate courses in systems

and signals. It assumes a background in gener-

al physics (including simple circuit analysis),

simple matrix operations, and basic calculus.


2004 • 464 pp. • 577 illus. • 0-19-515661-7 cloth •APS CHEN03


Features■ Stresses application of computer compu-

tation (MATLAB, Fast Fourier Transform)throughout

■ Includes engineering constraints when discussing mathematics

■ Omits purely academic topics and focuseson practice-oriented subjects such as modelreduction, speeds of responses, and opera-tional frequency ranges of devices

■ Uses op amps to discuss modeling prob-lems, both memoryless (linear or nonlinear,finite or infinite gains) and with memory

■ Provides reasons for not discussing Fourieranalysis of systems, which is discussed inmost other similar texts

ContentsPreface

Each chapter ends with Problems.

1. Signals1.1. Introduction1.2. Continuous-Time (CT), Discrete-Time (DT),

and Digital Signals1.3. Elementary CT Signals1.4. Manipulations of CT Signals1.5. Impulse1.6. Elementary DT Signals and Their

Manipulation1.7. CT Sinusoidal Signals1.8. DT Sinusoidal Sequences and Nyquist

Frequency Range1.9. Sampling and Frequency Aliasing

2. Systems2.1. Introduction2.2. CT Systems with and without Memory2.3. The Concept of State—Set of Initial

Conditions2.4. Linearity of Memoryless Systems2.5. Time Invariance and Its Implication2.6. Implications of Linearity and Time

Invariance—Zero-State Responses2.7. Modeling CT LTI Lumped Systems2.8. Ideal Operational Amplifiers2.9. Ideal Diodes and Rectifiers2.10. Discrete-Time LTI Systems2.11. Conclusion

3. Convolutions, Difference and Differential Equations3.1. Introduction3.2. DT Impulse Responses3.3. DT LTI Systems—Discrete Convolutions3.4. DT LTI Lumped Systems—Difference

Equations3.5. Comparison of Discrete Convolutions

and Difference Equations3.6. General Forms of Difference Equations3.7. CT LTI Systems—Integral Convolutions3.8. CT LTI Lumped Systems—Differential

Equations

4. Frequency Spectra of CT Signals4.1. Introduction4.2. Fourier Series of Periodic Signals—

Frequency Components4.3. Fourier Transform–Frequency Spectra4.4. Properties of Frequency Spectra4.5. Frequency Spectra of CT Periodic Signals4.6. Effects of Truncation4.7. Time-Limited Band-Limited Theorem

5. Sampling Theorem and FFT Spectral Computation5.1. Introduction5.2. Frequency Spectra of DT Signals—

DT Fourier Transfer5.3. Nyquist Sampling Theorem5.4. Computing Frequency Spectra of DT Signals5.5. FFT Spectral Computation of DT Signals5.6. FFT Spectral Computation of CT Signals

6. CT Transfer Functions: Laplace Transform6.1. Introduction6.2. Laplace Transform6.3. Transfer Functions6.4. Properties of Laplace Transform6.5. Inverse Laplace Transform6.6. Significance of Poles and Zeros6.7. Stability6.8. Frequency Responses6.9. From Laplace Transform to Fourier Transform6.10. Frequency Responses and

Frequency Spectra6.11. Concluding Remarks

7. Realizations, Characterization,and Identification7.1. Introduction7.2. Realizations7.3. Basic Block Diagrams7.4. Computer Computation of

State-Space Equations7.5. Developing State-Space Equations7.6. Complete Characterization by Transfer

Functions7.7. Identification by Measuring Frequency

Responses

8. Model Reduction, Feedback,and Modulation8.1. Introduction8.2. Op-Amp Circuits Using a Single-Pole Model8.3. Seismometers and Accelerometers8.4. Composite Systems8.5. Wien-Bridge Oscillator8.6. Feedback Model of Op-Amp Circuits8.7. Modulation8.8. AM Modulation and Asynchronous

Demodulation

9. DT Transfer Functions—z-Transform9.1. Introduction9.2. z-transform9.3. DT Transfer Functions9.4. Properties of z-Transform9.5. Inverse z-Transform9.6. Significance of Poles and Zeros9.7. Stability9.8. Frequency Responses9.9. Frequency Responses and

Frequency Spectra9.10. Digital Processing of CT Signals

10. DT State-Space Equations and Realizations10.1. Introduction10.2. From Difference Equations to Basic

Block Diagrams10.3. Realizations10.4. MATLAB Computation10.5. Complete Characterization by

Transfer FunctionsReferencesAnswers to Selected ProblemsIndex


DIGITAL SIGNALPROCESSINGSpectral Computation andFilter DesignCHI-TSONG CHEN,State University of New York, Stony Brook

Designed for a first course in digital signal pro-

cessing, this book covers two major topics: the

computation of frequency contents of

signals and the design of digital filters. While it

focuses on basic ideas and procedures and

covers the standard topics in the field, this

unique text distinguishes itself from compe-

ting texts by extensively employing the fast

Fourier transform (FFT).

Integrated with MATLAB throughout,

Digital Signal Processing features careful def-

initions of all terminology and a wealth of

examples and problems. All numerical exam-

ples and most end-of-chapter problems are

simple enough to be solved analytically by

hand; these results can then be compared with

the computer-generated solutions.


2000 • 464 pp. •203 illus. • 0-19-513638-1 cloth • APS CHENDS


Features■ Establishes a simplified version of the

sampling theorem for periodic signals

■ Uses FFT to compute frequency spectra of DT and CT signals, and inverse FFT to compute DT and CT signals from their frequency spectra

■ Employs FFT to compute the inverse z-transform

■ Covers steady-state and transient responsesof digital filters and gives an estimated timefor a transient response to die out

■ Offers a mathematical justification for usingan anti-aliasing analog filter in digital signalprocessing

■ Introduces a discrete least-squares methodto design FIR filters

■ Presents an analog bandstop transformationthat yields better results than those gener-ated by MATLAB

ContentsPreface

1. Introduction

PART 1: SPECTRAL COMPUTATION

2. CT and DT Fourier Series—Frequency Components

3. CT and DT Fourier Transforms—Frequency Spectra

4. DFT and FFT—Spectral Computation

PART 2: DIGITAL FILTER DESIGN

5. Linear Time-Invariant Lumped Systems

6. Ideal and Some Practical Digital Filters

7. Design of FIR Filters

8. Design of IIR Filter Design

9. Structures of Digital Filters

Appendix: The Impulse

References

Index

LINEAR SYSTEM THEORY AND DESIGNThird EditionCHI-TSONG CHEN,State University of New York, Stony Brook

The third edition of Linear System Theoryand Design introduces the fundamental prop-

erties of linear systems and discusses design

using state equations and transfer functions.

In state-space design, Lyapunov equations

are used extensively to design state feedback

and state estimators. In the discussion of

transfer-function design, pole placement,

model matching, and their applications in

tracking and disturbance rejection are covered.

Both one- and two-degree-of-freedom con-

figurations are used. All designs can be

accomplished by solving sets of linear algebraic

equations. All results are developed for

numerical computation and illustrated using

MATLAB, with an emphasis on the ideas

behind the computation and interpretation of

results. Linear System Theory and Design,Third Edition, is ideal for use in advanced

undergraduate and first-year graduate courses

in linear systems and multivariable system

design in electrical, mechanical, chemical, and

aeronautical engineering departments.




ContentsPreface

1. Introduction

2. Mathematical Descriptions of Systems

3. Linear Algebra

4. State-Space Solutions and Realizations

5. Stability

6. Controllability and Observability

7. Minimal Realizations and Coprime Fractions

8. State Feedback and State Estimators

9. Pole Placement and Model Matching

References


Index

Systems and Signals


SIGNAL PROCESSINGUSING OPTICSFundamentals, Devices,Architectures, andApplicationsBRADLEY G. BOONE,Johns Hopkins University

Signal Processing Using Optics covers the fun-

damental aspects of optical signal processing as

well as devices, architectures, and prominent

applications. It provides students with a prac-

tical understanding of component technology

and performance, a grasp of system design and

analysis, and a familiarity with architectures

for selected but representative applications.

This accessible text is ideal for senior-level

undergraduate and first year graduate students

in electrical engineering and applied physics

as well as practicing engineers and scientists.

It offers simulation tools to support students’

exploration of applications and to direct their

learning towards the current technical litera-

ture. Numerous architectural diagrams are

provided to help students understand and

visualize important concepts and their imple-

mentation.

1997 • 416 pp. • 289 illus. • 0-19-508424-1 cloth • APS BOONE

ContentsEach chapter ends with Problem Exercises and a Bibliography.Preface • AcknowledgementsIntroduction • Bibliography

1. Two-Dimensional Linear Systems

2. Stochastic Processes and Nonlinear Systems

3. Mathematical Transforms used in Optical Signal Processing

4. Fundamental Properties of Light and Geometrical Optics

5. Summary of Physical Optics

6. Fourier Transform and Imaging Properties of Optical Systems

7. Light Sources and Detectors

8. Spatial Light Modulators

9. Optical Spectrum Analysis and Correlation

10. Image and Matched Spatial Filtering

11. Radar Signal Processing Applications

12. Pattern Recognition Applications

Appendix A: Mathematical Tables

Appendix B: Annotated Bibliography

Appendix C: Software for Modeling and Visualization

Appendix D: Hints and Solutions to Selected Problems

Index

PROBABILITY ANDRANDOM PROCESSESThird EditionGEOFFREY R. GRIMMETT,University of Cambridge, andDAVID R. STIRZAKER, Oxford University

This book gives an introduction to probability

and its many practical applications by providing

a thorough, entertaining account of basic

probability and important random processes

and covering a range of important topics.

Emphasis is on modeling rather than abstrac-

tion and there are new sections on sampling

and Markov Chain Monte Carlo, renewal-

reward, queuing networks, stochastic calculus,

and option pricing in the Black-Scholes model

for financial markets. In addition, there are

approximately 400 exercises and problems

relevant to the material. Solutions can be found

in One Thousand Exercises in Probability.

2001 • 608 pp. • 20 illus. • 0-19-857222-0 paper • APS GRIM3

Contents1. Events and Their Probabilities

2. Random Variables and Their Distribution

3. Discrete Random Variables

4. Continuous Random Variables

5. Generating Functions and Their Applications

6. Markov Chains

7. Convergence of Random Variables

8. Random Processes

9. Stationary Processes

10. Renewals

11. Queues

12. Martingales

13. Diffusion Processes

Appendixes

Bibliography

List of notation

Index

ONE THOUSANDEXERCISES INPROBABILITYGEOFFREY R. GRIMMETT,University of Cambridge, andDAVID R. STIRZAKER, Oxford University

The companion volume to Probability andRandom Processes, Third Edition, this book

contains more than 1000 exercises on the

subjects of elementary aspects of probability

and random variables, sampling, Markov

chains, convergence, stationary processes,

renewals, queues, Martingales, diffusion,

mathematical finance and the Black-Scholes

model.

2001 • 448 pp. • 0-19-857221-2paper • APS GRIMME

Contents1. Events and Their Probabilities

2. Random Variables and Their Distribution

3. Discrete Random Variables

4. Continuous Random Variables

5. Generating Functions and Their Applications

6. Markov Chains

7. Convergence of Random Variables

8. Random Processes

9. Stationary Processes

10. Renewals

11. Queues

12. Martingales

13. Diffusion Processes

Table of Distributions

Bibliography

Index

Probability/Random Processes


PROBABILISTICMETHODS OF SIGNALAND SYSTEM ANALYSISThird EditionGEORGE R. COOPER and the late CLARE D. McGILLEM,both of Purdue University

Probabilistic Methods of Signal and SystemAnalysis, Third Edition, stresses the engineer-

ing applications of probability theory and uses

MATLAB as a computational tool through-

out. It includes sections relating to Bernoulli

trials, correlation of data sets, smoothing of

data, computer computation of correlation

functions and spectral densities, and computer

simulation of systems. All computer examples

can be run using the Student Version of

MATLAB. It is ideal for undergraduate

classes in signal and system analysis.




ContentsPreface

1. Introduction to Probability

2. Random Variables

3. Several Random Variables

4. Elements of Statistics

5. Random Processes

6. Correlation Functions

7. Spectral Density

8. Response of Linear Systems to Random Inputs

9. Optimum Linear Systems

Appendixes

A. Mathematical Tables

B. Frequently Encountered Probability Distributions

C. Binomial Coefficients

D. Normal Probability Distribution Function

E. The Q-Function

F. Student’s t Distribution Function

G. Computer Computations

H. Table of Correlation Function—Spectral Density Pairs

I. Contour Integration

Index

ELEMENTS OFELECTROMAGNETICSThird EditionMATTHEW N. O. SADIKU,Prairie View A&M University

Designed for the standard sophomore- and

junior-level course in electromagnetics,

Elements of Electromagnetics, Third Edition,

continues the highly regarded pedagogical

tradition established by its successful previous

editions. It offers students the most lucid and

interesting presentation available of funda-

mental concepts and applications in electro-

magnetics. Revised and updated, this third

edition adds a new chapter on modern topics

covering microwaves, electromagnetic inter-

ference and compatibility, fiber optics, and

more.


2000 • 784 pp. • 635 illus. • 0-19-513477-X cloth • APS SADIK3


Features■ Begins with vector analysis and applies it

gradually throughout the text, avoiding thefrequent interruptions that occur whenmathematical background is interspersedsporadically

■ Incorporates many helpful pedagogical features including chapter introductionsand summaries, boxed formulas, multiple-choice review questions, and thoroughlyworked examples followed by practice exercises

■ Treats mathematical theorems separatelyfrom physical concepts, making it easier forstudents to grasp the theorems

■ Devotes an entire chapter to modern com-puter tools used in electromagnetics

■ Provides a balanced presentation of time-varying fields and static fields, preparingstudents for employment in today’s indus-trial and manufacturing sectors

■ Richly illustrated with boxed formulas, 130examples and more than 600 figures

ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary, ReviewQuestions, and Problems.

Preface

A Note to the Student

PART 1. VECTOR ANALYSIS

1. Vector Algebra

1.1. Introduction

1.2. A Preview of the Book

1.3. Scalars and Vectors

1.4. Unit Vector

1.5. Vector Addition and Subtraction

1.6. Position and Distance Vectors

1.7. Vector Multiplication

1.8. Components of a Vector

2. Coordinate Systems and Transformation

2.1. Introduction

2.2. Cartesian Coordinates (x, y, z)

2.3. Circular Cylindrical Coordinates (p, ø, z)

2.4. Spherical Coordinates (r, 0, ø, )

2.5. Constant-Coordinate Surfaces

3. Vector Calculus

3.1. Introduction

3.2. Differential Length, Area, and Volume

3.3. Line, Surface, and Volume Integrals

3.4. Del Operator

3.5. Gradient of a Scalar

3.6. Divergence of a Vector and Divergence Theorem

3.7. Curl of a Vector and Stokes’s Theorem

3.8. Laplacian of a Scalar

3.9. Classification of Vector Fields

PART 2. ELECTROSTATICS

4. Electrostatic Fields

4.1. Introduction

4.2. Coulomb’s Law and Field Intensity

4.3. Electric Fields due to Continuous Charge Distributions

4.4. Electric Flux Density

4.5. Gauss’s Law—Maxwell’s Equation

4.6. Applications of Gauss’s Law

4.7. Electric Potential

4.8. Relationship between E and V—Maxwell’s Equation

4.9. An Electric Dipole and Flux Lines

4.10. Energy Density in Electrostatic Fields

Probability/Random Processes Elec tromagnetics


5. Electric Fields in Material Space

5.1. Introduction

5.2. Properties of Materials

5.3. Convection and Conduction Currents

5.4. Conductors

5.5. Polarization in Dielectrics

5.6. Dielectric Constant and Strength

5.7. Linear, Isotropic, and HomogeneousDielectrics

5.8. Continuity Equation and Relaxation Time

5.9. Boundary Conditions

6. Electrostatic Boundary-Value Problems

6.1. Introduction

6.2. Poisson’s and Laplace’s Equations

6.3. Uniqueness Theorem

6.4. General Procedure for Solving Poisson’s or Laplace’s Equation

6.5. Resistance and Capacitance

6.6. Method of Images

PART 3. MAGNETOSTATICS

7. Magnetostatic Fields

7.1. Introduction

7.2. Biot-Savart’s Law

7.3. Ampere’s Circuit Law—Maxwell’s Equation

7.4. Applications of Ampere’s Law

7.5. Magnetic Flux Density—Maxwell’s Equation

7.6. Maxwell’s Equations for Static EM Fields

7.7. Magnetic Scalar and Vector Potentials

7.8. Derivation of Biot-Savart’s Law andAmpere’s Law

8. Magnetic Forces, Materials, and Devices

8.1. Introduction

8.2. Forces due to Magnetic Fields

8.3. Magnetic Torque and Moment

8.4. A Magnetic Dipole

8.5. Magnetization in Materials

8.6. Classification of Magnetic Materials

8.7. Magnetic Boundary Conditions

8.8. Inductors and Inductances

8.9. Magnetic Energy

8.10. Magnetic Circuits

8.11. Force on Magnetic Materials

PART IV: WAVES AND APPLICATIONS

9. Maxwell’s Equations

9.1. Introduction

9.2. Faraday’s Law

9.3. Transformer and Motional EMFs

9.4. Displacement Current

9.5. Maxwell’s Equations in Final Forms

9.6. Time-Varying Potentials

9.7. Time-Harmonic Fields

10. Electromagnetic Wave Propagation

10.1. Introduction

10.2. Waves in General

10.3. Wave Propagation in Lossy Dielectrics

10.4. Plane Waves in Lossless Dielectrics

10.5. Plane Waves in Free Space

10.6. Plane Waves in Good Conductors

10.7. Power and Poynting Vector

10.8. Reflection of a Plane Wave at Normal Incidence

10.9. Reflection of a Plane Wave at Oblique Incidence

11. Transmission Lines

11.1. Introduction

11.2. Transmission Line Parameters

11.3. Transmission Line Equations

11.4. Input Impedence, SWR, and Power

11.5. The Smith Chart

11.6. Some Applications of Transmission Lines

11.7. Transients on Transmission Lines

11.8. Microstrip Transmission Lines

12. Waveguides

12.1. Introduction

12.2. Rectangular Waveguides

12.3. Transverse Magnetic (TM) Modes

12.4. Transverse Electric (TE) Modes

12.5. Wave Propagation in the Guide

12.6. Power Transmission and Attenuation

12.7. Waveguide Current and Mode Excitation

12.8. Waveguide Resonators

13. Antennas

13.1. Introduction

13.2. Hertzian Dipole

13.3. Half-Wave Dipole Antenna

13.4. Quarter-Wave Monopole Antenna

13.5. Small Loop Antenna

13.6. Antenna Characteristics

13.7. Antenna Arrays

13.8. Effective Area and the Friis Equation

13.9. The Radar Equation

14. Modern Topics

14.1 Introduction

14.2. Microwaves

14.3. Electromagnetic Interference and Compatibility

14.4. Optical Fiber

15. Numerical Methods

15.1. Introduction

15.2. Field Plotting

15.3. The Finite Difference Method

15.4. The Moment Method

15.5. The Finite Element Method

Appendixes

A. Mathematical Formulas

B. Material Constants

C. Answers to Odd-Numbered Problems

Index

ELECTRIC MACHINERYAND TRANSFORMERSThird EditionBHAG S. GURU and HÜSEYIN R. HIZIROGLU,both of Kettering University

Electric Machinery and Transformers, Third

Edition, covers the following main topics:

principles of electromechanical energy con-

version; transformers; direct-current generators

and motors; synchronous generators and

motors; polyphase induction motors and

single-phase motors; the dynamics of electric

machines; and special-purpose machines.

The text encourages intuitive reasoning for

problem-solving over the rote memorization of

equations and procedures. It begins with a

review of the fundamentals of circuit theory

and electromagnetics and then introduces

the concept of electromechanical energy

conversion. In addition, it provides a system-

atic development of a model for each electric

machine based upon established principles

and basic laws and goes on to introduce appli-

cations and advanced topics.

Including numerous supporting examples,

review questions, illustrations, exercises, and

chapter summaries, Electric Machinery andTransformers, Third Edition, is ideal for

advanced undergraduate courses in electro-

mechanical energy conversion.


* A PowerPoint CD is available.Please contact your Oxford sales representative at 1-800-280-0280 for additional information.

2000 • 720 pp. • 551 illus. • 0-19-513890-2 cloth • APS GURU3



Machines and Power

˘


ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary,Review Questions, and Problems.Preface

Acknowledgments

1. Review of Electric Circuit Theory

2. Review of Basic Laws of Electromagnetism

3. Principles of Electromechanical Energy Conversion

4. Transformers

5. Direct-Current Generators

6. Direct-Current Motors

7. Synchronous Generators

8. Synchronous Motors

9. Polyphase Induction Motors

10. Single-Phase Motors

11. Dynamics of Electric Machines

12. Special-Purpose Electric Machines

Appendixes

A. System of UnitsB. The Laplace Transform

BibliographyIndex

ELECTRIC MOTORS AND THEIR CONTROLSAn IntroductionTAKASHI KENJO, University of IndustrialTechnology, Kanagawa, Japan

This introductory work explains the principles,

construction, and use of electric motors and

their associated drive controls. Fully illustrated

with precise, clear diagrams and photographs,

this authoritative text starts with basic physics

and progresses to state-of-the-art topics such

as piezoelectric motors and vector control. It is

largely non-mathematical in its approach and

provides an uncluttered overview of the sub-

ject. Electric Motors and Their Controls is

easily accessible to beginning students in

electrical and electronic engineering as well

as to engineers and scientists from other

disciplines.

1991 • 192 pp. • 154 illus. • 0-19-856240-3 paper • APS KENJO

Contents1. How Are Electric Motors Used?2. Physical Principles of Various Types of Motors3. From Physics to Engineering4. Classical Motor-Control Technology5. Power Electronics and Modern

Control Methods6. Small Motors and the Info-Society

ELEMENTS OF POWERELECTRONICSPHILIP T. KREIN, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign

Elements of Power Electronics, the first

undergraduate book to discuss power elec-

tronics in a conceptual framework, provides

comprehensive coverage of the subject at a

level suitable for undergraduate student engi-

neers, students in advanced degree programs,

and novices in the field. It aims to establish a

fundamental engineering basis for power elec-

tronics analysis, design, and implementation,

offering broad and in-depth coverage of basic

material. The text’s unifying framework

includes the physical implications of circuit

laws, switching circuit analysis, and the basis

for converter operation and control. Featuring

a fundamental approach to power electronics

coupled with extensive discussion of design

and implementation issues, Elements ofPower Electronics serves as an ideal text for

courses in power electronics and as a helpful

guide for engineers new to the field.

* A companion website is available:http://www.power.ece.uiuc.edu/krein_text

1997 • 784 pp • 647 illus. • 0-19-511701-8 cloth • APS SEE54


Contents

PART 1. PRINCIPLES1. Background2. Organizing and Analyzing Switches3. Converter Concepts

PART 2. CONVERTERS AND APPLICATIONS4. DC-DC Converters5. Diode-Capacitor Circuits and Rectifiers6. Inverters7. AC-AC Conversion8. Introduction to Resonance in Converters9. Discontinuous Modes

PART 3. REAL COMPONENTS AND THEIR EFFECTS10. Real Sources and Loads11. Capacitors and Resistors12. Concepts of Magnetics for Power Electronics13. Power Semiconductors in Converters14. Interfacing with Power Semiconductors

PART 4. CONTROL ASPECTS15. Overview of Feedback Control for Converters16. Approximate Methods for Control Design17. Geometric Control for Power Converters

Appendixes

Index

POWER ELECTRONICSDevices, Circuits, andIndustrial ApplicationsV.P. MOORTHI,Dehli College of Engineering, India

Power Electronics: Devices, Circuits, andIndustrial Applications provides compre-

hensive coverage of various power electronic

devices with emphasis on the thyristor. The

characteristics of modern power semiconductor

devices like the power transistor, MOSFET,

and the IGBT are also discussed. In addition,

other relevant topics like cycloconverters,

brushless D.C. motors, microprocessor funda-

mentals, microprocessor control of industrial

equipment, and field-oriented control of A.C.

motors, are dealt with in detail. Numerous

worked examples, problems, and multiple

choice questions reinforce the material. With

its in-depth presentation of topics and acces-

sible derivations, this book is ideal for under-

graduate courses in power electronics.

2005 • 1064 pp. • 0-19-567092-2paper • APS MORTHI

ContentsEach chapter ends with review exercises.

1. Thyristor Physics

2. Controlled Rectifiers

3. D.C. Choppers

4. A.C. Line Voltage Control

5. Inverters

6. Cycloconverters

7. D.C. Drives

8. A.C. Drives

9. Brushless D.C. Motors

10. Control Circuits for Electronic Equipment

11. Industrial Application

12. Microprocessor Fundamentals

13. Microcomputer Control of Industrial Equipment

14. Field-Orientated Control of A.C. Motors

Index

Machines and Power

NEW!


SYSTEMS AND CONTROLSTANISLAW H. ZAK, Purdue University

Systems and Control presents modeling,analysis, and control of dynamical systems. Itacquaints students with the basics of dynamicalsystem theory and also equips them with thetools necessary for control system design. Itemphasizes design and demonstrates howdynamical system theory fits into practicalapplications. Classical methods and the tech-niques of post-modern control engineering arecovered in a unified fashion, showing how thecurrent tools of a control engineer supplementmore classical tools.

Broad in scope, Systems and Controlshows the multidisciplinary role of dynamicsand control. It presents neural networks, fuzzysystems, and genetic algorithms and providesa self-contained introduction to chaotic systems.The text employs Lyapunov’s stability theoryas a unifying medium for different types ofdynamical systems, using it—with its variants—to analyze dynamical system models.Specifically, optimal, fuzzy, sliding mode, andchaotic controllers are all constructed with theaid of the Lyapunov method and its exten-sions. In addition, a class of neural networks isalso analyzed using Lyapunov’s method.

Ideal for advanced undergraduate andbeginning graduate courses in systems andcontrol, this text can also be used for intro-ductory courses in non-linear systems andmodern automatic control.


2002 • 706 pp. • 314 illus. • 0-19-515011-2 cloth • APS ZAK


ContentsEach chapter ends with Notes and Exercises.

Preface

1. Dynamical Systems and Modeling

2. Analysis of Modeling Equations

3. Linear Systems

4. Stability

5. Optimal Control

6. Sliding Modes

7. Vector Field Methods

8. Fuzzy Systems

9. Neural Networks

10. Genetic and Evolutionary Algorithms

11. Chaotic Systems and Fractals

Appendix: Math Review

Bibliography

Index

DESIGN OF FEEDBACKCONTROL SYSTEMSFourth EditionRAYMOND T. STEFANI, BAHRAM SHAHIAN,the late CLEMENT J. SAVANT, and the lateGENE H. HOSTETTER, all of California StateUniversity, Long Beach

This volume is designed for electrical and

mechanical engineering students in advanced

undergraduate control systems courses. This

tutorial-style textbook has been completely up-

dated to include the use of modern analytical

software, especially MATLAB. It thoroughly

discusses classical control theory and state

variable control theory, as well as advanced and

digital control topics. Each topic is preceded

by analytical considerations that provide a

well-organized parallel treatment of analysis

and design. Design is presented in separate

chapters devoted to root locus, frequency

domain, and state space viewpoints. Treating

the use of computers as a means rather than as

an end, this student-friendly book contains

new “Computer-Aided Learning” sections

that demonstrate how MATLAB can be used

to verify all figures and tables in the text. Clear

and accessible, Design of Feedback Control Systems, Fourth Edition, makes complicated

methodology comprehensible to a wide spec-

trum of students.

* An Instructor’s CD containing PowerPointOverheads is available. (0-19-514250-0)

2001 • 850 pp. • 995 illus. • 0-19-514249-7 cloth • APS STEF4


ContentsAll chapters end with a Summary,References, and Problems.

Preface

1. Continuous-Time System Description

2. Continuous-Time System Response

3. Performance Specifications

4. Root Locus Analysis

5. Root Locus Design

6. Frequency Response Analysis

7. Frequency Response Design

8. State Space Analysis

9. State Space Design

10. Advanced State Space Methods

11. Digital Control

Appendixes

Index

Control

.


CONTROL ENGINEERINGA Modern ApproachPIERRE R. BÉLANGER, McGill University

This book introduces control engineering

with a practical emphasis on modeling and

simulation. It features recurring case examples

and problems, giving the student a much

deeper physical insight into observable and

controllable models. The text is designed to

be used with MATLAB software.



Contents 1. Introduction

2. Simulation and Modeling

3. Linear Systems Theory

4. Specifications, Structures, Limitations

5. Feedback Systems Stability in Terms of the Loop Gain

6. Classical Design

7. State Feedback

8. Multivariable Control

9. Sampled-Data Implementation

ANALOG AND DIGITAL CONTROLSYSTEM DESIGNTransfer-Function,State-Space, and Algebraic MethodsCHI-TSONG CHEN,State University of New York, Stony Brook

Employing a contemporary approach, thisbook focuses on the concepts of linear controlsystems, rather than computational mechan-ics. Straightforward coverage includes an inte-grated treatment of both classical and moderncontrol system methods. The text emphasizesdesign with discussions of problem formula-tion, design criteria, physical constraints,several design methods, and implementationof compensators. Discussions of topics notfound in other texts—such as pole placement,model matching and robust tracking—add to the text’s presentation. State feedback andstate estimators are designed using state vari-able equations and transfer functions, offering

a comparison of the two approaches. Theincorporation of MATLAB throughout thetext helps students to avoid time-consumingcomputation and concentrate on control systemdesign and analysis.




2. Mathematical Preliminary

3. Development of Block Diagrams for Control Systems

4. Quantitative and Qualitative Analyses of Control Systems

5. Computer Simulation and Realizations

6. Design Criteria, Constraints, and Feedback

7. The Root-Locus Method

8. Frequency-Domain Techniques

9. The Inward Approach: Choice of Overall Transfer Functions

10. Implementation: Linear Algebraic Method

11. State Space Design

12. Discrete-Time System Analysis

13. Discrete-Time System Design

14. PID Controllers

Appendix A. The Laplace Transform

Appendix B. Linear Algebraic Equations

Index

INTRODUCTION TOERROR CONTROL CODESSALVATORE GRAVANO, University of Keele

This book provides a firm foundation for

those studying the field of error control codes.

It gives step-by-step instructions on this com-

plex topic beginning with single parity code

checks and repetition codes. With the use of

detailed examples, the book guides students

from basic error-control codes through linear

codes, cyclic codes, linear feedback shift

registers, vector fields, Galois fields, BCH

codes and convolutional codes. Wherever

possible, numerous detailed examples illus-

trate the principles so that complex mathemat-

ical proofs can be omitted, thereby keeping the

text concise and easy to follow.

2001 • 280 pp. • 54 illus. • 0-19-856231-4 paper • APS GRAVAN

Contents1. Block codes

2. Linear codes

3. Cyclic codes

4. Linear Feedback Shift Registers for Encoding and Decoding Cyclic Codes

5. Linear Algebra

6. Galois Fields

7. Bose Chaudhuri Hocquenghem Codes

8. Convolutional Codes

9. Index

DIGITAL CONTROLSYSTEMSSecond EditionBENJAMIN C. KUO, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign (Emeritus)

An introductory text for a senior- or graduate-level course on digital control systems, thisvolume covers the theory and applications ofdigital control systems, assuming knowledgeof matrix algebra, differential equations,Laplace transforms and the basic principles ofcontinuous-data control systems. Many sub-jects are new to this edition, most importantlydesign topics such as disturbance rejection,sensitivity considerations, and zero-rippledeadbeat-response design. In addition, Kuoincludes separate discussions on controlla-bility, observability, and stability, expands thediscussions of sampling period selection,emphasizes computer-aided solutions, andprovides a new and simpler approach to theNyquist criterion of stability.





2. Signal Conversion and Processing

3. The z-Transform

4. Transfer Functions, Block Diagrams and Signal Flow Graphs

5. The State Variable Technique

6. Controllability, Observability and Stability

7. Time-Domain and z-Domain Analysis

8. Frequency-Domain Analysis

9. Digital Simulation and Digital Redesign

10. Design of Discrete-Data Systems

11. Optimal Control

12. Microprocessor and DSP Controls

Appendixes

Control


DIGITAL CONTROLSYSTEM DESIGNSecond EditionMOHAMMED S. SANTINA,The Aerospace Corporation, Los Angeles,ALLEN R. STUBBERUD,and the late GENE H. HOSTETTER,both of University of California, Irvine

Building on Gene Hostetter’s lucid and highlypraised writing style, almost a third of thematerial in this second edition has been addedsince the last edition, bringing Dr. Hostetter’sclassic work into the present. It begins with anoverview of classical digital system controldesign, and develops the principles of regula-tion, tracking, Kalman filtering, and stochasticcontrol. The stronger emphasis on design alsosatisfies ABET recommendations for electricalengineering curricula. The approach favorsapplied relevance over the abstract, while stillexploring new ideas. Design examples aregiven throughout each chapter, with at least onemajor practical problem explained and solved.





1. Discrete-Time Systems and Z-Transformations

2. State Space Description of Dynamic Systems

3. Discrete-Time Observation, Control,and Feedback

4. Digital Observers and Regulator Design

5. Digital Tracking System Design

6. Digital Control Of Continuous-Time Systems

7. Stochastic Systems and Recursive Estimation

Appendixes

MODERN DIGITAL AND ANALOGCOMMUNICATIONSYSTEMSThird EditionB. P. LATHI,California State University, Sacramento

Lathi’s trademark user-friendly and highly

readable text presents a complete treatment of

communication systems. It begins by introduc-

ing students to the basics of communication

systems without using probabilistic theory;

concepts requiring probability theory are

covered only after a solid foundation has been

built. The third edition discusses spread-

spectrum systems, cellular communication

systems, and global positioning systems

(GPS). It also devotes an entire chapter to

emerging digital technologies (such as

SONET, ISDN, BISDN, ATM, and video

compression). Modern Digital and AnalogCommunication Systems is ideal for under-

graduate-level communications courses.




Features■ The book consistently explains difficult

concepts clearly, using prose as well asmathematics.

■ Every effort is made to give an intuitiveinsight—rather than just proofs—as well aspractical explanations of theoretical results,wherever possible.

■ The clear explanations, the well-chosenexamples to clarify the abstract mathematicalresults, and the excellent illustrations makethis book highly informative and easilyaccessible to an average student.

Contents

1. Introduction

1.1. Communication Systems

1.2. Analog and Digital Messages

1.3. Signal-to-Noise Ratio, Channel Bandwidth,and the Rate of Communication

1.4. Modulation

1.5. Randomness, Redundancy, and Coding

2. Introduction to Signals

2.1. Size of a Signal

2.2. Classification of Signals

2.3. Some Useful Signal Operations

2.4. Unit Impulse Function

2.5. Signals and Vectors

2.6. Signal Comparison: Correlation

2.7. Signal Representation by OrthogonalSignal Set

2.8. Trigonometric Fourier Series

2.9. Exponential Fourier Series

2.10. Numerical Computation of Dn

3. Analysis and Transmission Of Signals


3.2. Transforms of Some Useful Functions

3.3. Some Properties of the Fourier Transform

3.4. Signal Transmission through a Linear System

3.5. Ideal and Practical Filters

3.6. Signal Distortion over a Communication Channel

3.7. Signal Energy and Energy Spectral Density

3.8. Signal Power and Power Spectral Density

3.9 Numerical Computation of the FourierTransform: The DFT

4. Amplitude (Linear) Modulation

4.1. Baseband and Carrier Communication

4.2. Amplitude Modulation: Double Sideband (DSB)

4.3. Amplitude Modulation (AM)

4.4. Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)

4.5. Amplitude Modulation: Single Sideband (SSB)

4.6. Amplitude Modulation: Vestigial Sideband (VSB)

4.7. Carrier Acquisition

4.8. Superheterodyne AM Receiver

4.9. Television

5. Angle (Exponential) Modulation

5.1. Concept of Instantaneous Frequency

5.2. Bandwidth of Angle-Modulated Wave

5.3. Generation of FM Waves

5.4. Demodulation of FM

5.5. Interference in Angle-Modulated Systems

5.6. FM Receiver


Photonics/Optoelectronics and Communications


6. Sampling and the Pulse Code Modulation

6.1. Sampling Theorem

6.2. Pulse-Code Modulation (PCM)

6.3. Differential Pulse Code Modulation(DPCM)

6.4. Delta Modulation

7. Principles of Digital Data Transmission

7.1. A Digital Communication System

7.2. Line Coding

7.3. Pulse Shaping

7.4. Scrambling

7.5. Regenerative Repeater

7.6. Detection-Error Probability

7.7. M-ary Communication

7.8. Digital Carrier Systems

7.9. Digital Multiplexing

8. Emerging Digital Communications Technologies

8.1. The North American Hierarchy

8.2. Digital Services

8.3. Broadband Digital Communication: SONET

8.4. Digital Switching Technologies

8.5. Broadband Services for Entertainment and Home Office Applications

8.6. Video Compression

8.7. High Definition Television (HDTV)

9. Some Recent Developments and Miscellaneous Topics

9.1. Cellular Telephone (Mobile Radio) System

9.2. Spread Spectrum Systems

9.3. Transmission Media

9.4. Hybrid Circuit: 2-Wire to 4-Wire Conversions

9.5. Public Switched Telephone Network

10. Introduction to Theory of Probability

10.1. Concept of Probability

10.2. Random Variables

10.3. Statistical Average (Means)

10.4. Central Limit Theorem

10.5. Correlation

10.6. Linear Mean Square Estimation

11. Random Processes

11.1. From Random Variable to Random Process

11.2. Power Spectral Density of a Random Process

11.3. Multiple Random Processes

11.4. Transmission of Random Processesthrough Linear Systems

11.5. Bandpass Random Processes

11.6. Optimum Filtering: Wiener-Hopf Filter

12. Behavior of Analog Systems in the Presence of Noise

12.1. Baseband Systems

12.2. Amplitude-Modulated Systems

12.3. Angle-Modulated Systems

12.4. Pulse-Modulated Systems

12.5. Optimum Preemphasis-DeemphasisSystems

13. Behavior of Digital Communication Systems in the Presence of Noise

13.1. Optimum Threshold Detection

13.2. General Analysis: Optimum Binary Receiver

13.3. Carrier Systems: ASK, FSK, PSK, and DPSK

13.4. Performance of Spread Spectrum Systems

13.5. M-ary Communication

13.6. Synchronization

14. Optimum Signal Detection

14.1. Geometrical Representation of Signals: Signal Space

14.2. Gaussian Random Process

14.3. Optimum Receiver

14.4. Equivalent Signal Sets

14.5. Nonwhite (Colored) Channel Noise

14.6. Other Useful Performance Criteria

15. Introduction To Information Theory

15.1. Measure of Information

15.2. Source Encoding

15.3. Error-Free Communication over a Noisy Channel

15.4. Channel Capacity of a Discrete Memoriless Channel

15.5. Channel Capacity of a Continuous Channel

15.6. Practical Communication Systems in Light of Shannon’s Equation

16. Error Correcting Codes

16.1. Introduction

16.2. Linear Block Codes

16.3. Cyclic Codes

16.4. Burst-Error-Detecting and Correcting Codes

16.5. Interlaced Codes for Burst- and Random-Error Correction

16.6. Convolutional Codes

16.7. Comparison of Coded and Uncoded Systems

Appendixes

A. Orthogonality of Some Signal Sets

B. Schwarz Inequality

C. Gram-Schmidt Orthogonalization of a Vector Set

D. Miscellaneous

Index

GUIDED-WAVEPHOTONICSBRUCE BUCKMAN, University of Texas, Austin

This comprehensive volume combines fiber

and integrated optics material in a one-semes-

ter text for seniors. It is specific in its coverage

of fiber optics, with physical insight into the

development of ray-optic and wave-field

description of waveguiding. Students will ben-

efit from a review of the required math and

electromagnetic background in Chapter 1.

Sections on the latest applications such as

fiber optic sensors, optical amplifiers, and

optical interconnects are included.



Contents1. Electromagnetics Essentials

2. Waveguide Theory and Fabrication

3. The Optical Fiber

4. Guided-Wave Communications Principles

5. Mode Coupling

6. Passive Guided-Wave Devices

7. Guided-Wave Modulators, Switches, and Information-Processing

8. Guided-Wave Sources, Amplifiers, and Detectors

9. Guided-Wave Optical Sensors

Appendix: Software Description and Use

Index

Photonics/Optoelectronics and Communications


INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL FIBERCOMMUNICATIONSYSTEMSWILLIAM B. JONES, Jr., Texas A&M University

For seniors or first-year graduate students, this

text is a general introduction to optical elec-

tronics with a strong emphasis on underlying

physical properties and on the design of

optical communications systems. Jones pro-

vides balanced coverage of optical fibers,

transmitting devices, photodetectors, and

systems. Special attention is given to topics of

emerging importance, including integrated

optical devices, heterodyne detection, and

coherent optical systems. The book’s prac-

tical engineering orientation satisfies the latest

ABET recommendations for more design

instruction in electrical engineering courses.





2. Communication Systems

3. Light and Electromagnetic Waves

4. Dielectric Waveguides and Optical Fibers

5. Electroluminescence and Light-Emitting Diodes

6. Lasers

7. Photodetectors

8. Optical Receivers

9. Optical Fiber Communication Systems

Appendixes

A. List of Symbols and Acronyms

B. Physical Constants

C. Properties of Semiconductor Materials

D. SI Units

E. Greek Alphabet

F Answers to Selected Problems

OPTICAL ELECTRONICSIN MODERNCOMMUNICATIONSFifth EditionAMNON YARIV,California Institute of Technology

Optical Electronics in Modern Communica-tions reflects the latest developments in the

field Amnon Yariv helped define. Featuring

real-life examples and extensive problems, the

text introduces readers to the first principles of

phenomena and devices used in the practice of

laser physics, including applications based on

lasers with emphasis placed on optical fiber

communications.




Contents1. Electromagnetic Theory

2. The Propagation of Rays and Beams

3. Propagation of Optical Beams in Fibers

4. Optical Resonators

5. Interaction of Radiation and Atomic Systems

6. Theory or Laser Oscillation and Its Control in the Continuous and Pulsed Regimes

7. Some Specific Laser Systems

8. Second-Harmonic Generation and Parametric Oscillation

9. Electrooptic Modulation of Laser Beams

10. Noise in Optical Detection and Generation

11. Detection of Optical Radiation

12. Interaction of Light and Sound

13. Propagation and Coupling of Modes in Optical Dielectric Waveguides—Periodic Waveguides

14. Holography and Optical Data Storage

15. Semiconductor Lasers—Theory and Applications

16. Advanced Semiconductor Lasers: Quantum Well Lasers, Distributed Feedback Lasers,Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Lasers

17. Phase Conjugate Optics—Theory and Applications

18. Two-Beam Coupling and Phase Conjugation in Photorefractive Media

19. Optical Solutions

20. A Classical Treatment of Quantum Optics,Quantum Noise, and Squeezing

Appendixes

Index

FIBER OPTICS ANDOPTOELECTRONICSR. P. KHARE, Birla Institute of Technology and Science, India

Developed for introductory courses, this book

covers the major building blocks of present-

day fiber-optic systems and their use in

communications and sensing. The text begins

with easy-to-understand ray propagation in

optical fibers and progresses to the more com-

plex topics of wave propagation in planar and

cylindrical waveguides. Special emphasis is

given to the treatment of single-mode fibers,

the backbone of present-day optical commu-

nication systems. It also offers a detailed

treatment of the theory behind optoelectronic

sources (LEDs and injection laser diodes),

detectors, modulators, and optical amplifiers.

In addition, contemporary topics such as

erbium-doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs), and

wavelength-division multiplexing (WDM),

and dense WDM are discussed.

2004 • 432 pp. • 199 illus. • 0-19-566930-4paper • APS KHARE

ContentsPreface

Introduction

PART I: FIBER OPTICS

1. Ray Propagation in Optical Fibers

2. Wave Propagation in Planar Waveguides

3. Wave Propagation in Cylindrical Waveguides

4. Single-Mode Fibers

5. Optical Fiber Cables and Connections

PART II: OPTOELECTRONICS

6. Optoelectronic Sources

7. Optoelectronic Detectors

8. Optoelectronic Modulators

9. Optical Amplifiers

PART III: APPLICATIONS

10. Wavelength-Division Multiplexing

11. Fiber-Optic Communication Systems

12. Fiber-Optic Sensors Laser-Based Systems

PART IV: LAB-ORIENTED PROJECTS

Index

Circuit Design, Filters, & Fabrication


CMOS ANALOG CIRCUIT DESIGNSecond Edition

PHILLIP E. ALLEN,Georgia Institute of Technology, andDOUGLAS R. HOLBERG,Cygnal Integrated Products, Inc.

The second edition of CMOS Analog CircuitDesign presents a cutting-edge, effective over-

view of the principles and techniques for

designing circuits. The trademark approach

of this book is its design recipes, which take

readers step-by-step through the creation of

real circuits, explaining and increasing under-

standing of complex design problems. It

provides detailed coverage of often neglected

areas and deliberately leaves out bipolar ana-

log circuits, since CMOS is the dominant

technology for analog integrated circuit

design. Appropriate for advanced undergrad-

uates and graduate students with background

knowledge in basic electronics including bias-

ing, modeling, circuit, analysis, and frequency

response, CMOS Analog Circuit Design,

Second Edition, presents a complete picture

of design (including modeling, simulation,

and testing) and enables readers to undertake

the design of an analog circuit that can be

implemented by CMOS technology.

* An Instructor’s Solutions CD is available.(0-19-516575-6)

* A PowerPoint Overheads CD is available.(0-19-515858-X)

2002 • 800 pp. • 1024 illus. • 0-19-511644-5 cloth • APS CMOS2E


Features■ Orients the experience of the expert within

the perspective of design methodology

■ Provides examples throughout the text thatreinforce and develop student understanding

■ Contains numerous problems that can beused as homework, quiz, or exam problems

■ Includes a new section on switched-capacitorcircuits

Contents

Each chapter ends with a Summary,Problems, and References.

Preface

1. Introduction and Background

1.1. Analog Integrated-Circuit Design

1.2. Notation, Symbology and Terminology

1.3. Analog Signal Processing

1.4. Example of Analog VLSI Mixed-SignalCircuit Design

2. CMOS Technology

2.1. Basic MOS Semiconductor Fabrication Processes

2.2. The pn Junction

2.3. The MOS Transistor

2.4. Passive Components

2.5. Other Considerations of CMOS Technology

2.6. Integrated Circuit Layout

3. CMOS Device Modeling

3.1. Simple MOS Large-Signal Model (SPICE LEVEL 1)

3.2. Other MOS Large-Signal Model Parameters

3.3. Small-Signal Model for the MOS Transistor

3.4. Computer Simulation Models

3.5. Subthreshold MOS Model

3.6. SPICE Simulation of MOS Circuits

4. Analog CMOS Subcircuits

4.1. MOS Switch

4.2. MOS Diode/Active Resistor

4.3. Current Sinks and Sources

4.4. Current Mirrors

4.5. Current and Voltage References

4.6. Bandgap Reference

5. CMOS Amplifiers

5.1. Inverters

5.2. Differential Amplifiers

5.3. Cascode Amplifiers

5.4. Current Amplifiers

5.5. Output Amplifiers

5.6. High-Gain Amplifier Architectures

6. CMOS Operational Amplifiers

6.1. Design of CMOS Op Amps

6.2. Compensation of Op Amps

6.3. Design of Two-Stage Op Amps

6.4. Power-Supply Rejection Ratio of Two-Stage Op Amps

6.5. Cascode Op Amps

6.6. Simulation and Measurement of Op Amps

6.7. Macromodels for Op Amps

7. High Performance CMOS Op Amps

7.1. Buffered Op Amps

7.2. High-Speed/Frequency Op Amps

7.3. Differential-Output Op Amps

7.4. Micropower Op Amps

7.5. Low-Noise Op Amps

7.6. Low-Voltage Op Amps

8. Comparators

8.1. Characterization of a Comparator

8.2. Two-Stage, Open-Loop Comparators

8.3. Other Open-Loop Comparators

8.4. Improving the Performance of Open-Loop Comparators

8.5. Discrete-Time Comparators

8.6. High-Speed Comparators

9. Switched Capacitor Circuits

9.1. Switched Capacitor Circuits

9.2. Switched Capacitor Amplifiers

9.3. Switched Capacitor Integrators

9.4. z-Domain Models of Two-Phase Switched Capacitor Circuits

9.5. First-Order Switched Capacitor Circuits

9.6. Second-Order Switched Capacitor Circuits

9.7. Switched Capacitor Filters

10. Digital-Analog and Analog-Digital Converters

10.1. Introduction and Characterization ofDigital-Analog Converters

10.2. Parallel Digital-Analog Converters

10.3. Extending the Resolution of ParallelDigital-Analog Converters

10.4. Serial Digital-Analog Converters

10.5. Introduction and Characterization ofAnalog-Digital Converters

10.6. Serial Analog-Digital Converters

10.7. Medium-Speed Analog-Digital Converters

10.8. High-Speed Analog-Digital Converters

10.9. Oversampling Converters

Appendixes

A. Circuit Analysis for Analog Circuit Design

B. CMOS Device Characterization

C. Time and Frequency Domain Relationships for Second-Order Systems

Index



THE SCIENCE ANDENGINEERING OFMICROELECTRONICFABRICATIONSecond EditionSTEPHEN A. CAMPBELL,University of Minnesota

Ideal for upper-level undergraduate or first-

year graduate courses, The Science andEngineering of Microelectronic Fabrication,Second Edition, provides a thorough and

accessible introduction to the field. It covers

all the basic unit processes used to fabricate

integrated circuits, including photolithogra-

phy, plasma and reactive ion etching, ion

implantation, diffusion, oxidation, evapora-

tion, vapor phase epitaxial growth, sputtering,

and chemical vapor deposition. Advanced

processing topics such as rapid thermal pro-

cessing, next generation lithography, molecular

beam epitaxy, and metal organic chemical

vapor deposition are also presented.

* An Instructor’s Solutions CD is available.(0-19-515730-3)

* A PowerPoint Overheads CD is available.(0-19-514861-4)

2001 • 624 pp. • 609 illus. • 0-19-513605-5 cloth • APS SCIEN2


Features

■ Introduces the physics and chemistry of

each process along with descriptions of

the equipment used for the manufacture of

integrated circuits

■ Discusses the integration of these processes

into common technologies such as CMOS,

double poly bipolar, and GaAs MESFETs

■ Evaluates complexity/performance trade-

offs along with a description of current

state-of-the-art devices

■ Includes sample problems with solutions in

each chapter

■ Employs the popular process simulation

package SUPREM to provide examples of

the type of real-world dopant redistribution

problems that microelectronic fabrication

engineers must face

ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary,Problems, and References.

PART 1. OVERVIEW AND MATERIALS

1. An Introduction to Microelectronic Fabrication

2. Semiconductor Substrates

PART 2. UNIT PROCESS 1:HOT PROCESSING AND ION IMPLANTATION

3. Diffusion

4. Thermal Oxidation

5. Ion Implantation

6. Rapid Thermal Processing

PART 3. UNIT PROCESSES 2:PATTERN TRANSFER

7. Optical Lithography

8. Photoresists

9. Nonoptical Lithographic Techniques

10. Vacuum Science and Plasmas

11. Etching

PART 4. UNIT PROCESSES 3:THIN FILMS

12. Physical Deposition: Evaporation and Sputtering

13. Chemical Vapor Deposition

14. Epitaxial Growth

PART 5. PROCESS INTEGRATION

15. Device Isolation, Contacts, and Metallization

16. CMOS Technologies

17. GaAs Technologies

18. Silicon Bipolar Technologies

19. MEMS

20. Integrated Circuit Manufacturing

Appendixes

Index

DESIGN OF ANALOG FILTERSROLF SCHAUMANN, Portland StateUniversity (Emeritus) and the late MAC E.VAN VALKENBURG, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign

Written for advanced undergraduate and first-

year graduate courses in analog filter design

and signal processing, Design of AnalogFilters integrates theory and practice to

provide a modern and practical “how-to”

approach to design. A complete revision of

Mac Van Valkenburg’s classic work, AnalogFilter Design (1982), this text builds on the

presentation and style of its predecessor,

updating it to meet the needs of today’s engi-

neering students. Reflecting recent develop-

ments in the field and emphasizing intuitive

understanding, it provides readers with an

up-to-date introduction and design guidelines

and helps them to develop a “feel” for analog

circuit behavior.




Features■ Includes a wealth of examples, all of which

have been tested on simulators or in actualindustrial use

■ Employs MATLAB to minimize algebraicand other computational needs

■ Uses Electronics Workbench MULTISIMto help students simulate actual experimen-tal behavior

■ Provides sample design tables and designand performance curves

■ Avoids sophisticated mathematics whereverpossible in favor of algebraic or intuitivederivations




ContentsEach chapter ends with Problems.

Preface

1. Introduction

1.1. Fundamentals

1.2. Types of Filters and DescriptiveTerminology

1.3. Why We Use Analog Filters

1.4. Circuit Elements and Scaling


2.1. Operational Amplifier Models

2.2. Opamp Slew Rate

2.3. The Operational Amplifier with Resistive Feedback: Noninverting and Inverting Amplifiers

2.4. Analysis Opamp Circuits

2.5. Block Diagrams and Feedback

2.6. The Voltage Follower

2.7. Addition and Subtraction

2.8. Applications of Opamp Resistor Circuits

3. First-Order Filters: Bilinear Transfer Functions and Frequency Response

3.1. Bilinear Transfer Function and Its Parts

3.2. Realization with Passive Elements

3.3. Bode Plots

3.4. Active Realizations

3.5. The Effect of A(s)

3.6. Cascade Design

3.7. And Now Design

4. Second-Order Lowpass and Bandpass Filters

4.1. Design Parameters: Q and ω0

4.2. The Second-Order Circuit

4.3. Frequency Response of Lowpass and Bandpass Circuits

4.4. Integrators: The Effects of A(s)

4.5. Other Biquads

5. Second-Order Filters with Arbitrary Transmission Zeros

5.1. By Using Summing

5.2. By Voltage Feedforward

5.3. Cascade Design Revisited

6. Lowpass Filters with Maximally Flat Magnitude

6.1. The Ideal Lowpass Filter

6.2. Butterworth Response

6.3. Butterworth Pole Locations

6.4. Lowpass Filter Specifications

6.5. Arbitrary Transmission Zeros

7. Lowpass Filters with Equal-Ripple (Chebyshev) Magnitude Response

7.1. The Chebyshev Polynomial

7.2. The Chebyshev Magnitude Response

7.3. Location of Chebyshev Poles

7.4. Comparison of Maximally Flat and Equal-Ripple Responses

7.5. Chebyshev Filter Design

8. Inverse Chebyshev and Cauer Filters

8.1. The Inverse Chebyshev Response

8.2. From Specifications to Pole and Zero Locations

8.3. Cauer Magnitude Response

8.4. Chebyshev Rational Functions

8.5. Cauer Filter Design

8.6. Comparison of the Classical Filter Responses

9. Frequency Transformation

9.1. Lowpass-to-Highpass Transformation

9.2. Lowpass-to-Bandpass Transformation

9.3. Lowpass-to-Band-EliminationTransformation

9.4. Lowpass-to-Multiple PassbandTransformation

9.5. The Foster Reactance Function

10. Delay Filters

10.1. Time Delay and Transfer Functions

10.2. Bessel–Thomson Response

10.3. Bessel Polynomials

10.4. Further Comparisons of Responses

10.5. Design of Bessel–Thomson Filters

10.6. Equal-Ripple Delay Response

10.7. Approxmating an Ideal Delay Function

10.8. Improving High-Frequency AttenuationGenerating Gain Boosts

11. Delay Equalization

11.1. Equalization Procedures

11.2. Equalization with First-Order Modules

11.3. Equalization with Second-Order Modules

11.4. Strategies for Equalizer Designer

12. Sensitivity

12.1. Definition of Bode Sensitivity

12.2. Second-Order Sections

12.3. High-Order Filters

13. LC Ladder Filters

13.1. Some Properties of Lossless Ladders

13.2. A Synthesis Strategy

13.3. Tables for Other Responses

13.4. General Ladder Design Methods

13.5. Frequency Transformation

13.6. Design of Passive Equalizers

14. Ladder Simulations by Element Replacement

14.1. The General Impedance Converter

14.2. Optimal Design of the GIC

14.3. Realizing Simple Ladders

14.4. Gorski-Popiel’s Embedding Technique

14.5. Bruton’s FDNR Technique

14.6. Creating Negative Components

15. Operational Simulations of Ladders

15.1. Simulation of Lowpass Ladder

15.2. Design of General Ladders

15.3. All-Pole Bandpass Ladders

16. Transconductance 1-1 C Filters

16.1. Transconductance Cells

16.2. Elementary Transconductor Building Blocks

16.3. First- and Second-Order Filters

16.4. High-Order Filters

16.5. Automatic Tuning

17. Switched-Capacitor Filters

17.1. The MOS Switch

17.2. The Switched Capacitor

17.3. First-Order Building Blocks

17.4. Second-Order Sections

17.5. Sampled-Data Operation

17.6. Switched-Capacitor First- and Second-Order Sections

17.7. The Bilinear Transformation

17.8. Design of Switched-Capacitor Cascade Filters

17.9. Design of Switched-Capacitor Ladder Filters

Index


AN INTRODUCTION TOMIXED-SIGNAL IC TESTAND MEASUREMENTMARK BURNS, Texas Instruments, andGORDON W. ROBERTS, McGill University

An Introduction to Mixed-Signal IC Test andMeasurement is a textbook for advanced un-

dergraduate and graduate-level students as well

as engineering professionals. It encompasses

the testing of both analog and mixed-signal

circuits, including many borderline examples.

Digital testing is covered but not as extensively

because of the wealth of information on this

topic already available. Examples and illustra-

tions using state-of-the-art industrial technology

enrich and enliven the presentation through-

out. In considering the applications of this

technology, the testing of large-scale mixed-

signal circuits and individual circuits is intro-

duced. The value-added benefits of mixed-

signal IC testing to a manufacturer’s product

are clearly discussed and the role of the test

engineer is defined.

2001 • 686 pp. •375 illus. • 0-19-514016-8 cloth • APS BURMS


ContentsChapters 2 through 16 end with a Summary.

Preface

1. Overview of Mixed-Signal Testing

2. The Test Specification Process

3. DC and Parametric Measurements

4. Measurement Accuracy

5. Tester Hardware

6. Sampling Theory

7. DSP-Based Testing

8. Analog Channel Testing

9. Sampled Channel Testing

10. Focused Calibrations

11. DAC Testing

12. ADC Testing

13. DIB Design

14. Design for Test (DfT)

15. Data Analysis

16. Test Economics


Index

DIGITAL INTEGRATEDCIRCUIT DESIGNKEN MARTIN, University of Toronto

Working from the fundamentals of transistor-

level design and building up to system-level con-

siderations, Digital Integrated Circuit Designshows students with minimal background in

electronics how to design state-of-the-art high

performance digital integrated circuits. Ideal

as an upper-level undergraduate text, it can

also be used in first-year graduate courses and

as a reference for practicing engineers.

* An Instructor’s Manual is available.(0-19-513947-X)



ContentsPreface

1. The Basics

2. Processing, Layout, and Related Issues

3. Integrated-Circuit Devices and Modeling

4. Traditional MOS Design

5. Transmission-Gate and Fully Differential CMOS Logic

6. CMOS Timing and I/O Considerations

7. Latches, Flip-FLops, and Synchronous System Design

8. Bipolar and BiCMOS Logic Gates

9. Advanced CMOS Logic Design

10. Digital Integrated System Building Blocks

11. Integrated Memories

12. GaAs Digital Circuits

13. Digital System Testing

Index

ANALOG FILTER DESIGNThe late MAC E. VAN VALKENBURG,University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign

This classic was the first to fill the need for an

undergraduate text in analog filters for electrical

engineering. Intended for juniors and seniors

with a background in introductory circuits,

including Laplace transforms, the text focuses

on inductorless filters in which the active

element is the operational amplifier (op-amp).

Passive LCR filters are excluded except as

prototypes from which an active equivalent is

then found. Students learn the importance of

op-amps to analog systems, which Van

Valkenburg equates with the significance of

the microprocessor to digital systems. Because

the book is intended for undergraduates,

sophisticated mathematics have been avoided

wherever possible in favor of algebraic deriva-

tions. Design topics require at most a hand-

held calculator.




2. Resistor Op-Amp Circuits

3. Bilinear Transfer Functions and Frequency Response

4. Cascade Design with First-Order Circuits

5. The Biquad Circuit

6. Butterworth Low-Pass Filters

7. Butterworth Band-Pass Filters

8. The Chebyshev Response

9. Sensitivity

10. Delay Filters

11. Frequency Transformation

12. Highpass and Band-Elimination Filters

13. Inverse Chebyshev and Cauer Filters

14. Prototype and Frequency-Transformed Ladders

15. Ladder Design with Simulated Elements

16. Leapfrog Simulation of Ladders

17. Switched Capacitor Filters

18. Delay Equalization

19. Op-Amp Oscillators

20. Better Op-Amp Models

Appendix: Scaling

References


MOSFET THEORY AND DESIGNR. M. WARNER, JR., University of Minnesota,and B. L. GRUNG

Developed for a one-semester course at the

junior, senior, or graduate level, MOSFETTheory and Design presents a clear, in-depth

treatment of physical analysis and design prin-

ciples. By focusing solely on the MOSFET,

this slim volume recognizes the dominance of

this device in today’s microelectronics tech-

nology while also providing students with a

“hands-on” approach to learning, employing

analytic, computer, and design problems. It

incorporates additional pedagogical aids such

as a book summary, review questions that

emphasize essential points, in-text exercises

with accompanying solutions, and a compre-

hensive bibliography.


1999 • 272 pp. • 102 illus. • 0-19-511642-9 paper • APS MOSFET


ContentsPreface

Charts

1. Basic MOSFET Theory

2. MOS-Capacitor Phenomena

3.MOS-Capacitor Modeling

4. Improved MOSFET Theory

5. SPICE Models

6. MOSFET-BJT Performance Comparisons

Summary

Appendixes A-G

Tables

References

Problems

Symbol Index

Subject Index

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIESOF MATERIALSSeventh EditionLASZLO SOLYMAR and DONALD WALSH,both at Oxford University

The seventh edition of this classic text

illustrates the fundamentals of the electrical

properties of materials in the context of con-

temporary engineering applications. Written

in an informal, accessible style, it emphasizes

the core ideas relevant to understanding the

subject and deliberately keeps the mathematical

treatment simple. The book examines the

simplest model that can display the essential

properties of a phenomenon, showing the

difference between ideal and actual behavior.

Topics are selected so that the operation of

devices having applications in engineering can

be explained. Problems and worked examples

are included throughout.

Ideal for upper-level undergraduate courses

in electrical engineering, Electrical Propertiesof Materials, Seventh Edition, can also be

used in applied physics and materials science

courses.

* A Solutions Manual and illustrations from the text are available for download at:www.oup.com/uk/booksites/content/0199267936/

2004 • 432 pp. • 250 illus. • 0-19-926793-6paper • APS SOLY7E

Features■ Presents a comprehensive treatment of light

emitting diodes, which are rapidly replacingclassical lighting sources

■ Covers such new topics as organic material(including various polymers) and artificialmaterials (including photonic gap materialsand metamaterials)

■ Provides insight into such cutting-edgefields as amorphous semiconductors andnanotechnology

■ Discusses new devices including nanotubetransistors, single electron transistors, mag-netic tunnel junctions, quantum cascadelasers, and ferroelectric and superconductingmemories

Contents1. The Electron as a Particle

2. The Electron as a Wave

3. The Electron

4. The Hydrogen Atom and the Periodic Table

5. Bonds

6. The Free Electron Theory of Metals

7. The Band Theory of Solids

8. Semiconductors

9. Principles of Semiconductor Devices

10. Dielectric Materials

11. Magnetic Materials

12. Lasers

13. Optoelectronics

14. Superconductivity

S emiconduc torsCircuit Design, Filters, & Fabrication


UNDERSTANDINGSEMICONDUCTORDEVICESSIMA DIMITRIJEV, Griffith University, Australia

Ideal for undergraduate and beginning

graduate students in electrical engineering,

Understanding Semiconductor Devices pro-

vides a solid grounding in both fundamental

principles and practical skills. The text features

intuitive explanations and a motivating “elec-

tronics-to-physics” approach that progresses

from basic to more abstract concepts. Bridging

the gap between theory and practice, it incor-

porates the “nuts and bolts” of SPICE (models

and parameters) and provides links between

theoretical principles and real-life issues like

reliability and device parameter measurement.

Intriguing and diverse problems, review ques-

tions, and worked examples are provided.


* A Computer Exercises Manual and a MATLAB CD are also available.


2000 • 582 pp. • 638 illus. • 0-19-513186-X cloth • APS DIMIT


Features■ Presents intuitive explanations of underlying

scientific concepts and explains fundamentalequations (as opposed to mathematicalexplanations of physical phenomena)

■ Offers vertical (electronics-to-physics) hier-archy and lateral flexibility, motivating students to learn underlying scientific concepts and mathematical models by providing appropriate context and a con-tinuous progression from common sense tomore abstract concepts

■ Covers such important practical issues asreliability and device parameter measure-ment and links them to descriptions of fun-damental device electronics and technology

ContentsPreface

PART 1: THE FUNDAMENTALS

1. Resistors: Introduction to Semiconductors

2. Capacitors: Reverse-Biased P–N Junction and MOS Structure

3. Diodes: Forward-Biased P–N Junction and Metal–Semiconductor Contact

4. Basics of Transistor Applications

5. MOSFET

6. BJT

PART 2: ADVANCED TOPICS

7. Advanced and Specific IC Devices and Technologies

8. Photonic Devices

9. Microwave FETs and Diodes

10. Power Devices

11. Semiconductor Device Reliability

12. Quantum Mechanics

APPENDIXES:

A. Basic Integrated-Circuit Concepts and Economics

B. Crystal Lattices, Planes, and Directions

C. Hall Effect and Summary of Kinetic Phenomena

D. Summary of Equations and Key Points

E. Contents of Computer Exercises Manual

List of Selected Symbols

Bibliography


Index

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE PHYSICS OFSEMICONDUCTORDEVICESDAVID J. ROULSTON,University of Waterloo

This work provides an introduction to the

physical operation of semiconductor devices

including diodes, bipolar transistors, MOS

field-effect transistors, and junction field-effect

transistors, as well as an overview of numerous

other devices. Ideal for second- and third-year

students in electrical engineering, electronics,

and physics, the text is self-contained and

includes enough background physics to be

accessible to students with no previous expo-

sure to semiconductor devices.


1998 • 320 pp. • 231 illus. • 0-19-511477-9 cloth • APS SEE61R


ContentsEach chapter ends with Problems and References.

Preface

1. Overview

2. Material Properties and Basic P-N Junction Relations

3. P-N Junction Diodes

4. Bipolar Junction Transistors

5. MOS Field-Effect Transistors

6. Junction Field-Effect Transistors

7. Overview of Special-Purpose Semiconductor Devices

8. Silicon Chip Technology and Fabrication Techniques

Appendixes

Index

com

pu

ter

engi

nee

rin

g

THE PRINCIPLES OFCOMPUTER HARDWAREThird EditionALAN CLEMENTS, University of Teesside

Ideal for courses in computer hardware,

architecture, or digital design, this accessible

text provides a comprehensive introduction

to the subject. The Principles of ComputerHardware, Third Edition, covers core topics

including Boolean algebra and logic design;

number bases and binary arithmetic; the CPU;

assembly language; memory systems; and

input/output methods and devices. It discuss-

es the related topics of computer peripherals,

the hardware aspects of the operating system,

and data communications. Coverage of both

the 68000 and ARM architectures is presented

in a tutorial/lab-based style suitable for a

variety of courses. Powerful Windows-based

simulation software allows students to visual-

ize the design of digital circuits.

2000 • 736 pp. • 626 illus. • 0-19-856454-6 cloth • APS CLEME3

Contents

1. Introduction to Computer Hardware

1.1. The Digital Computer1.2. Mainframe, Mini, and Micro1.3. The Stored-Program Computer—

An Overview

2. Gates, Circuits, and Combinational Logic

2.1. Analog and Digital Systems2.2. Fundamental Gates2.3. Applications of Gates2.4. Introduction to Digital Works2.5. An Introduction to Boolean Algebra2.6. Special-Purpose Logic Elements2.7. Tri-State Logic2.8. Programmable Logic

3. Sequential Logic

3.1. The RS Flip-Flop3.2. The D Flip-Flop

3.3. Clocked Flip-Flops3.4. The JK Flip-Flop3.5. Summary of Flip-Flop Types3.6. Applications of Sequential Elements3.7. Introduction to State Machines

4. Computer Arithmetic

4.1. Bits, Bytes, Words, and Characters4.2. Number Bases4.3. Number Base Conversion4.4. Special-Purpose Codes4.5. Binary Arithmetic4.6. Signed Numbers4.7. Computer Arithmetic and Assembly

Language Programming4.8. Floating Point Numbers4.9. Multiplication and Division

5. The Central Processing Unit

5.1. Introduction to the CPU5.2. Structure of the CPU5.3. The Control Unit5.4. Simulating a CPU5.5 Miroprocessor Systems

6. Assembly Language Programming and the 68K Family

6.1. Structure of an Assembly Language Program

6.2. The 68K’s Registers6.3. An Introduction to the 68K’s Instruction Set6.4. Addressing Modes6.5. The Stack6.6. Designing Assembly Language Programs

7. An Introduction to RISC Processors and the ARM

7.1. The RISC Revolution7.2. The Berkeley RISC7.3. RISC Architecture and Pipelining7.4. Accessing External Memory

in RISC Systems 7.5. Reducing the Branch Penalty7.6. The ARM Processor7.7. Using the ARM

8. Input/Output

8.1. Handshaking and Buffering8.2. Programmed I/O8.3. Interrupt-Driven I/O8.4. Direct Memory Access8.5. Parallel and Serial Interfaces8.6. Input Devices for Personal Computers8.7. The CRT and LED Displays8.8. The Printer8.9. Color Displays and Printers8.10. Other Peripherals

9. Computer Memory

9.1. Semiconductor Memory9.2. Interfacing Memory to a CPU9.3. Secondary Storage9.4. Disc Drive Principles9.5. The Tape Transport9.6. Optical Memory Technology

10. The CPU, Memory, and the Operating System

10.1. The Operating System10.2. Multitasking10.3. Operating System Support from the CPU

Hardware


C O M P U T E R E N G I N E E R I N G | 47

10.4. Memory Management10.5. Cache Memory

11. Computer Communications

11.1. Introduction11.2. Protocols and Computer Communication11.3. The Physical Layer11.4. Data Transmission Across the PSTN11.5. The Data Link Layer11.6. Local Area Networks11.7. Routing Techniques

12. Advanced Topics

12.1. Practical Considerations in Logic Design12.2. Computers and Reliability12.3. The Analog Interface12.4. Introduction to Digital Signal Processing

Appendix: The 68000 Instruction Set

BibliographyIndex

MICROCONTROLLERS AND MICROCOMPUTERSPrinciples of Software and Hardware EngineeringFREDRICK M. CADY,Montana State University, Bozeman

Microcontrollers and Microcomputers: Princi-ples of Software and Hardware Engineering is

a top-down introductory treatment of micro-

processors that provides students with an

accessible and thorough overview of today’s

key hardware and software engineering issues.

* A companion website is available at:www.coe.montana.edu/ee/cady/cadyhmpg.htm



ContentsPreface

1. Introduction

2. The Picoprocessor: An Introduction to Computer Architecture

3. Introduction to the CPU: Registers and Condition Codes

4. Addressing Modes

5. Assembly Language Programming and Debugging

6. Top-Down Software Design

7. Computer Buses and Parallel Input/Output

8. Interrupts and Real-Time Events

9. Computer Memories

10. Serial Input/Output

11. Analog Input and Output

Appendix A. Binary Codes

Solutions to Chapter Problems

Index

SOFTWARE AND HARDWAREENGINEERINGMotorola M68HC11FREDRICK M. CADY,Montana State University, Bozeman

This helpful guide provides an introduction to

the architecture and design of hardware and

software for the Motorola M68HC11. It covers

all M68HC11 hardware features and shows

readers how to use the Motorola AS11 assem-

bler and the Buffalo Monitor and debugger.

The instruction set is described with many

examples, and a unique chapter gives complete

example programs, including illustrations of

how to use assembly language programming to

write programs that have been designed using

high-level pseudo-code. Designed to accompany

Microcomputers and Microcontrollers: Princi-ples of Hardware and Software Engineering,or

other books explaining the general principles

of hardware and software engineering, this

volume is also an excellent reference guide.



1997 • 336 pp. • 55 illus. • 0-19-511046-3 paper • APS SEE48


2. Introduction to the M68HC11 Hardware

3. Motorola AS11 Assembler

4. The M68HC11 Instruction Set

5. Buffalo Monitor and Debugger

6. AS11 Problems for the M68HC11

7. M68HC11 Parallel I/O

8. M68HC11 Interrupts

9. M68HC11 Memories

10. M68HC11 Timer

11. M68HC11 Serial I/O

12. M68HC11 Analog Input and Output

13. Advanced M68HC11 Hardware

14. The Motorola M68HC11EVB

Appendix A. M68HC11 Resources

Appendix B. M68HC11 Family

Solutions to Chapter Problems

Index

SOFTWARE AND HARDWAREENGINEERINGMotorola M68HC12FREDRICK M. CADY, Montana State University, Bozeman andJAMES SIBIGTROTH, Motorola Company

This introduction to the architecture and

design of the hardware and software for the

Motorola M68HC12 is replete with program-

ming and hardware interfacing examples that

will enable students to become software and

hardware designers. Two major members of the

M68HC12 family—the MC68HC812A4 and

the MC68HC912B32—are described in detail.

The text also compares the M68HC12 with

the M68HC11. In addition to covering the

features common to all members of the

M68HC12 family of microcontrollers,

advanced features are also discussed, including

the memory expansion capabilities of the

M68HC812A4, the pulse-width modulator

of the MC68HC912B32, the enhanced SCI

and SPI, the analog-to-digital converter, the

fuzzy logic instruction set, debugging, and

the advanced architectures of the M68HC12.



ContentsPreface

1. Introduction

2. Introduction to the M68HC12 Hardware

3. An Assembler Program

4. The M68HC12 Instruction Set

5. D-Bug12 Monitor and Debugger

6. Programs for the M68HC12

7. M68HC12 Parallel I/O

8. M68HC12 Interrupts

9. M68HC12 Memories

10. MC68HC12 Timer

11. M68HC12 Serial I/O

12. M68HC12 Analog Input

13. Fuzzy Logic

14. Debugging Systems

15. Advanced M68HC12 Hardware

Appendix A. Debugging Systems POD Design

Answers to Odd-Numbered Chapter Problems

Index


USING THE MCS-51MICROCONTROLLERHAN-WAY HUANG,Minnesota State University, Mankato

This extensively detailed and comprehensive

introduction to the Intel MCS-51 microcon-

troller covers both theoretical topics and

design and implementation issues. By pro-

gressively developing topics, starting with the

simple and moving to the complex, the author

creates an ideal introduction to microcon-

troller- and microprocessor-based design with

enough rigor and depth to provide detailed

knowledge of the MCS-51 microcontroller.

This book is intended as a textbook for a first

course on microprocessors or microcontrollers

but is also suitable for anyone who needs to

learn about the MCS-51 microcontroller.

* A Solutions Manual is available.(0-19-513950-X)

1999 • 560 pp. • 232 illus. • 0-19-512513-4 cloth • APS HUAN51

Contents1. Introduction to the Intel MCS-51

2. MCS-51 Assembly Programming

3. Advanced Assembly Programming

4. Bus Cycles and Memory Expansion

5. Interrupts, Resets, and Exception Processing

6. Parallel I/O Ports

7. Timer Function

8. Analog to Digital Converter

9. Serial Communication

10. Serial Expansion Port

Appendixes

References

Glossary

Index

SOFTWAREENGINEERINGFUNDAMENTALSALI BEHFOROOZ and FREDERICK J.HUDSON, both at Towson State University

Designed to introduce readers to the environ-

ment where software products are developed,

this book elaborates the concept of software

development as an engineering process. Soft-

ware metrics (attributes) are defined and utilized

to measure the properties of software products

and manage their manufacturing. Software

production is described in full detail, and

many of the interim products of this process

are described with enough specifications to

permit the creation of a fine draft by the reader.

The use of models for estimating size, cost,

and reliability, scheduling, and risk assessment

is encouraged, and explicit guidelines are pro-

vided for virtually any task a software engineer

may be assigned.

* An Instructor’s Manual with TransparencyMasters is available. (0-19-511153-2)


ContentsEach chapter begins with Objectives and ends with a Summary and Exercises.Each Unit ends with a Summary.

UNIT ONE: INTRODUCTION

1. Overview of System and Software Development Life Cycles

2. Case Studies

3. Technical Planning

UNIT TWO: ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

4. Software Specifications and Requirement Analysis

5. Software Specification Tools

6. Software Development Environment

7. Software Design

8. Object-Oriented Analysis and Design

UNIT THREE: IMPLEMENTATION AND MAINTENANCE

9. Fundamentals of Coding

10. Software System Test and Integration

11. Module Level Testing

12. Debugging

13. Software Maintenance and Maintainability

UNIT FOUR: SOFTWARE METRICS OR ATTRIBUTES

14. Software Attributes and Their Estimation

15. Software Development Resource Estimation

16. Software Development Risk Assessment and Containment

17. Reliability

18. Software Quality and Quality Assurance

UNIT FIVE: SPECIAL TOPICS

19. Real-Time Software

20. Human Factors in Software Engineering

APPENDIXES

A. Communication Skills

B. Cost Benefit Analysis

C. Decisions and Trade-Offs

D. Reviews

Index

Hardware S oftware


NETWORKS FORCOMPUTER SCIENTISTSAND ENGINEERSYOULU ZHENG, University of Montana, andSHAKIL AKHTAR, Central Michigan University

Networks for Computer Scientists and En-gineers is a data communications and networks

textbook with a unique software projects and

laboratory-based approach. Due to its inno-

vative and distinctive features, it has won

unanimous recommendation and partial spon-

sorship by the curriculum development com-

mittee of the National Science Foundation.

Designed for undergraduate students, it

covers both fundamental theory and modern

technologies. The Instructor’s Manual and

CD (available to adopters) provide step-by-

step instructions for configuring client/server

computers, hubs, routers, and switches to

construct a cost-effective prototype network

lab with implementation of web (http), email,

VPN, and other servers. This prototype lab is

based on Linux and other popular platforms,

demonstrates how different protocols and

components are integrated into a heteroge-

neous network, and provides an ideal environ-

ment for troubleshooting and experimental

network management.

The book’s accompanying software

projects—included on the instructor’s CD—

are not merely samples but complete software

packages with real applications and utilities

written in Java, C, C++, assembly language,

and thoroughly tested by professors and stu-

dents at several universities. Used together,

Networks for Computer Scientists andEngineers and the accompanying laboratory

projects actively engage students in the

learning process and provide opportunities

for critical thinking, problem solving, and

creativity in a controlled real-world setting.

* A Solutions CD and Lab Manual is available.(0-19-515836-9)

2001 • 592 pp. • 215 illus. • 0-19-511398-5 cloth • APS ZHENET

ContentsMost chapters end with a Summary, Problems,References, and a list of related Articles and Websites.

Preface

1. Introduction

1.1. Evolution of Data Communications and Networks

1.2. Telephone Systems and ComputerTelephony

1.3. Computer Telephony

1.4. Distributed Systems and Client–Server Models

1.5. Protocols and Standardization

2. Data Communications

2.1. Advantages of Digital Communications

2.2. Transmission Media

2.3. Fundamentals of Digital Transmission

2.4. Digitization and Multilevel Transmission

2.5. Modulation Techniques and Modems

2.6. Terminal Devices

2.7. Wireless Communication

2.8. Videoconferencing

3. The OSI Seven-Layer Network Model

3.1. Physical Layer

3.2. Data Link Layer

3.3. Network Layer

3.4. Transport Layer and Session Layer

3.5. Presentation Layer and Application Layer

3.6. Network Performance

4. LAN Technologies

4.1. LAN Overview

4.2. Protocols and Standards

4.3. LAN Hardware

4.4. LAN Services and LAN Operating Systems

5. TCP/IP and the Internet

5.1. Internet Architecture

5.2. Internet Protocol (IP) and Datagrams

5.3. Routing Protocols

5.4. User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

5.5. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

5.6. Internet Standard Services

5.7. Domain Name System (DNS)

5.8. TCP/IP for PCs

5.9. Internet Applications

6. Access and High-Speed Networking Technologies

6.1. Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN)

6.2. Cable Modem Systems

6.3. Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Technology

6.4. Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS)

6.5. Frame Relay

6.6. Fast Ethernet, 100VG-AnyLAN and Gigabit Ethernet

6.7. FDDI and CDDI

6.8. Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Networks

6.9. SONET

6.10. Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Communication

7. Switching and Virtual LAN

7.1. Hub Technology

7.2. Switching Technology for LAN and Internetworking

7.3. Non-ATM Virtual LANs

7.4. ATM Virtual LAN

7.5. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Standard

8. Network Performance

8.1. Why Study Network Performance?

8.2. Analytical Approaches

8.3. Simulation

8.4. Network Traffic Monitoring

9. Network Management

9.1. SNMP

9.2. RMON and RMONv2

9.3. TMN

9.4. Directory Services and Network Management

9.5. Web-Based Network Management

10. Communication and Network Security

10.1. Cryptography

10.2. Digital Certificate and Public Key Infrastructure (PKI)

10.3. Firewalls

10.4. Kerberos

10.5. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) and Virtual Private Network (VPN)

10.6. New Technologies in Network Security Applications

11. Network Programming

11.1. Software Architectures that Support Network Programming

11.2. Serial Port and Parallel Port Programming

11.3. NetBIOS Programming

11.4. TCP/IP and Socket Programming

11.5. Winsock Programming

11.6. RPC Programming

11.7. JAVA Programming

Index

Networks


THEORIES OFCOMMUNICATIONNETWORKSPETER R. MONGE,University of Southern California

NOSHIR CONTRACTOR,University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign

Theories of Communication Networks presents

a multi-theoretical model that relates different

social science theories with different network

properties. This model is multilevel, providing

a network decomposition that applies the

various social theories to all network levels.

The book then establishes a model from the

perspective of complex adaptive systems and

demonstrates how to use Blanche, an agent-

based network computer simulation environ-

ment, to generate and test network theories

and hypotheses. In addition, it discusses

recent developments in network statistical

analysis, the p* family, and how to relate com-

munication networks to other networks.

2003 • 432 pp. • 20 illus. • 0-19-516037-1 paper • APS MONGE

COMPUTERARCHITECTUREFrom Microprocessors toSupercomputersBEHROOZ PARHAMI,University of California, Santa Barbara

Computer Architecture: From Microprocessorsto Supercomputers provides a comprehensive

introduction to this thriving and exciting field.

Emphasizing both underlying theory and

actual designs, the book covers a wide array of

topics and links computer architecture to

other subfields of computing. The material is

presented in lecture-sized chapters that make

it easy for students to understand the relation-

ships between various topics and to see the

“big picture.” The short chapters also allow

instructors to order topics in the course as

they like.

The text is divided into seven parts, each

containing four chapters. Part I provides con-

text and reviews prerequisite topics including

digital computer technology and computer

system performance. Part II discusses instruc-

tion-set architecture. The next two parts cover

the central processing unit. Part III describes

the structure of arithmetic/logic units and Part

IV is devoted to data path and control circuits.

Part V deals with the memory system. Part VI

covers input/output and interfacing topics and

Part VII introduces advanced architectures.

Computer Architecture: From Micropro-cessors to Supercomputers is designed for

introductory courses and is suitable for

students majoring in electrical engineering,

computer science, or computer engineering.

2005 • 800 pp. • 381 illus. • 0-19-515455-X cloth • APS COMARC


* An Instructor’s Manual (0-19-522213-X) and CD with PowerPoint® presentations (0-19-522219-9) are available to adopters.

* Visit the companion website at:www.oup.com/us/PARHAMI

ContentsEach chapter ends with Problems, References,and Further Readings.

Preface

PART 1: BACKGROUND AND MOTIVATION

1. Combinational Digital Circuits

1.1. Signals, Logic Operators, and Gates

1.2. Boolean Functions and Expressions

1.3. Designing Gate Networks

1.4. Useful Combinational Parts

1.5. Programmable Combinational Parts

1.6. Timing and Circuit Considerations

2. Digital Circuits with Memory

2.1. Latches, Flip-Flops, and Registers

2.2. Finite-State Machines

2.3. Designing Sequential Circuits

2.4. Useful Sequential Parts

2.5. Programmable Sequential Parts

2.6. Clocks and Timing of Events

3. Computer System Technology

3.1. From Components to Applications

3.2. Computer Systems and Their Parts

3.3. Generations of Progress

3.4. Processor and Memory Technologies

3.5. Peripherals, I/O, and Communications

3.6. Software Systems and Applications

4. Computer Performance

4.1. Cost, Performance, and Cost/Performance

4.2. Defining Computer Performance

4.3. Performance Enhancement and Amdahl’s Law

4.4. Performance Measurement vs. Modeling

4.5. Reporting Computer Performance

4.6. The Quest for Higher Performance

PART 2: INSTRUCTION-SET ARCHITECTURE

5. Instructions and Addressing

5.1. Abstract View of Hardware

5.2. Instruction Formats

5.3. Simple Arithmetic and Logic Instructions

5.4. Load and Store Instructions

5.5. Jump and Branch Instructions

5.6. Addressing Modes

6. Procedures and Data

6.1. Simple Procedure Calls

6.2. Using the Stack for Data Storage

6.3. Parameters and Results

6.4. Data Types

6.5. Arrays and Pointers

6.6. Additional Instructions

Networks Architec ture

NEW!


7. Assembly Language Programs

7.1. Machine and Assembly Languages

7.2. Assembler Directives

7.3. Pseudoinstructions

7.4. Macroinstructions

7.5. Linking and Loading

7.6. Running Assembler Programs

8. Instruction-Set Variations

8.1. Complex Instructions

8.2. Alternative Addressing Modes

8.3. Variations in Instruction Formats

8.4. Instruction Set Design and Evolution

8.5. The RISC/CISC Dichotomy

8.6. Where to Draw the Line

PART 3: THE ARITHMETIC/LOGIC UNIT

9. Number Representation

9.1. Positional Number Systems

9.2. Digit Sets and Encodings

9.3. Number-Radix Conversion

9.4. Signed Integers

9.5. Fixed-Point Numbers

9.6. Floating-Point Numbers

10. Adders and Simple ALUs

10.1. Simple Adders

10.2. Carry Propagation Networks

10.3. Counting and Incrementation

10.4. Design of Fast Adders

10.5. Logic and Shift Operations

10.6. Multifunction ALUs

11. Multipliers and Dividers

11.1. Shift-Add Multiplication

11.2. Hardware Multipliers

11.3. Programmed Multiplication

11.4. Shift-Subtract Division

11.5. Hardware Dividers

11.6. Programmed Division

12. Floating-Point Arithmetic

12.1. Rounding Modes

12.2. Special Values and Exceptions

12.3. Floating-Point Addition

12.4. Other Floating-Point Operations

12.5. Floating-Point Instructions

12.6. Result Precision and Errors

PART 4: DATA PATH AND CONTROL

13. Instruction Execution Steps

13.1. A Small Set of Instructions

13.2. The Instruction Execution Unit

13.3. A Single-Cycle Data Path

13.4. Branching and Jumping

13.5. Deriving the Control Signals

13.6. Performance of the Single-Cycle Design

14. Control Unit Synthesis

14.1. A Multicycle Implementation

14.2. Clock Cycle and Control Signals

14.3. The Control State Machine

14.4. Performance of the Multicycle Design

14.5. Microprogramming

14.6. Dealing with Exceptions

15. Pipelined Data Paths

15.1. Pipelining Concepts

15.2. Pipeline Stalls or Bubbles

15.3. Pipeline Timing and Performance

15.4. Pipelined Data Path Design

15.5. Pipelined Control

15.6. Optimal Pipelining

16. Pipeline Performance Limits

16.1. Data Dependencies and Hazards

16.2. Data Forwarding

16.3. Pipeline Branch Hazards

16.4. Branch Prediction

16.5. Advanced Pipelining

16.6. Exceptions in a Pipeline

PART 5: MEMORY SYSTEM DESIGN

17. Main Memory Concepts

17.1. Memory Structure and SRAM

17.2. DRAM and Refresh Cycles

17.3. Hitting the Memory Wall

17.4. Pipelined and Interleaved Memory

17.5. Nonvolatile Memory

17.6. The Need for a Memory Hierarchy

18. Cache Memory Organization

18.1. The Need for a Cache

18.2. What Makes a Cache Work?

18.3. Direct-Mapped Cache

18.4. Set-Associative Cache

18.5. Cache and Main Memory

18.6. Improving Cache Performance

19. Mass Memory Concepts

19.1. Disk Memory Basics

19.2. Organizing Data on Disk

19.3. Disk Performance

19.4. Disk Caching

19.5. Disk Arrays and RAID

19.6. Other Types of Mass Memory

20. Virtual Memory and Paging

20.1. The Need for Virtual Memory

20.2. Address Translation in Virtual Memory

20.3. Translation Lookaside Buffer

20.4. Page Replacement Policies

20.5. Main and Mass Memories

20.6. Improving Virtual Memory Performance

PART 6: INPUT/OUTPUT AND INTERFACING

21. Input/Output Devices

21.1. Input/Output Devices and Controllers

21.2. Keyboard and Mouse

21.3. Visual Display Units

21.4. Hard-Copy Input/Output Devices

21.5. Other Input/Output Devices

21.6. Networking of Input/Output Devices

22. Input/Output Programming

22.1. I/O Performance and Benchmarks

22.2. Input/Output Addressing

22.3. Scheduled I/O: Polling

22.4. Demand-Based I/O: Interrupts

22.5. I/O Data Transfer and DMA

22.6. Improving I/O Performance

23. Buses, Links, and Interfacing

23.1. Intra- and Intersystem Links

23.2. Buses and Their Appeal

23.3. Bus Communication Protocols

23.4. Bus Arbitration and Performance

23.5. Basics of Interfacing

23.6. Interfacing Standards

24. Context Switching and Interrupts

24.1. System Calls for I/O

24.2. Interrupts, Exceptions, and Traps

24.3. Simple Interrupt Handling

24.4. Nested Interrupts

24.5. Types of Context Switching

24.6. Threads and Multithreading

PART 7: ADVANCED ARCHITECTURES

25. Road to Higher Performance

25.1. Past and Current Performance Trends

25.2. Performance-Driven ISA Extensions

25.3. Instruction-Level Parallelism

25.4. Speculation and Value Prediction

25.5. Special-Purpose Hardware Accelerators

25.6. Vector, Array, and Parallel Processing

26. Vector and Array Processing

26.1. Operations on Vectors

26.2. Vector Processor Implementation

26.3. Vector Processor Performance

26.4. Shared-Control Systems

26.5. Array Processor Implementation

26.6. Array Processor Performance

27. Shared-Memory Multiprocessing

27.1. Centralized Shared Memory

27.2. Multiple Caches and Cache Coherence

27.3. Implementing Symmetric Multiprocessors

27.4. Distributed Shared Memory

27.5. Directories to Guide Data Access

27.6. Implementing Asymmetric Multiprocessors

28. Distributed Multicomputing

28.1. Communication by Message Passing

28.2. Interconnection Networks

28.3. Message Composition and Routing

28.4. Building and Using Multicomputers

28.5. Network-Based Distributed Computing

28.6. Grid Computing and Beyond

Index


A PROGRAMMER’S VIEW OF COMPUTERARCHITECTUREWith Assembly LanguageExamples from the MIPS RISC ArchitectureJAMES GOODMAN and KAREN MILLER,both at University of Wisconsin, Madison

This introductory text offers a contemporarytreatment of computer architecture usingassembly and machine language with a focuson software. Students learn how computerswork through a clear, generic presentation of acomputer architecture, a departure from thetraditional focus on a specific architecture. Acomputer’s capabilities are introduced withinthe context of software, reinforcing the soft-ware focus of the text. Designed for computerscience majors in an assembly language course,this text uses a top-down approach to thematerial that enables students to begin pro-gramming immediately and to understand theassembly language, the interface betweenhardware and software. The text includesexamples from the MIPS RISC (reducedinstruction set computer) architecture, and anaccompanying software package simulates aMIPS RISC processor (although it does notrequire a MIPS processor to run).


1993 • 416 pp. • illus. • 0-19-513109-6 cloth • APS SCS13

Contents1. Abstractions and Computers

2. SAL: A Simple Abstract Language

3. Number Systems

4. Data Representation

5. Arithmetic and Logical Operations

6. Floating Point Arithmetic

7. Data Structures

8. Registers and MAL

9. Procedures

10. The Assembly Process

11. Input and Output

12. Interrupts and Exception Handling

13. Architectural Performance

14. Alternative Architectures

AppendixesA. SAL

B. MAL

C. TAL

AN ASSEMBLYLANGUAGEINTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERARCHITECTUREUsing the Intel® PentiumKAREN MILLER,University of Wisconsin, Madison

Ideal for undergraduate courses in computerorganization, assembly language program-ming, and computer architecture, this bookintroduces students to the fundamentals of com-puter architecture from a programmer’s per-spective by teaching them assembly language.It uses a top-down approach, introducing anabstract (registerless) assembly language first.This approach enables students to build onprevious knowledge, allowing them to writeprograms from the beginning of the course.Topics covered include basic computer organi-zation, data representation, data structures,the assembly process, exception handling, andmore. This accessible text is supplementedwith a helpful website that contains macros touse with programming tools, lecture notes toaccompany the text, sample programs, andother useful items.


* A website is available:www.cs.wisc.edu/~smoler/x86text.html

1999 • 352 pp. • 322 illus. • 0-19-512376-X cloth • APS ASSLAN

ContentsPreface

1. Background and Introduction

2. Computer Basics

3. SASM—Simple Abstract Language

4. Number Systems

5. Data Representation

6. Arithmetic and Logical Operations

7. Floating Point Arithmetic

8. Data Structures

9. Using Registers for Efficiency

10. The Pentium Architecture

11. Procedures

12. The Assembly Process

13. Input and Output

14. Interrupts and Exception Handling

15. Features for Architectural Performance

16. Architecture in Perspective

17. Memory Management and Virtual Memory by Barton P. Miller

Appendixes

A. Reserved WordsB. SASMC. Machine Language SpecificationIndex

PRINCIPLES OFPROGRAMMINGLANGUAGESDesign, Evaluation,and Implementation Third EditionBRUCE J. MacLENNAN,University of Tennessee, Knoxville

Principles of Programming Languages:Design, Evaluation, and Implementationteaches key design and implementation skillsessential for language designers, compilerwriters, and other computer scientists. It alsocovers descriptive tools and historical prece-dents so that students can understand designissues in their historical context. Ideal foradvanced undergraduate and graduate coursesin programming languages and comparativelanguages, this text uses a unique horizontalorganization that analyzes individual lan-guages in their entirety, facilitating discussionof the interrelationships between the parts of alanguage. It teaches design skills by emphasiz-ing basic principles more than details, focuseson methods of implementation over specifictechniques, and presents concepts inductively.In-depth case studies of representative lan-guages from five generations of programminglanguage design (Fortran, Algol-60, Pascal,ADA, LISP, Smalltalk, and Prolog) are used to illustrate larger themes.



ContentsEach chapter ends with Exercises.Preface to the Third EditionPreface / Concept Directory / History, Motivation,and Evaluation / Design and ImplementationPrinciples / Implementation / Introduction

1. The Beginning: Pseudo-Code Interpreters

2. Emphasis on Efficiency: Fortran

3. Generality and Hierarchy: Algol-60

4. Syntax and Elegance: Algol-60

5. Return to Simplicity: Pascal

6. Implementation of Block-Structured Languages

7. Modularity and Data Abstraction: ADA

8. Procedures and Concurrency: ADA

9. List Processing: LISP

10. Functional Programming: LISP

11. Implementation of Recursive List-Processors: LISP

12. Object-Oriented Programming: Smalltalk

13. Logic Programming: Prolog

14. Principles of Language Design

Bibliography

Index

Architec ture


ELECTRONICINSTRUMENT DESIGNArchitecting for the Life CycleKIM R. FOWLER, Ixthos, Inc.

Electronic Instrument Design integrates

engineering principles with real applications

from a systems perspective, providing a frame-

work for developing electronic instrumen-

tation, from hand-held devices to consoles of

equipment. It offers practical design solutions,

describes the interactions, trade-offs, and pri-

orities encountered, and uses specific details,

situations, and numerous case studies as

examples. It is an ideal text for design courses

in electrical and industrial engineering.


INTEGRATEDCONVERTERSD to A and A to DArchitectures, Analysis and SimulationPAUL G. A. JESPERS,Université Catholique de Louvain, Belgium

This book surveys recent progress and gives

an account of the working principles of

integrated converters, describing the architec-

tures of integrated converters and their

accuracy and speed. A free CD-ROM provides

a MATLAB toolbox that allows the reader to

experiment with some of the concepts in the

book.

2001 • 280 pp. • 62 illus. • 0-19-856446-5 paper • APS JESPER

NEURAL NETWORKS FORPATTERN RECOGNITIONCHRISTOPHER M. BISHOP,Aston University

This is the first comprehensive treatment of

feed-forward neural networks from the

perspective of statistical pattern recognition.

After introducing the basic concepts, the text

examines techniques for modeling probability

density functions and discusses the properties

and merits of the multi-layer perceptron and

radial basis function network models. Also

covered are various forms of error functions,

principal algorithms for error function mini-

malization, learning and generalization in

neural networks, and Bayesian techniques

and their applications. With more than 100

exercises, this work will benefit anyone

involved in the fields of neural computation

and pattern recognition.

1996 • 504 pp. • 161 illus. • 0-19-853864-2 paper • APS NEUR

Contents1. Statistical Pattern Recognition2. Probability Density Estimation3. Single-Layer Networks4. The Multi-Layer Perceptron5. Radial Basis Functions6. Error Functions7. Parameter Optimization Algorithms8. Pre-processing and Feature Extraction9. Learning and Generalization

10. Bayesian Techniques

AppendixesA. Symmetric MatricesB. Gaussian IntegralsC. Lagrange MultipliersD. Calculus of VariationsE. Principal Components

ReferencesIndex

COMPUTATIONALINTELLIGENCEA Logical ApproachDAVID POOLE, ALAN MACKWORTH,both at University of British Columbia,and RANDY GOEBEL, University of Alberta

Computational Intelligence: A LogicalApproach provides a unique and integrated

introduction to artificial intelligence. It weaves

a unifying theme—an intelligent agent acting

in its environment—through the core issues of

AI, placing them into a coherent framework.

Rather than giving a surface treatment of an

overwhelming number of topics, it covers

fundamental concepts in depth, providing a

foundation on which students can build an

understanding of modern AI. This logical

approach clarifies and integrates represen-

tation and reasoning fundamentals, effectively

leading students from simple to complex

ideas. The authors develop AI representation

schemes and describe their uses for diverse

applications, from autonomous robots to diag-

nostic assistants to infobots that find informa-

tion in rich information sources. The authors’

website offers extensive support for the text,

including source code, interactive Java scripts,

various pedagogical aids, and an interactive

environment for developing and debugging

knowledge bases.

Ideal for upper-level undergraduate and

introductory graduate courses in artificial

intelligence, Computational Intelligence en-

courages students to explore, implement, and

experiment with a series of progressively richer

representations that capture the essential

features of more and more demanding tasks

and environments.

* A website is available:www.cs.ubc.ca/spider/poole/ci.html

1998 • 576 pp. • 101 illus. • 0-19-510270-3 cloth • APS POOCOM

Ar tificial Intelligence



ContentsEach chapter ends with References and Further Reading, and Exercises.

Preface

1. Computational Intelligence and Knowledge

1.1. What is Computational Intelligence?1.2. Agents in the World1.3. Representation and Reasoning1.4. Applications1.5. Overview

2. A Representation and Reasoning System

2.1. Introduction2.2. Representation and Reasoning Systems2.3. Simplifying Assumptions of the Initial RRS2.4. Datalog2.5. Semantics2.6. Questions and Answers2.7. Proofs2.8. Extending the Language with

Function Symbols

3. Using Definite Knowledge

3.1. Introduction3.2. Case Study: House Wiring3.3. Databases and Recursion3.4. Verification and Limitations3.5. Case Study: Representing

Abstract Concepts3.6. Case Study: Representing

Regulatory Knowledge3.7. Applications in Natural Language

Processing

4. Searching

4.1. Why Search?4.2. Graph Searching4.3. A Generic Searching Algorithm4.4. Blind Search Strategies4.5. Heuristic Search4.6. Refinements to Search Strategies4.7. Constraint Satisfaction Problems

5. Representing Knowledge

5.1. Introduction5.2. Defining a Solution5.3. Choosing a Representation Language5.4. Mapping from Problem to Representation5.5. Choosing an Inference Procedure

6. Knowledge Engineering

6.1. Introduction6.2. Knowledge-Based System Architecture6.3. Meta-Interpreters6.4. Querying the User6.5. Explanation6.6. Debugging Knowledge Bases6.7. A Meta-Interpreter with Search6.8. Unification

7. Beyond Definite Knowledge

7.1. Introduction7.2. Equality7.3. Integrity Constraints7.4. Complete Knowledge Assumption7.5. Disjunctive Knowledge7.6. Explicit Quantification7.7. First-Order Predicate Calculus7.8. Modal Logic

8. Actions and Planning

8.1. Introduction8.2. Representations of Actions and Change8.3. Reasoning with World Representations

9. Assumption-Based Reasoning

9.1. Introduction9.2. An Assumption-Based Reasoning

Framework9.3. Default Reasoning9.4. Abduction9.5. Evidential and Causal Reasoning9.6. Algorithms for Assumption-Based

Reasoning

10. Using Uncertain Knowledge

10.1. Introduction10.2. Probability10.3. Independence Assumptions10.4. Making Decisions Under Uncertainty

11. Learning

11.1. Introduction11.2. Learning as Choosing the

Best Representation11.3. Case-Based Reasoning11.4. Learning as Refining the

Hypothesis State11.5. Learning Under Uncertainty11.6. Explanation-Based Learning11.7. References and Further Learning

12. Building Situated Robots

12.1. Introduction12.2. Robotic Systems12.3. The Agent Function12.4. Designing Robots12.5. Uses of Agent Models12.6. Robot Architectures12.7. Implementing a Controller12.8. Robots Modeling the World12.9. Reasoning in Situated Robots

Appendixes

A. GlossaryB. The Prolog Programming LanguageC. Some More Implemented Systems

Bibliography

Index

ELEMENTARY SIGNALDETECTION THEORYTHOMAS D. WICKENS,University of California, Los Angeles

This primer on signal detection theory is

useful for both undergraduate and graduate

courses. Detection theory has been applied to

a host of varied problems (for example,

measuring the accuracy of diagnostic systems,

survey research, reliability of lie detection

tests) and extends far beyond the detection

of signals.

2001 • 288 pp. • 65 illus. • 0-19-509250-3 paper • APS WICKEN

Contents1. The Signal-Detection Model2. The Equal-Variance Gaussian Model3. Operating Characteristics and the

Gaussian Model4. Measures of Detection Performance5. Confidence Ratings6. Forced-Choice Procedures7. Discrimination and Identification8. Finite-State Models9. Likelihoods and Likelihood Ratios

10. Multidimensional Stimuli11. Statistical TreatmentAppendix A: Summary of Probability TheoryReferencesIndex

Ar tificial Intelligence


SWARM INTELLIGENCEFrom Natural to Artificial SystemsERIC BONABEAU, Santa Fe Institute,MARCO DORIGO, Belgian National Fund forScientific Research , and GUY THERAULAZ,Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, France

This book provides a rigorous look at the

mechanisms underlying collective behavior in

social insects. The field is developing rapidly,

and this volume includes up-to-date research

from biology, neuroscience, artificial intel-

ligence, robotics, operations research, and

computer graphics.

1999 • 320 pp. • 139 illus. • APS SWARM0-19-513159-2 paper • 0-19-513158-4 cloth

STATISTICS AND NEURALNETWORKSAdvances at the InterfaceEdited by J. W. KAY and D. M. TITTERINGTON,both of University of Glasgow

Providing coverage on the research develop-

ing at the interface between statistics and

neural networks, this book brings together

contributions by leading workers in the two

fields. It is an authoritative voice on the

current status, applications, and direction

for future research in synergistic science and

will be an invaluable resource for those working

in statistics and neural computing.

2000 • 280 pp. • 79 illus. • 0-19-852422-6 cloth • APS KAYNEU

NEURAL NETWORKS AND INTELLECTUsing Model-Based ConceptsLEONID I. PERLOVSKY,Ascent Capital Management

Neural Networks and Intellect describes a

new mathematical concept of modeling field

theory and its applications to a variety of

problems. Examining the relationships among

mathematics, computations in neural net-

works, signs and symbols in semiotics, and

ideas of mind in psychology and philosophy,

this unique text discusses deep philosophical

questions in detail and relates them to mathe-

matics and the engineering of intelligence. It is

intended for use on the senior undergraduate

and graduate courses in neural networks and

artificial intelligence.

2000 • 496 pp. • 79 illus. • 0-19-511162-1 cloth • APS PERLNE

MODELS OFCOMPUTATION ANDFORMAL LANGUAGESR. GREGORY TAYLOR,New Jersey City University

R. Gregory Taylor presents a comprehensive

and rigorous treatment of the theory of

computability. He takes a novel approach,

focusing on computational models and

features companion software. The book is

designed for advanced undergraduate and

graduate courses in theory of computability

and theory of algorithms.


1997 • 688 pp. • 308 illus. • 0-19-510983-X cloth • APS SCS20

CIRCUITS OF THE MINDLESLIE G. VALIANT, Harvard University

This groundbreaking work details a promising

new computational approach to studying

the intricate workings of the human brain.

Focusing on the brain’s enigmatic ability to

access a massive store of accumulated informa-

tion very quickly during reasoning processes,

it proposes a “neuroidal model” that serves as

a vehicle to explore the brain’s finite number

of neurons, their limited speed of communi-

cation, and their restricted interconnectivity.

2000 • 256 pp. • 23 illus. • 0-19-512668-8 paper • APS VALIAN

Professional Library

mec

han

ical

engi

nee

rin

g T H E O X F O R D S E R I E S O N

Advanced ManufacturingTake a moment to think about the design and construction of an infant’s car seat.

Why are its anchors shaped a certain way and how do they react to constant

vibration? Or, consider peanut butter: how is it made and put into the jar? And

what about the production of the jar itself ? How does work flow through assembly

lines in today’s factories?

Most people count on the knowledge, skills, and testing of the engineers who design

and build such products to make them safe, reliable, and durable. To help today’s

instructors prepare the next generation of engineers to meet future manufacturing

challenges, Oxford University Press is proud to offer THE OXFORD SERIES ON

ADVANCED MANUFACTURING.

These monographs, written by experts in academia and industry from around

the world, have been carefully selected by series editors Milton C. Shaw and

Nam P. Suh—two of the most respected scholars in the field. Each volume covers a

specialized manufacturing process and focuses on its real-world applications and

recent developments. Three books in this fascinating series are focused on the

specific challenges of working with particular materials: Paste Flow and Extrusion by John Benbow and John Bridgwater, and Metal Cutting Principles,Second Edition, and Principles of Abrasive Processing, both by Milton C. Shaw.

How does a product move through a factory, and how can this process be improved?

What is design and how can a manufacturing process be refined so that its parts

fit together, arrive at the factory on time, and are designed in advance to work in a

machine? THE OXFORD SERIES ON ADVANCED MANUFACTURING offers six volumes

that address these issues. Axiomatic Design and Fabrication of CompositeStructures, by Dai Gil Lee and Nam P. Suh, presents new design methodologies

that capture the enormous potential of advanced composites. In The Principles ofDesign, Nam P. Suh presents a systematic approach for thinking through the com-

ponent parts of a design so that each can be optimized during the design stage rather

than at testing. Daniel E. Whitney focuses on understanding every design in terms of


M E C H A N I C A L A N D I N D U S T R I A L E N G I N E E R I N G | 57

■ Benbow and Bridgwater, Paste Flow and Extrusion

■ Burbidge, Period Batch Control

■ Burbidge, Production Flow Analysis for Planning Group Technology

■ Kobayashi, Oh, and Altan, Metal Forming and the Finite-Element Method

■ Lee and Suh, Axiomatic Design and Fabrication of Composite Materials

■ Shaw, Metal Cutting Principles, Second Edition

■ Shaw, Principles of Abrasive Processing

■ Suh, The Principles of Design

■ Whitney, Mechanical Assemblies:Their Design, Manufacture, and Role in Product Development

its component parts and how they are put together in Mechanical Assemblies: TheirDesign, Manufacture, and Role in Product Development. Period Batch Controlby John L. Burbidge covers just-in-time technology; he examines how product needs

to move through a factory and how this movement can be improved in ProductionFlow Analysis for Planning Group Technology. Finally, Kobayashi, Oh, and

Altan apply design principles to the metal portions of mechanical assemblies in their

volume, Metal Forming and the Finite-Element Method.

We would like to hear from you. Please let us know if you have an idea for a book

in this series. Perhaps you are interested in helping us to develop new projects and

revisions of existing textbooks by acting as a reviewer. We are interested in what

you have to say and invite you to contact Danielle Christensen, Engineering Editor,


THE OXFORD SERIES ON ADVANCED MANUFACTURING

SERIES EDITORS: Nam P. Suh, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and

Milton C. Shaw, Professor Emeritus of Engineering at Arizona State University

mec

han

ical

en

gin

eeri

ng T H E M I T - P A P P A L A R D O S E R I E S I N

Mechanical Engineering

What is the essence of engineering?

In 1519, it was present in the five ships that set sail from Sanlúcar de Barrameda,

Spain, to circumnavigate the globe under the leadership of Ferdinand Magellan.

It was there in Kill Devil Hills, outside the village of Kitty Hawk, North Carolina,

when Orville and Wilbur Wright gave us the ability to fly. It was there when NASA’s

engineers designed, built, and operated the vessels that carried us into space,

ushering in a new era of exploration and scientific discovery. And it is here today

in our quest to produce clean, sustainable power from renewable energy sources.

To prepare today’s engineering students to meet the challenges of the world they will

live in, Oxford University Press and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology have

joined forces to create the MIT-PAPPALARDO SERIES IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.

This exclusive and progressive series of textbooks will cover all of the courses in the

MIT mechanical engineering curriculum—a program of study that has consistently

produced the leaders and innovators who have changed the way we live and work.

What is the MIT mechanical engineering curriculum?

It is an integrated program of study that represents a new way of teaching

mechanical engineering—one that provides an ideal context for learning and builds

student confidence, better preparing them to take their place in their chosen industry.

The main characteristic of the program is the integration of several subjects into

one sequence. For example, in one integrated two-term sequence in thermal science,

thermodynamics, heat transfer, and fluid mechanics are taught. In addition to

thermal science, there are three other sequences: design and manufacturing

sequence; dynamics, control, and system sequence; and mechanics and materials.

Professors jointly in charge of the subjects in a particular sequence are developing

new textbooks, which will be added to the series. Each text will consist of a unified

treatment of the subject matter involving web-based materials, a hands-on laboratory

component, and a design component. As the series evolves, advanced course and

elective works will be developed in a similar fashion.



THE MIT-PAPPALARDO SERIES IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

SERIES EDITORS: Nam P. Suh and Rohan Abeyaratne,

both at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology

C U R R E N T B O O K S I N T H E S E R I E S :

AXIOMATIC DESIGNAdvances and Applications

Nam P. Suh, Massachusetts Institute of Technology

2001 • 528 pp. • 226 illus. • 0-19-513466-4 • cloth • APS SUHAXI

Please see page 72 for a full description and table of contents.

NANOSCALE ENERGY TRANSPORT AND CONVERSIONA Parallel Treatment of Electrons, Molecules, Phonons, and Photons

Gang Chen, Massachusetts Institute of Technology

2005 • 576 pp. • 305 illus. • 0-19-515942-X • cloth • APS CHENAN

Please see page 65 for a full description.

COMPLEXITYTheory and Applications

Nam P. Suh, Massachusetts Institute of Technology

2005 • 336 pp. • 125 illus. • 0-19-517876-9 • cloth • APS SUHCOM

Please see page 73 for a full description.

ENERGY AND THE ENVIRONMENTJames A. Fay, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and

Dan S. Golomb, University of Massachusetts, Lowell

2002 • 336 pp. • 116 illus. • 0-19-515092-9 • cloth • APS FAY

Please see page 85 for a full description and table of contents.

The series is supported in part by the

Mr. and Mrs. A. Neil Pappalardo Endowment to further

the writing activities of faculty members at MIT.


MECHANICS OF MATERIALSMADHUKAR VABLE,Michigan Technological University

In this core textbook for the mechanics ofmaterials course, Vable’s distinctive pedagogi-

cal approach translates into exceptional features

that enhance student participation in learning.

It assumes a complementary connection be-

tween intuition, experimental observation, and

mathematical generalization, suggesting that

intuitive development and understanding

need not be at odds with mathematical logic,

rigor, and generalization. This approach also

emphasizes engineering practice without

distracting from the main point of the text.

With strong practical examples and real-life

engineering problems praised by reviewers,

Mechanics of Materials promises to provide

the skills and principles that students need to

organize, integrate, and make sense of the

flood of information emerging in the world of

modern engineering.


* A CD with PowerPoint Overheads is available.(0-19-515838-5)

2002 • 800 pp. • 1256 illus. • 0-19-513337-4 cloth • APS VABLE

Features■ Overview: Each chapter begins with a con-

cise Overview that describes the motivationand major learning objective behind thechapter.

■ Points and Formulas to Remember: Eachchapter ends with a convenient one-pagesynopsis of essential topics.

■ Plans and Comments: Every examplestarts with a Plan for solving the problemand ends with Comments that connect theexample with previous and future conceptsin the text, putting examples firmly intocontext within the field of mechanics.

■ Quick Tests: Quick Tests help studentseffectively diagnose their own understand-ing of text material.

■ Consolidate Your Knowledge: These boxesfollow major topics and prompt students towrite a synopsis of or derive a formula formaterial just covered, encouraging develop-ment of personal reasoning skills.

■ General Information: These intriguingsections connect historical developmentand advanced topics to material in eachchapter.

■ “Stretch Yourself ”: Problems labeled“Stretch Yourself ” contain important refer-ence material that will be useful to studentsas future engineers.

■ Closure: Every chapter closes with helpfullinks to topics in subsequent chapters.

■ Formula Sheets: These useful sheets arefound inside the back cover of the book for easy reference. They list equations ofessential topics but include no explanationsof variables and equations, making them perfect for use during exams.

ContentsEach chapter begins with an Overview, and ends with General Information, a Closure section,and Points and Formulas to Remember.

PrefaceA Note to StudentsA Note to Instructors

1. Stress

1.1. Stress on a Surface1.2. Stress at a Point

2. Strain

2.1. Displacement and Deformation2.2. Lagrangian and Eulerian Strain2.3. Average Strain2.4. Small-Strain Approximation2.5. Strain Components2.6. Strain at a Point

3. Mechanical Properties of Materials

3.1. Material Characterization3.2 Logic in Mechanics of Materials3.3. Isotropy and Homogeneity3.4. Generalized Hooke’s Law for

Isotropic Materials3.5. Plane Stress and Plane Strain3.6. Failure and Factor of Safety3.7. Stress Concentration3.8. Saint-Venant’s Principle3.9. Effect of Temperature3.10. Fatigue3.11. Nonlinear Material Models

4. Axial Members

4.1. Theory4.2. Composite Bars4.3. Structural Analysis4.4. Initial Stress or Strain

4.5. Temperature Effects4.6. Elastic–Perfectly Plastic Axial Members4.7. Stress Approximation4.8. Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels

5. Torsion of Shafts

5.1. Prelude to Theory5.2. Theory5.3. Statically Indeterminate Shafts5.4. Composite Shafts5.5. Elastic–Perfectly Plastic Circular Shafts5.6. Torsion of Thin-Walled Tubes

6. Symmetric Bending of Beams

6.1. Prelude to Theory6.2. Theory6.3. Shear and Moment by Equilibrium6.4. Shear and Moment Diagrams6.5. Beam Design Issues6.6. Shear Stress in Thin Symmetric Beams6.7. Composite Beams6.8. Elastic–Perfectly Plastic Beams

7. Deflection of Symmetric Beams

7.1. Second-Order Boundary-Value Problem7.2. Fourth-Order Boundary-Value Problem7.3. Superposition7.4. Deflection by Discontinuity Functions7.5. Area-Moment Method

8. Stress Transformation

8.1. Prelude to Theory: The Wedge Method8.2. Stress Transformation by Method

of Equations8.3. Stress Transformation by Mohr’s Circle

9. Strain Transformation

9.1. Prelude to Theory9.2. Method of Equations9.3. Mohr’s Circle9.4. Generalized Hooke’s Law in

Principal Coordinates9.5. Strain Gages

10. Design and Failure

10.1. Combined Loading10.2. Analysis and Design of Structures10.3. Stress Intensity Factor10.4. Failure Theories

11. Stability of Columns

11.1. Buckling Phenomena11.2. Euler Buckling11.3. Imperfect Columns

Appendixes:

A. Statics ReviewB. Algorithms for Numerical MethodsC. Charts of Stress Concentration FactorsD. Properties of Selected MaterialsE. Geometric Properties of Structural

Steel MembersF. Solutions to Static Review ExamG. Answers to Quick TestsH. Answers to Problems

Index

Mechanics of Materials


ADVANCED MECHANICSOF MATERIALSROMAN SOLECKI, University of Connecticut,and R. JAY CONANT, Montana State University

Advanced Mechanics of Materials bridges the

gap between elementary mechanics of materials

courses and more rigorous graduate courses in

mechanics of deformable bodies (i.e., continu-

um mechanics, elasticity, plasticity) taken by

graduate students. Covering both traditional

and modern topics, the text is ideal for senior

undergraduate and beginning graduate courses

in advanced strength of materials, advanced

mechanics of materials, or advanced mechanics

of solids. Rather than exclusively emphasizing

either fundamentals or applications, it pro-

vides a balance between the two, teaching

fundamentals while using real-world applica-

tions to solidify student comprehension.

Chapters two through five cover theoretical

and conceptual development and contain

relatively simple examples aimed at enhancing

student understanding. The remaining chapters

apply the theory to specific classes of problems

such as:

■ beam bending, including the effects ofpiezoelectricity

■ plate bending

■ beam and plate vibration and buckling

■ introductory concepts of fracture mechanics

■ finite element analysis

The authors assume that students will have an

understanding of elementary (statics, dynam-

ics, strength of materials) and intermediate

(aircraft structures, machine design) mechanics.


2003 • 784 pp. • 535 illus. • 0-19-514372-8 cloth • APS SOLECK

Features:■ Applications to contemporary practice

■ Use of modern computer tools, includingMathCAD

■ An introduction to modern topics, such aspiezoelectricity, fracture mechanics, and viscoelasticity

ContentsEach chapter ends with References and Problems.

1. Introduction

2. Stress and Equilibrium Equations

2.1. Concept of Stress2.2. Stress Components and Equilibrium

Equations2.3. Principal Stresses and Invariants2.4. Three-Dimensional Mohr’s Circles2.5. Stress Analysis and Symbolic Manipulation

3. Displacement and Strain

3.1. Introduction3.2. Strain-Displacement Equations3.3. Compatibility3.4. Specification of the State of

Strain at a Point3.5. Rotation3.6. Principal Strains3.7. Strain Invariants3.8. Volume Changes and Dilatation3.9. The Strain Deviator3.10. Strain-Displacement Equations

in Polar Coordinates

4. Relationships Between Stress and Strain

4.1. Introduction4.2. Isotropic Materials—A Physical Approach4.3. Two Dimensional Stress-Strain Laws—

Plane Stress and Plane Strain4.4. Restrictions on Elastic Constants for

Isotropic Materials4.5. Anisotropic Materials4.6. Material Symmetries4.7. Materials with a Single Plane of

Elastic Symmetry4.8. Orthotropic Materials4.9. Transversely Isotropic Materials4.10. Isotropic Materials—

A Mathematical Approach4.11. Stress-Strain Relations for Viscoelastic

Materials4.12. Material Behavior beyond the Elastic Limit4.13. Criteria for Yielding4.14. Stress-Strain Relations for Elastic–Perfectly

Plastic Materials4.15. Stress-Strain Relations when the

Temperature Field is Nonuniform4.16. Stress-Strain Relations for

Piezoelectric Materials

5. Energy Concepts

5.1. Fundamental Concepts and Definitions5.2. Work5.3. First Law of Thermodynamics5.4. Second Law of Thermodynamics5.5. Some Simple Applications Involving

the First Law5.6. Strain Energy5.7. Castigliano’s Theorem

5.8. Principle of Virtual Work5.9. Theorem of Minimum Total

Potential Energy5.10. Applications of the Theorem of

Minimum Total Potential Energy5.11. Rayleigh–Ritz Method5.12. Principle of Minimum

Complementary Energy5.13. Betti–Rayleigh Reciprocal Theorem5.14. General Stress-Strain Relationships

for Elastic Materials


6.1. Method of Finite Differences6.2. Method of Iteration6.3. Method of Collocation

7. Numerical Methods II: Finite Elements

7.1. Introduction7.2. Two-dimensional Frames7.3. Overall Approach7.4. Member Force-Displacement

Relationships7.5. Assembling the Pieces7.6. Solving the Problem7.7. Example7.8. Notes Concerning the Structure

Stiffness Matrix7.9. Finite Element Analysis

7.10. Constant Strain Triangle7.11. Element Assembly7.12. Example7.13. Notes on Using Finite Element Programs7.14. Closure

8. Beams

8.1. Bending of Continuous Beams8.2. Unsymmetric Bending of Straight Beams8.3. Curved Beams8.4. Beams on Elastic Foundations8.5. Influence Functions (Green’s Functions)

for Beams8.6. Thermal Effects8.7. Composite Beams8.8. Limit Analysis8.9. Fourier Series and Applications

8.10. Approximate Methods in the Analysis of Beams

8.11. Piezoelectric Beams

9. Elementary Problems in Two-and-Three Dimensional Solid Mechanics

9.1. Problem Formulation—Boundary Conditions

9.2. Compatibility of Elastic Stress Components

9.3. Thick-Walled Cylinders and Circular Disks9.4. Airy’s Stress Function9.5. Torsion9.6. Application of Numerical Methods

to Solution of Two-Dimensional Elastic Problems

10. Plates

10.1. Introduction10.2. Axisymmetric Bending of Circular Plates10.3. Bending of Rectangular Plates10.4. Plates on Elastic Foundations10.5. Strain Energy of an Elastic Plate10.6. Membranes



10.7. Composite Plates10.8. Approximate Methods in the Analysis

of Plates and Membranes

11. Buckling and Vibration

11.1. Buckling and Vibration of Beams and Columns

11.2. Buckling of Rings, Arches, and Thin-Walled Tubes

11.3. Buckling of Thin Rectangular Plates

12. Introduction to Fracture Mechanics

12.1. Introductory Concepts12.2. Linear Cracks in Two-Dimensional Elastic

Solids—Williams’ Solution, Stress Singularity12.3. Stress Intensity Factor12.4. The Crack Driving Force as an Energy Rate12.5. Relation between Γ and the Stress

Intensity Factors12.6. Some Simple Calculations of Stress

Intensity Factors12.7. The J Integral

Appendix A. Matrices

Appendix B. Coordinate Transformations

Index

ENGINEERINGMECHANICS OFCOMPOSITE MATERIALSSecond EditionISAAC M. DANIEL, Northwestern Universityand ORI ISHAI, Technion-Israel Institute of Technology, Haifa

Completely revised and expanded to include

new material based on advances in the field

and the authors’ research, the second edition

of Engineering Mechanics of CompositeMaterials analyzes the behavior and properties

of composite materials—high-stiffness, high-

strength, lightweight components that can be

used in infrastructure, energy production,

aircraft, automobiles, biomedical products,

and a wide array of other applications.

The book begins by discussing materials in

wide use today and continues with a review of

the micromechanics of elastic behavior and

the macromechanical elastic response of a

composite lamina, including transformation

relations for the three-dimensional case. It

goes on to describe the micromechanics of

failure and discuss the failure of a composite

lamina from the macromechanical or phenom-

enological point of view. Basic theories covered

in detail include maximum stress, maximum

strain, phenomenological (interaction) theo-

ries (Tsai-Hill and Tsai-Wu), and mechanistic

theories based on specific single or mixed

failure modes (Hanshin-Rotem).

In addition to classical lamination theory,

the effects of transverse shear and applications

to sandwich plates are discussed. Hygrother-

mal effects, and stress and failure analysis of

laminates are also covered. The latter includes

an in-depth evaluation of the various failure

theories in predicting ultimate failure. The

book closes with an extensive description of

test methods updated to include those for textile

composites and three-dimensional properties.

Engineering Mechanics of CompositeMaterials, Second Edition, is ideal for

advanced undergraduate and introductory

graduate courses in materials science and

mechanical engineering.

October 2005 • 456 pp. • 467 illus.0-19-515097-X • cloth • APS DANM2

*A Solutions Manual is available to adopters.


Features of the Second Edition■ Describes processing methods as they

relate to the quality and behavior of com-posite materials

■ Compares theoretical predictions withexperimental data for the single lamina andmultidirectional laminates including textilecomposites

■ Places the database of widely used materialsinto an appendix for easy reference,expanding it to include more fabric com-posites, high temperature composites, andthree-dimensional properties

■ Contains numerous new problems


2. Basic Concepts, Materials, Processes and Characteristics

3. Elastic Behavior of Composite Lamina:Micromechanics

4. Elastic Behavior of Composite Lamina:Macromechanics

5. Strength of Unidirectional Lamina:Micromechanics

6. Strength of Composite Lamina:Macromechanics

7. Elastic Behavior of Multidirectional Laminates

8. Hygrothermal Effects

9. Stress and Failure Analysis of Multidirectional Laminates

10. Experimental Methods for Characterization and Testing of Composite Materials


Index

PRINCIPLES OF VIBRATIONSecond EditionBENSON H. TONGUE,University of California, Berkeley

In this second edition of Principles ofVibration, Benson H. Tongue takes a refresh-

ingly informal approach to the understanding

and analysis of vibration problems. His

student-friendly style creates a sense of “one-

on-one” communication to which students

respond with enthusiasm, declaring that the

text is enjoyable, informative, and even “good

bedtime reading.” The text material can be

used in a first vibrations course and in

advanced undergraduate/beginning graduate

courses. Some familiarity with linear algebra,

elementary deformable bodies, and beginning

dynamics is assumed. Tongue provides a basic

understanding of the principles of vibrations,

presenting the core ideas and theories that

define the field. Starting with classical material—

single-degree-of-freedom systems—he branches

out into modern topics, emphasizing multiple-

degree-of-freedom systems. Principles ofVibration, Second Edition, is an ideal text for

senior undergraduates and graduate students

in mechanical, civil, and aerospace engineering

departments.

* A Solutions CD is available. (0-19-514247-0)

2001 • 528 pp. • 665 illus. • 0-19-514246-2 cloth • APS TONGUE

ContentsPreface

Acknowledgments

1. Free Vibration of Systems with a Single Degree of Freedom

2. Forced Vibration of Systems with a Single Degree of Freedom

3. Nonsinusoidal Excitations and Impact

4. Vibrations Involving More Than One Degree of Freedom

Mechanics of Materials

NEW TITLEavailable inO C T O B E R 2 0 0 5 !


5. Distributed Systems

6. Approximate Solution Methods

7. Seat-of-the-Pants Engineering

8. Experimental Methods and Real-World Behavior

Appendixes:

A. Four Continuous SystemsB. Lumped Spring ConstantsC. Assorted Material ConstantsD. Elementary Matrix Relations

Bibliography

Selected Readings

Just the Facts

Index

STATISTICAL MECHANICS OF SOLIDSLOUIS A. GIRIFALCO,University of Pennsylvania

This monograph, suitable for use as an ad-

vanced text, presents the statistical mechanics

of solids from the perspective of the material

properties of the solid state. The statistical

mechanics are developed as a tool for under-

standing properties and each chapter includes

useful exercises to illustrate the topics covered.

Coverage includes the theory of the harmonic

crystal, the theory of free electrons in metal

and semiconductors, electron transport, alloy

ordering, surfaces, and polymers.

2000 • 544 pp. • 74 illus. • 0-19-516717-1 paper • APS GIRIFA

CHAOS AND NONLINEAR DYNAMICSAn Introduction for Scientists and Engineers

Second EditionROBERT HILBORN, Amherst College

Chaos and Nonlinear Dynamics uses a step-

by-step introduction to dynamics and geome-

try in state space to facilitate an understanding

of the field. It includes a thorough treatment of

both differential equation models and iterated

map models, a derivation of the famous

Feigenbaum numbers. In addition, it discusses

pattern formation and surveys the controver-

sial questions of quantum chaos.

2001 • 672 pp. • 207 illus. • 0-19-850723-2 paper • APS HILCHA

INTRODUCTION TOTHEORETICAL ANDCOMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICSC. POZRIKIDIS,University of California, San Diego

This book provides a comprehensive and rigorous introduction to the intricate world offluid dynamics. It examines the fundamentalprinciples and differential equations that gov-ern the kinetics and dynamics of laminar flowof incompressible Newtonian fluids, illustratesthe application of numerical methods to thecalculation of a variety of flow variables andsolution of a broad range of problems, and dis-cusses the development of specific computa-tional algorithms. Coverage includes the com-putation of stationary interfacial shapes, thederivation of exact solutions to the equation ofmotion, hydrodynamic stability, flow at lowReynolds numbers, vortex motion, boundary-integral methods for potential and creepingflow, and finite-difference methods. A uniquesynthesis of the theoretical and computationalaspects of the discipline, this text serves as anideal manual and source reference for profes-sionals and researchers in various fields of engineering, including chemical, mechanical,and aerospace engineering, applied mathemat-ics, and computational science.

1996 • 688 pp. • 231 illus. • 0-19-509320-8 cloth • APS POZRIK

Topics in Chemical Engineering:A Series of Textbooks and Monographs

Contents1. Kinematics of a Flow

2. Analysis of Kinematics

3. Stresses, the Equation of Motion,and the Vorticity Transport Equation

4. Hydrostatics

5. Computing Incompressible Flows

6. Flow at Low Reynolds Numbers

7. Irrational Flow

8. Boundary Layers

9. Hydrodynamic Stability

10. Boundary-Integral Methods for Potential Flow

11. Vortex Motion

12. Finite-Difference Methods for the Convection-Diffusion Equation

13. Finite-Difference Methods for Incompressible Newtonian Flow

Appendixes:

A. Index Notation, Differential Operators, and Theorems of Vector Calculus

B. Primer of Numerical Methods

SPECTRAL/HP ELEMENTMETHODS FOR CFDGEORGE Em KARNIADAKIS,Brown University, and

SPENCER J. SHERWIN,Imperial College of Science,Technology and Medicine

Here is an essential reference for anyone interested in the use of spectral/hp elementmethods in fluid dynamics. It provides a com-prehensive introduction to the field togetherwith detailed examples of the methods to the incompressible and compressible Navier-Stokes equations. The authors are at the forefront of developing and expanding the useof these methods.

1999 • 408 pp. • 161 illus. • 0-19-510226-6 paper • APS KARNIA

INTRODUCTION TO CRITICALPHENOMENA IN FLUIDSELDRED H. CHIMOWITZ,University of Rochester

Featuring examples and exercises throughout,Introduction to Critical Phenomena inFluids encompasses the fundamentals of thisrelatively young field, and includes applica-tions in the fields of chemical engineering,analytical chemistry, and environmental reme-diation processing. This book is one of thefirst integrated texts available on critical phe-nomena designed for advanced undergraduateand graduate courses in chemical engineering,thermodynamics, and physical chemistry.

2005 • 384 pp. • 68 illus. • 0-19-511930-4 cloth • APS CHIMO

Topics in Chemical Engineering

ContentsPreface

1. Fundamentals of Thermodynamic Stability

2. Thermodynamic Scaling at the Critical Point

3. The Critical Point in Mixtures

4. The Solution of Non-Volatile Solutes in a Pure Supercritical Fluid Solvent

5. Statistical Mechanics of Dilute Supercritical Mixtures

6. Computer Simulation in Supercritical Fluids

7. Adsorption Phenomena in Supercritical Fluid-Solid Systems

8. Transport Phenomena Near the Critical Point

9. Critical Phenomena in Discrete Systems

10. Non-Classical Approaches

Index

Fluids

NEW!


INTRODUCTION TO FLUID MECHANICSEDWARD J. SHAUGHNESSY, JR.,Duke University, IRA M. KATZ, and JAMES P.SCHAFFER, both at Lafayette College

Introduction to Fluid Mechanics provides a

balanced and uniquely visual treatment of the

tools used in solving modern fluid mechanics

problems. Presenting an image-intensive

approach to fluid dynamics through classic

kinematic concepts, the book demonstrates

the importance of flow visualization in a frame-

work of modern experimental techniques and

flow simulation.

Detailed photographs and diagrams of

fluid motions and phenomena throughout the

text help students to see and understand why

equations change drastically for different types

of flows. Output illustrations from CFD (com-

putational fluid dynamics) programs illustrate

the possibilities of flow behavior, enabling stu-

dents to concentrate on ideas instead of math-

ematics. The book also provides the means to

solve interesting problems early in the course

by presenting case studies at the beginning

of the text. These cases are revisited later to

reinforce empirical rules and help explain

advanced methods of analyzing a flow.

Creating a foundation for further study in

this important and exciting field, Introductionto Fluid Mechanics is ideal for a first course

in fluid mechanics. The book is designed to

accommodate students concentrating in

mechanical engineering as well as those in the

civil, aerospace, and chemical engineering fields.

2004 • 1024 pp. • 1020 illus. • 0-19-515451-7cloth • APS SHAUGH

* An Instructor’s Manual (0-19-517828-0) and CD with PowerPoint® slides (0-19-517827-0) are available to adopters.

Features■ A highly organized 2-color interior and

icons throughout the text aid in navigationand review.

– CD icons direct students to the Multi-Media Fluid Mechanics CD, websites,movies, and books so that they can easilyview further visual demonstrations ofeach topic.

– CFD icons indicate subject matter thatdirectly or indirectly relates to CFD computational methods to familiarizestudents with this powerful tool.

– FE icons note material that is covered inthe Fundamentals of Engineering examto help students prepare.

■ Chapters on differential analysis of flow and on applications of fluid mechanics are self-contained so that instructors can pickand choose which topics to cover.

Student CD Multi-Media Fluid Mechanics by G.M. Homsy et. al.—Included with every copy of the text

Funded by the National Science Foundation

and prepared by an international group of

experts, this CD-ROM allows students to

access experimental demonstrations that are

difficult to reproduce in a laboratory; see

mathematical relationships brought to life in

video footage; and conduct simulations that

demonstrate fluid mechanics phenomena.

* ©2000, 2004 by Stanford University and its licensors,published by Cambridge University Press.

Highlights ■ Includes animations of important principles

and concepts

■ Offers virtual laboratories where studentscan acquire data from images

■ Provides interactive computational exercis-es in which parameters may be varied

■ Contains a range of material on applications

Contents

Each chapter ends with a Summary and Problems.

Preface

I. Fundamentals

PART I. FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS

1. Fundamental Concepts

1.1. Introduction

1.2. Gases, Liquids, and Solids

1.3. Methods of Description

1.4. Dimensions and Unit Systems

1.5. Problem Solving

2. Fluid Properties

2.1. Introduction

2.2. Mass, Weight, and Density

2.3. Pressure

2.4. Temperature and Other Thermal Properties

2.5. The Perfect Gas Law

2.6. Bulk Compressibility Modulus

2.7. Viscosity

2.8. Surface Tension

2.9. Fluid Energy

3. Case Studies in Fluid Mechanics

3.1. Introduction

3.2. Common Dimensionless Groups in Fluid Mechanics

3.3. Case Studies

4. Fluid Forces

4.1. Introduction

4.2. Classification of Fluid Forces

4.3. The Origins of Body and Surface Forces

4.4. Body Forces

4.5. Surface Forces

4.6. Stress in a Fluid

4.7. Force Balance in a Fluid

5. Fluid Statics

5.1. Introduction

5.2. Hydrostatic Stress

5.3. Hydrostatic Equation

5.4. Hydrostatic Pressure Distribution

5.5. Hydrostatic Force

5.6. Hydrostatic Moment

5.7. Resultant Force and Point of Application

5.8. Buoyancy and Archimedes’ Principle

5.9. Equilibrium and Stability of Immersed Bodies

6. The Velocity Field and Fluid Transport

6.1. Introduction

6.2. The Fluid Velocity Field

6.3. Fluid Acceleration

6.4. The Substantial Derivative

6.5. Classification of Flows

6.6. No-Slip, No-Penetration Boundary Conditions

6.7. Fluid Transport

6.8. Average Velocity and Flowrate

7. Control Volume Analysis

7.1. Introduction

7.2. Basic Concepts: System and Control Volume

7.3. System and Control Volume Analysis

7.4. Reynolds Transport Theorem for a System

7.5. Reynolds Transport Theorem for a Control Volume

7.6. Control Volume Analysis

8. Flow of an Inviscid Fluid:The Bernoulli Equation

8.1. Introduction

8.2. Frictionless Flow Along a Streamline

8.3. Bernoulli Equation

8.4. Static, Dynamic, Stagnation, and Total Pressure

8.5. Applications of the Bernoulli Equation

8.6. Relationship to the Energy Equation

9. Dimensional Analysis and Similitude

9.1. Introduction

9.2. Buckingham Pi Theorem

9.3. Repeating Variable Method

Fluids

NEW!


9.4. Similitude and Model Development

9.5. Correlation of Experimental Data

9.6. Application to Case Studies

PART II. DIFFERENTIAL ANALYSIS OF FLOW

10. Elements of Flow Visualization and Flow Structure

10.1. Introduction

10.2. Lagrangian Kinematics

10.3. The Eulerian-Lagrangian Connection

10.4. Material Lines, Surfaces and Volumes

10.5. Pathlines and Streaklines

10.6. Streamlines and Streamtubes

10.7. Motion and Deformation

10.8. Velocity Gradient

10.9. Rate of Rotation

10.10. Rate of Expansion

10.11. Rate of Shear Deformation

11. Governing Equations of Fluid Dynamics

11.1. Introduction

11.2. Continuity Equation

11.3. Momentum Equation

11.4. Constitutive Model for a Newtonian Fluid

11.5. Navier-Stokes Equations

11.6. Euler Equations

11.7. Energy Equation

11.8. Discussion

12. Analysis of Incompressible Flow

12.1. Introduction

12.2. Steady Viscous Flow

12.3. Unsteady Viscous Flow

12.4. Turbulent Flow

12.5. Inviscid Irrotational Flow

PART III. APPLICATIONS

13. Flow in Pipes and Ducts

13.1. Introduction

13.2. Steady, Fully Developed Flow in a Pipe or Duct

13.3. Analysis of Flow in Single Path Pipe and Duct Systems

13.4. Analysis of Flow in Multiple Path Pipe and Duct Systems

13.5. Elements of Pipe and Duct System Design

14. External Flow

14.1. Introduction

14.2. Boundary Layers: Basic Concepts

14.3. Drag: Basic Concepts

14.4. Drag Coefficients

14.5. Lift and Drag of Airfoils

15. Open Channel Flow

15.1. Introduction

15.2. Basic Concepts in Open Channel Flow

15.3. The Importance of the Froude Number

15.4. Energy Conservation in Open Channel Flow

15.5. Flow in a Channel of Uniform Depth

15.6. Flow in a Channel with Gradually Varying Depth

15.7. Flow Under a Sluice Gate

15.8. Flow Over a Weir

Appendixes

Credits

Index

TURBULENCEAn Introduction for Scientists and EngineersP. A. DAVIDSON, Cambridge University

Designed for advanced undergraduate and

graduate courses, this comprehensive text on

turbulence and fluid dynamics bridges the gap

between elementary accounts of turbulence

found in undergraduate texts and more rigor-

ous accounts given in monographs on the sub-

ject. It combines the maximum of physical

insight with the minimum of mathematical

detail and is highly illustrated throughout.

The book is divided into three parts. Part I

consists of a traditional introduction to the

classical aspects of turbulence, the nature of

turbulence, and the equations of fluid mechan-

ics. Part II tackles the problem of homoge-

neous turbulence with a focus on numerical

methods. Part III covers certain special topics

rarely discussed in introductory texts, such as

body forces, buoyancy, Coriolis and Lorentz

forces, and two-dimensional turbulence.

2004 • 678 pp, • 272 illus. • 0-19-852949-X paper • APS DAVTUR

ContentsPreface

PART I: THE CLASSICAL PICTURE OF TURBULENCE

1. The Ubiquitous Nature of Turbulence

2. The Equations of Fluid Mechanics

3. The Origins and Nature of Turbulence

4. Turbulent Shear Flows and Simple Closure Models

5. The Phenomenology of Taylor, Richardson and Kolmogorov

PART II: FREELY DECAYING HOMOGENOUS TURBULENCE

6. Isotropic Turbulence in Real Space

7. The Role of Numerical Simulations

8. Isotropic Turbulence in Spectral Space

PART III: SPECIAL TOPICS

9. The Influence of Rotation, Stratification and Magnetic Fields on Turbulence

10. Two-Dimensional Turbulence

Epilogue

Appendixes

Bibliography

HEAT TRANSFERP.S. GHOSHDASTIDAR,Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur

Ideal for undergraduate courses in mechanical,chemical, metallurgical, and aerospace engi-neering, Heat Transfer provides extensivecoverage of two- and three-dimensional heatconduction, forced and free convection, boil-ing heat transfer, heat exchangers, and com-puter methods. It emphasizes the applicationof fundamental concepts to complex problemsusing easy-to-understand mathematics. Inaddition, the book discusses contemporaryapplications to such widely debated topics assolar radiation and greenhouse effect, andcontains numerous problems and workedexamples throughout. It also includes aStudent CD-ROM that contains programs forall the computer methods detailed in the text.

2004 • 656 pp. • illus. • 0-19-567050-7 paper • APS GHOSHD

ContentsPreface

1. Introduction 2. Steady-State Conduction: One-Dimensional

Problems 3. Steady-State Conduction: Two- and Three-

Dimensional Problems 4. Unsteady-State Conduction 5. Forced Convection Heat Transfer 6. Natural Convection Heat Transfer 7. Boiling and Condensation 8. Radiation Heat Transfer 9. Heat Exchangers

10. Finite-Difference Methods in Heat Conduction 11. Mass TransferAppendixes Answers to Selected Questions References Index

NANOSCALE ENERGYTRANSPORT ANDCONVERSIONA Parallel Treatment of Electrons, Molecules,Phonons, and PhotonsGANG CHEN,Massachusetts Institute of Technology

This volume covers the fundamentals ofmicroscale heat transfer and applications inmicroelectronics, nanotechnology, biotech-nology, and microelectromechanical systems.

2005 • 576 pp. • 305 illus. • 0-19-515942-X cloth • APS CHENAN

MIT-Pappalardo Series in MechanicalEngineering

Heat Transfer

NEW!


INTRODUCTION TOTHERMAL AND FLUIDENGINEERINGALLAN D. KRAUS, University of Akron,(Emeritus), JAMES R. WELTY, Oregon StateUniversity, (Emeritus), and A. AZIZ,Gonzaga University

Introduction to Thermal and Fluid Engin-eering presents an integrated overview of heat

transfer, fluid mechanics, and thermodynamics

specifically designed for engineering students

not specializing in mechanical engineering.

The text shows how all three components

of thermal and fluid sciences—thermodynam-

ics, heat transfer, and fluid mechanics—relate

to each other. It offers intensely practical,

design-oriented examples that relate to elec-

trical, civil, aerospace, computer, and

chemical engineering. Students will learn

about thermal science applications that

pertain to the challenges awaiting them in the

real world, as opposed to studying theory that

is irrelevant to their future careers.

Introduction to Thermal and FluidEngineering is ideal for undergraduate survey

courses and can be used as a professional

reference. It assumes knowledge of basic

physics and mathematics through ordinary

differential equations.

* A Solutions Manual is available to adopters.(0-19-522214-8)

* A Student CD—included inside every copy of the text—offers interactive fluid simulationsoftware.

June 2005 • 784 pp. • 662 illus.0-19-516143-2 • cloth • APS THERML

Features■ Offers integrated coverage of all three

components of the thermal sciences

■ Provides detailed chapter objectives andsummaries to aid in comprehension andreview

■ Includes more than 1350 end-of-chapterproblems

■ Contains numerous illustrated examples

■ Employs SI Units throughout

ContentsAll chapters end with a Summary and Closure andAdditional Readings. Chapters 2 through 25 end with Problems.

Preface

1. The Thermal/Fluid Sciences:Introductory Concepts

1.1. Introduction

1.2. Thermodynamics

1.3. Fluid Mechanics

1.4. Heat Transfer

1.5. Engineered Systems and Products

1.6. Historical Development

2. Thermodynamics: Preliminary Concepts and Definitions

2.1. The Study of Thermodynamics

2.2. Some Definitions

2.3. Dimensions and Units

2.4. Density and Related Properties

2.5. Pressure

2.6. Temperature and the Second Law of Thermodynamics

2.7. Problem Solving Methodology

3. Energy and the First Law of Thermodynamics

3.1. Introduction

3.2. Kinetic and Potential Energy

3.3. Work

3.4. Heat

3.5. The First Law of Thermodynamics

3.6. The Energy Balance for Closed Systems

3.7. The Ideal Gas Model

3.8. Ideal Gas Enthalpy and Specific Heats

3.9. Processes of an Ideal Gas

4. Properties of Pure, Simple Compressible Substances

4.1. The State Postulate

4.2. P-v-T Relationships

4.3. Thermodynamic Property Data

4.4. Real Gas Behavior

4.5. Equations of State

4.6. The Polytropic Process of an Ideal Gas

5. Control Volume Mass and Energy Analysis

5.1. Introduction

5.2. The Control Volume

5.3. Conservation of Mass

5.4. Conservation of Energy for a Control Volume

5.5. Specific Heats of Compressible Substances

5.6. Applications of Control Volume Energy Analysis

6. The Second Law of Thermodynamics

6.1. Introduction

6.2. The Kelvin–Planck Statement and Heat Engines

6.3. The Clausius Statement; Refrigerators and Heat Pumps

6.4. The Equivalence of the Kelvin–Planck and the Clausius Statements

6.5. Reversible and Irreversible Cycles

6.6. The Carnot Cycle

6.7. The Carnot Cycle with External Irreversibilities

6.8. The Absolute Temperature Scales

7. Entropy

7.1. Introduction

7.2. The Classical Definition of Entropy

7.3. The Clausius Inequality

7.4. The Temperature–Entropy Diagram

7.5. The Gibbs Property Relations

7.6. Entropy Change for Solids, Liquids,and Ideal Gases

7.7. The Isentropic Process for an Ideal Gas

7.8. Isentropic Efficiencies of Steady Flow Devices

7.9. The Entropy Balance Equation

8. Gas Power Systems

8.1. Introduction

8.2. The Internal Combustion Engine

8.3. The Air Standard Otto Cycle

8.4. The Air Standard Diesel Cycle

8.5. The Gas Turbine

8.6. The Jet Engine

9. Vapor Power and Refrigeration Cycles

9.1. Introduction

9.2. The Steam Power Plant

9.3. The Rankine Cycle

9.4. The Ideal Rankine Cycle with Superheat

9.5. The Effect of Irreversibilities

9.6. The Ideal Rankine Cycle—Superheat and Reheat

9.7. The Ideal Rankine Cycle with Regeneration

9.8. The Ideal Refrigeration Cycle

9.9. The Ideal Vapor Compression Refrigeration Cycle

9.10. Departures from the Ideal Refrigeration Cycle

10. Mixtures of Gases, Vapors, and Combustion Products

10.1. Introduction

10.2. Mixtures of Ideal Gases

10.3. Psychrometrics

10.4. The Psychrometric Chart

10.5. The Products of Combustion

11. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics

11.1. The Definition of a Fluid

11.2. Fluid Properties/Flow Properties

11.3. The Variation of Properties in a Fluid

Thermal and Fluid Sciences

NEW TITLEavailable inJ U N E 2 0 0 5 !


11.4. The Continuum Concept

11.5. Laminar and Turbulent Flow

11.6. Fluid Stress Conventions and Concepts

11.7. Viscosity, a Fluid Property

11.8. Other Fluid Properties

12. Fluid Statics

12.1. Introduction

12.2. Pressure Variation in a Static Fluid

12.3. Hydrostatic Pressure

12.4. Hydrostatic Forces on Plane Surfaces

12.5. Hydrostatic Forces on Curved Surfaces

12.6. Buoyancy

12.7. Stability

12.8. Uniform Rectilinear Acceleration

13. Control Volume Analysis:Mass and Energy Conservation

13.1. Introduction

13.2. Fundamental Laws

13.3. Conservation of Mass

13.4. Mass Conservation Applications

13.5. The First Law of Thermodynamics

13.6. Applications of the Control Volume Expressionfor the First Law of Thermodynamics

13.7. The Bernoulli Equation

14. Newton’s Second Law of Motion

14.1. Introduction

14.2. Linear Momentum

14.3. Applications of the Control Volume Expression

14.4. The Control Volume Relations for Moment of Momentum

14.5. Applications of the Moment of Momentum Relationship

15. Dimensional Analysis and Similarity

15.1. Introduction

15.2. Fundamental Dimensions

15.3. The Buckingham Pi Theorem

15.4. Dimensional Analysis of Differential Equations

15.5. Dimensional Analysis of Rotating Machines

15.6. Similarity

16. Viscous Flow

16.1. Introduction

16.2. Reynolds’ Experiment

16.3. Fluid Drag

16.4. Boundary Layer Flow Over a Flat Plate

17. Flow in Pipes and Pipe Network

17.1. Introduction

17.2. Frictional Loss in Pipes

17.3. Dimensional Analysis of Pipe Flow

17.4. Fully Developed Flow

17.5. Friction Factors for Fully Developed Flow

17.6. Friction Factor and Head Loss Determination for Pipe Flow

17.7. Multiple Path Systems

18. Fluid Machinery

18.1. Introduction

18.2. The Centrifugal Pump

18.3. The Net Positive Suction Head

18.4. Combining Pump and System Performance

18.5. Scaling Laws for Pumps and Fans

18.6. Axial and Mixed Flow Pumps

18.7. Turbines

19. Steady State Conduction

19.1. Introduction

19.2. The General Equation of Heat Conduction

19.3. Thermal Conductivity

19.4. Conduction in Plane Walls

19.5. Conduction in Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates

19.6. Simple Shapes with Heat Generation

19.7. Extended Surfaces

19.8. Two-Dimensional Conduction

20. Unsteady State Conduction

20.1. Introduction

20.2. The Lumped Capacitance Model

20.3. The Semi-Infinite Solid

20.4. Finite Sized Solids

21. Forced Convection: Internal Flow

21.1. Introduction

21.2. Temperature Distributions with Internal Forced Convection

21.3. Convective Heat Transfer Coefficients

21.4. Applications of Internal Flow Forced Convection Correlations

22. Forced Convection: External Flow

22.1. Introduction

22.2. Flow Parallel to a Plane Wall

22.3. External Flow over Bluff Bodies

23. Free or Natural Convection

23.1. Introduction

23.2. Governing Parameters

23.3. Working Correlations for Natural Convection

23.4. Natural Convection in Parallel Plate Channels

23.5. Natural Convection in Enclosures

24. Heat Exchangers

24.1. Introduction

24.2. Governing Relationships

24.3. Heat Exchanger Design and Analysis Methods

24.4. Finned Heat Exchangers

25. Radiation Heat Transfer

25.1. The Electromagnetic Spectrum

25.2. Monochromatic Emissive Power

25.3. Radiation Properties and Kirchhoff’s Law

25.4. Radiation Intensity and Lambert’s Cosine Law

25.5. Monochromatic Total Emissivityand Absorbtivity

25.6. Heat Flow between Black Bodies

25.7. Heat Flow by Radiation between Two Bodies

25.8. Radiosity and Irradiation

25.9. Radiation Within Enclosures by a Network Method

Index

CLASSICALTHERMODYNAMICSLYNN D. RUSSELL, Boise State University,and GEORGE A. ADEBIYI,Mississippi State University

This text offers an in-depth analysis of the fun-

damentals of thermodynamics. Noting com-

mon student problem areas such as definition

of systems boundary, units, processes, work,

and heat, it presents a systematic approach to

solving thermodynamic problems that is sup-

ported by numerous chapter-end problems

graded in three levels of difficulty. Open-

ended design problems are included in chap-

ters 10–15 to reflect the increasing emphasis

on the need for design in core courses.

Extensive treatment of second law analyses,

including energy analysis/energy availability,

helps students understand real systems.

Explanation of how to maximize energy deliv-

ery from chemical reactions gives students a

solid background in improving the design of

reacting systems.


1993 • 944 pp. • illus. • 0-03-075394-5 paper• APS SME01


2. Thermodynamic Quantities and Units

3. Properties of a Pure Substance

4. Ideal Gas and Real Gas

5. Processes, Work, and Heat

6. The First Law of Thermodynamics

7. The Second Law of Thermodynamics

8. Entropy

9. Thermodynamic Availability

10. Thermodynamics of Heat Engine Cycles

11. Refrigeration Cycles

12. Thermodynamic Property Relationships

13. Nonreactive Ideal Gas Mixtures

14. Combustion

15. Chemical Equilibrium

Appendixes:

A. Property Tables and Constants in SI Units

B. Property Tables and Constants in USCS Units

C. Generalized Charts and Psychrometric Charts

D. Computer Codes for the Thermodynamic Properties of Common Substances Encountered in Engineering Applications


Index

Thermodynamics


MECHANICS OF MACHINESW. L. CLEGHORN, University of Toronto

Mechanics of Machines is designed for

undergraduate courses in the kinematics and

dynamics of machines. It covers the basic

concepts of gears, gear trains, the mechanics of

rigid bodies, and graphical and analytical

kinematic analyses of planar mechanisms. In

addition, the text describes a procedure for

designing disc cam mechanisms, discusses

graphical and analytical force analyses and bal-

ancing of planar mechanisms, and illustrates

common methods for the synthesis of mecha-

nisms. Each chapter concludes with a selec-

tion of problems of varying length and

difficulty. SI Units and US Customary Units

are employed. An appendix presents twenty-

six design projects based on practical, real-

world engineering situations. These may be

ideally solved using Working Model software.

A CD-ROM, included in every copy of

this book, contains virtual moving models of a

wide range of machines, including engines,

meshing gears, cam mechanisms, intermittent

motion mechanisms, pumps, shaft couplings,

locks, braking systems, threaded connections,

and a synchronizer. Most of these models are

three-dimensional and allow the user to high-

light a component or process of interest as well

as alter both the point-of-view and zoom

during the simulated motion. In addition,

icons in the book’s margins enable the reader

to readily identify the corresponding files on

the CD-ROM.

* A Solutions Manual (0-19-522212-1) and a CD-ROM with PowerPoint® Overheads (0-19-522226-1) are available to adopters.

February 2005 • 575 pp. • 54 illus.0-19-515452-5 • cloth • APS CLEGHO

Student CD Included with Ever y Copy of the Book■ Offers more than 140 files of interactive vir-

tual models and video clips of a diverseassortment of machines and mechanisms

■ Includes the Windows-based computerprogram, Cam Design, that allows users todesign, animate, and evaluate disc cammechanisms

■ Provides files of scaled diagrams of mecha-nisms, for solving problems using graphicalanalyses involving velocity, acceleration,and force

ContentsEach chapter ends with Problems.

Preface

1. Introduction

1.1. Preliminary Remarks

1.2. Commonly Employed Mechanisms

1.3. Planar and Spatial Mechanisms

1.4. Kinematic Chains and Kinematic Pairs

1.5. Mechanism Mobility

1.6. Mechanism Inversion

1.7. Types of Four-Bar and Slider Crank Mechanisms

1.8. Cognates of a Mechanism

2. Mechanics of Rigid Bodies

2.1. Introduction

2.2. Relative Velocity Between Two Points Undergoing Planar Motion

2.3. Special Cases of Relative Velocity Expression

2.4. Relative Acceleration Between Two Points Undergoing Planar Motion

2.5. Special Cases on the Relative Acceleration Equation

2.6. Limit Positions and Time Ratio of Mechanisms

2.7. Transmission Angle

2.8. Instantaneous Center of Velocity

2.9. Kennedy’s Theorem

2.10. Kinetics

2.11. Systems of Units

2.12. Equations of Equilibrium

3. Graphical Kinematic Analysisof Planar Mechanisms

3.1. Introduction

3.2. Velocity Analysis

3.3. Velocity Polygon Analysis

3.4. Velocity Image

3.5. Acceleration Polygon Analysis

3.6. Acceleration Image

4. Analytical Kinematic Analysis of Planar Mechanisms

4.1. Introduction

4.2. Loop Closure Equation

4.3. Complex Vector Analysis of a Planar One-Loop Mechanism

4.4. Complex Vector Analysis of a Planar Mechanism with Multiple Loops

5. Gears

5.1. Introduction

5.2. Friction Gearing

5.3. Common Types of Toothed Gears

5.4. Fundamental Law of Toothed Gearing

5.5. Involute Tooth Gearing

5.6. Cycloidal Tooth Gearing

5.7. Sizing of Involute Gear Teeth

5.8. Backlash and Antibacklash Gears

5.9. Geometric Considerations in the Design of Reverted Gear Trains

5.10. Contact Ratio

5.11. Manufacturing of Gears

5.12. Interference and Undercutting of Gear Teeth

6. Gear Trains

6.1. Introduction

6.2. Ordinary Gear Trains

6.3. Planetary Gear Trains

6.4. Tabular Analysis of Planetary Gear Trains

6.5. Kinematic Analysis of Multiple-Stage Gear Trains

6.6. Differentials

6.7. Harmonic Drives

6.8. Torque Relations in Gearboxes

7. Cams

7.1. Introduction

7.2. Disc Cam Mechanism Nomenclature

7.3. Pressure Angle

7.4. The Displacement Paradigm

7.5. Types of Follower Motions

7.6. Comparison of Follower Motions

7.7. Determination of Disc Cam Profile

7.8. Undercutting a Disc Cam Profile

7.9. Positive-Motion Cams

7.10. Program Cam Design

7.11. Manufacturing of Cams

8. Graphical Force Analysis of Planar Mechanisms

8.1. Introduction

8.2. Two-Force Member

8.3. Three-Force Member

8.4. Force Transmission in Frictionless Kinematic Pairs

Machines

NEW TITLEavailable inJ U N E 2 0 0 5 !


8.5. Force Polygons

8.6. Static Force Analysis Using Force Polygon Method

8.7. Principle of Superposition

8.8. Graphical Dynamic Force Analysis of a Mechanism Link-Inertia Circle

8.9 Dynamic Force Analysis Using Force Polygon Method

9. Analytical Force Analysis and Balancing of Planar Mechanisms

9.1. Introduction

9.2. Force Analysis of a Four-Bar Mechanism

9.3. Force Analysis of a Slider Crank Mechanism

9.4. Unbalance and Balancing

9.5. Force Balancing of a Four-Bar Mechanism

9.6. Force Balancing of a Slider Crank Mechanism

10. Flywheels

10.1. Introduction

10.2. Mathematical Formulation

10.3. Balanced Systems

11. Synthesis of Mechanisms

11.1. Introduction

11.2. Classification of Synthesis Problems

11.3. Analytical Design of a Four-Bar Mechanism as a Function Generator

11.4. Analytical Design of a Slider Crank Mechanism as a Function Generator

11.5. Graphical Design of Mechanisms for Two-Position Rigid-Body Guidance

11.6. Graphical Design of a Four-Bar Mechanism for Three-Position Rigid-Body Guidance

11.7. Analytical Design of a Four-Bar Mechanism for Three-Position Rigid-Body Guidance

Appendixes

A. Design Projects Using Working Model 2D

B. Commonly Employed Mechanisms and Machines

C. Scalars and Vectors

D. Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics

E. Index of CD-Rom

Trigonometric Identities


References

Index

THEORY OF MACHINESAND MECHANISMSThird EditionJOHN J. UICKER, University of Wisconsin,GORDON R. PENNOCK, Purdue University,and the late JOSEPH E. SHIGLEY,University of Michigan

Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, Third

Edition, provides the foundation for the study

of displacements, velocities, accelerations, and

static and dynamic forces required for the

proper design of mechanical linkages, cams,

and geared systems. The authors present the

background, notation, and nomenclature

essential for students to understand the various

and independent technical approaches that

exist in the field of mechanisms, kinematics,

and machine dynamics. Coverage of all

analysis and development methods is pro-

vided, with balanced use of both analytic

and graphic tools. This text is ideal for senior

or graduate mechanical engineering students

taking a course on kinematics and/or dynamics

of machines.


* PowerPoint Overheads are available.(0-19-516955-7)

2003 • 752 pp. • 950 illus. • 0-19-515598-X cloth • APS TMM3

Features■ Includes an introduction to kinematic coef-

ficients, which clearly separates kinematic(geometric) effects from operating speedand other dynamic dependencies, and uni-fies the coverage of linkages with that forcams and geared systems

■ Contains entirely new chapters on theanalysis and design of flywheels, governors,and gyroscopes

■ Provides both graphical and analytical solutions to exercises, with graphics nowperformed by professional CAD softwarehaving accuracy of better than one percent

■ Offers new, quality illustrations, now in twocolors

ContentsAll chapters end with Problems.

Preface

PART 1.KINEMATICS AND MECHANISMS

1. The World of Mechanisms

2. Position and Displacement

3. Velocity

4. Acceleration

PART 2.DESIGN OF MECHANISMS

5. Cam Design

6. Spur Gears

7. Helical Gears

8. Bevel Gears

9. Worms and Worm Gears

10. Mechanism Trains

11. Synthesis of Linkages

12. Spatial Mechanisms

13. Robotics

PART 3. DYNAMICS OF MACHINES

14. Static Force Analysis

15. Dynamic Force Analysis (Planar)

16. Dynamic Force Analysis (Spatial)

17. Vibration Analysis

18. Dynamics of Reciprocating Engines

19. Balancing

20. Cam Dynamics

21. Flywheels

22. Governors

23. Gyroscopes

APPENDIXES

Appendix A: Tables

Table 1. Standard SI PrefixesTable 2. Conversion from U.S. Customary

Units to SI UnitsTable 3. Conversion from SI Units to U.S.

Customary UnitsTable 4. Properties of AreasTable 5. Mass Moments of InertiaTable 6. Involute Function

Appendix B:



METAL CUTTINGPRINCIPLESSecond Edition

MILTON C. SHAW, Emeritus,Arizona State University

Thoroughly revised and updated in this secondedition, Metal Cutting Principles identifiesthe major problem areas of metal cutting duringthe production of mechanical components. Itpresents the latest findings on the relation-ships between metal cutting and fundamentalphysics, chemistry, the behavior of materials,and the engineering sciences of heat transfer,solid mechanics, and surface science (tribology).

An analysis of the basic two-dimensionalcutting process is followed by a considerationof three-dimensional examples, with specialattention given to cutting temperatures, toolwear, tool life, and the integrity of the finishedsurface. Machining economics and processoptimization are also discussed. In addition,the text includes a chapter on applications that take advantage of the unusual physicaland chemical conditions that occur duringcutting. Metal Cutting Principles, SecondEdition, is ideal for graduate courses in metalcutting or as a professional reference.

2004 • 768 pp. • 1110 illus. • 0-19-514206-3cloth • APS METAL2

The Oxford Series on Advanced Manufacturing

Features■ Includes five new chapters

• Modeling of Chip Formation (Chapter 20)

• Wavy Chip Formation (Chapter 21)

• Sawtooth Chip Formation (Chapter 22)

• Precision Engineering (Chapter 23)

• Unusual Applications of the Metal Cutting Process (Chapter 24)

■ Discusses mathematical modeling and pro-vides simplified models that cover thermal,material, and surface considerations duringvarious aspects of the cutting process

ContentsPreface to the Second Edition

Preface to the First Edition

Symbols1. Introduction

2. Typical Cutting Operations

3. Mechanics of Orthogonal Steady State Cutting

4. Elastic Behavior

5. Plastic Behavior

6. Fracture

7. Dynamometry

8. Shear Strain in Steady State Cutting

9. Shear Stress in Cutting

10. Friction

11. Wear and Tool Life

12. Cutting Temperatures

13. Cutting Fluids

14. Tool Materials

15. Work Material Considerations

16. Complex Tools

17. Surface Integrity

18. Chip Control

19. Optimization

20. Modeling of Chip Formation

21. Wavy Chip Formation

22. Sawtooth Chip Formation

23. Precision Engineering

24. Unusual Applications of the Metal Cutting Process

Index

ELECTRICAL PROPERTIESOF MATERIALSSeventh EditionLASZLO SOLYMAR and DONALD WALSH,both of Oxford University

The seventh edition of this classic text

illustrates the fundamentals of the electrical

properties of materials in the context of con-

temporary engineering applications. Written

in an informal, accessible style, it emphasizes

the core ideas relevant to understanding the

subject and deliberately keeps the mathemati-

cal treatment simple. The book examines the

simplest model that can display the essential

properties of a phenomenon, showing the

difference between ideal and actual behavior.

Topics are selected so that the operation of

devices having applications in engineering can

be explained. Problems and worked examples

are included throughout. Ideal for upper-level

undergraduate courses in electrical engineer-

ing, Electrical Properties of Materials, 7/e,can also be used in applied physics and mate-

rials science courses.

* A Solutions Manual and illustrations from thetext are available for download at: www.oup.com/uk/booksites/content/0199267936/

2004 • 432 pp. • 250 illus. • 0-19-926793-6paper • APS SOLY7E

Contents1. The Electron as a Particle

2. The Electron as a Wave

3. The Electron

4. The Hydrogen Atom and the Periodic Table

5. Bonds

6. The Free Electron Theory of Metals

7. The Band Theory of Solids

8. Semiconductors

9. Principles of Semiconductor Devices

10. Dielectric Materials


12. Lasers

13. Optoelectronics

14. Superconductivity

MATERIALS SCIENCE FOR ELECTRICAL ANDELECTRONIC ENGINEERSIAN P. JONES, University of Birmingham

This is a book for electrical and electronic

engineers, not for materials scientists. Every

explanation is rendered in its simplest and

clearest form and as many relevant examples

are included as possible. The author makes

clear the direct relevance of every topic to the

reader’s main course of study: electrical and

electronic engineering.

The central theme is that the type of

bonding in a solid not only controls its

electrical properties but also, and just as

directly, its mechanical properties and how

things are made from it. This common origin

of electrical and mechanical properties dictates

the structure of the book.

2001 • 360 pp. • 220 illus. • 0-19-856294-2 paper • APS JONESI

Contents1. Conductors, Insulators, and Semiconductors

2. An Introduction to Metals

3. Mechanical Properties

4. Manufacturing Conductors

5. Steel

6. Electrochemistry: Electroplating and Corrosion

7. Ceramics

8. Plastics

9. Semiconductors and the Electronics Industry


11. Superconductors and Optical Fibers

Materials Science


ENGINEERINGTRIBOLOGYJ. A. WILLIAMS, University of Cambridge

Successful tribological solutions to real design

problems—in areas as diverse as plain journal

bearings, rolling-element bearings, heavily

loaded gear teeth, and cams and followers—

require skills from a wide range of disciplines,

such as mechanical engineering, surface and

lubricant chemistry, materials science, and

physics. This book provides an interdisciplinary

understanding of the principles underlying a

subject’s engineering aspects while indicating

important material constraints. Topics include

qualitative and quantitative descriptions of

engineering surfaces; the development of both

elastic and plastic stresses when such surfaces

are brought into contact; the underlying

mechanisms of friction, surface distress, and

wear; the generation of thick pressurized fluid

films in both hydrostatic and hydrodynamic

bearings; the important features of elasto-

hydrodynamic lubrication; mechanisms of

boundary lubrication; the design of dry and

marginally lubricated bearings; and the prin-

ciples underpinning the design and operation

of rolling contacts and bearings.

1995 • 512 pp. • 223 illus. • 0-19-856503-8 paper • APS WILENG

ContentsNomenclature

1. Introduction

2. Engineering Surfaces

3. Contact between Surfaces

4. The Friction of Solids

5. Wear and Surface Damage

6. Hydrostatic Bearings

7. Hydrodynamic Bearings

8. Gas Bearings, Non-Newtonian Lubricants,and Elasto-Hydrodynamic Lubrication

9. Boundary Lubrication and Friction

10. Dry and Marginally Lubricated Contacts

11. Rolling Contacts and Rolling Element Bearings

Appendixes

Index

MECHANICALASSEMBLIESTheir Design, Manufacture,and Role in ProductDevelopmentDANIEL E. WHITNEY,Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Assembly is the process by which parts

become products that do useful things. It is

therefore fundamental to the work of every

mechanical engineer. Yet the design of assem-

blies and the process of assembling them are

rarely taught in universities. In MechanicalAssemblies: Their Design, Manufacture, andRole in Product Development, author Daniel

E. Whitney draws on more than thirty years of

academic and industry experience to fill this

significant gap in the mechanical engineering

curriculum.

The first book to develop a systematic

approach to the modeling and design of

assemblies, this text addresses the subject on

two levels. Assembly in the Small develops a

systematic theory for the design of assemblies

with their functions in mind, starting from

the basic principles of mechanical constraint

and including methods for representing

assemblies mathematically. In addition, impor-

tant assembly analysis techniques such as pre-

dicting variation and generating assembly

sequences are covered using a consistent

mathematical formulation. Assembly in the

Large deals with the role of assemblies in

product development, including product

architecture, design for assembly, and manu-

facturing strategy, as well as design and evalu-

ation of assembly processes and systems.

Mechanical Assemblies: Their Design,Manufacture, and Role in Product Develop-ment is ideal for advanced undergraduate or

graduate courses in assembly design, produc-

tion, or manufacturing systems. Engineering

professionals will find a new way to view

the relationship between design and manu-

facturing and theoretical support for their

experience.

* A CD packaged with each copy of the textcontains appendixes to the book and softwarethat accompanies the exercises and examplesin the text.

* PowerPoint Slides for instructors and self-learners are available for download.


2004 • 688 pp. • 987 illus. • 0-19-515782-6cloth • APS WHITNE


Features■ Places the design of assemblies in the con-

text of product architecture and industrydemand for numerous product models andversions with short delivery times

■ Describes methods of designing assemblyworkstations and systems

■ Includes numerous examples from the automobile, aircraft, and consumer productindustries

■ Provides several computer programs thatillustrate principles in the book

■ Utilizes many MATLAB routines that perform typical calculations related to thedesign of assemblies or assembly systems

ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary, Problems,Thought Questions, and Further Reading.

Most chapters include Appendixes.

Preface

1. What is Assembly and Why is it Important?

2. Assembly Requirements and Key Characteristics

3. Mathematical and Feature Models of Assemblies

4. Constraint in Assembly

5. Dimensioning and Tolerancing Parts and Assemblies

6. Modeling and Managing Variation Buildup in Assemblies

7. Assembly Sequence Analysis

8. The Datum Flow Chain

9. Assembly Gross and Fine Motions

10. Assembly of Compliantly Supported Rigid Parts

11. Assembly of Compliant Parts

12. Assembly in the Large: The Impact of Assembly on Product Development

13. How To Analyze Existing Products in Detail

14. Product Architecture

15. Design for Assembly and Other ”ilities“

16. Assembly System Design

17. Assembly Workstation Design Issues

18. Economic Analysis of Assembly Systems

Index

Design


AXIOMATIC DESIGNAdvances and ApplicationsNAM P. SUH,Massachusetts Institute of Technology

This text presents a fresh perspective on design

and establishes a rational framework for the

discipline. The first three chapters cover the

fundamental principles of axiomatic design. The

following chapters offer a complete treatment

of the design of systems, software, materials

and materials processing, manufacturing

systems, and product design. Suh shows how

a scientific and systematic approach to design

improves efficiency, productivity, savings,

reliability, and quality for industries that

currently rely on ad hoc design systems. Ideal

for senior and graduate design and mechanical

engineering students as well as professional

engineers, this unique text offers the tools

necessary to design with ease and elegance and

serves as a stepping-stone in the ever-evolving

intellectual science of design.

* A Solutions CD is available. (0-19-516153-X)

2001 • 528 pp. • 226 illus. • 0-19-513466-4 cloth • APS SUHAXI

MIT-Pappalardo Series in Mechanical Engineering

ContentsAll chapters end with a Summary,References, and Homework.

Preface

Acknowledgments

On the CIRP Design Book Series

1. Introduction to Axiomatic Design

2. One-FR Design, the Information Axiom,and Robust Design

3. Multi-FR Design

4. Design of Systems

5. Axiomatic Design of Software

6. Axiomatic Design of Manufacturing Systems

7. Axiomatic Design of Materials and Materials-Processing Techniques

8. Product Design

9. A Theory of Complexity: The Design Axioms,Information, Complexity, and Periodicity

Index

THE PRINCIPLES OF DESIGNNAM P. SUH,Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Here is a basic introduction to the principles

of industrial design and their application in all

phases of planning and production. The book

presents basic principles and constitutes an

exposition of these fundamental axioms and

their application. The emphasis is on identi-

fying problems in a clear, scientific manner,

so that the correct solution may be reached

regardless of the mathematical treatment

involved. In particular, the importance of con-

ceptualizing design approaches—a uniquely

human, intellectual skill—is highlighted, since

too often educators and engineers try to limit

this process to computer techniques. Case

studies are extensively presented to illustrate

the significance as well as the use of the axioms

in solving real problems. The work is based on

extensive experience at M.I.T’s Laboratory

for Manufacturing and Productivity, where

axiomatics is a major program.

1990 • 418 pp.; • 144 illus. • 0-19-504345-6 cloth • APS SUH



2. Design and Design Process

3. Design Axioms and Corollaries

4. The Independence Axiom and its Implications

5. The Information Axiom and its Implications

6. Case Studies: Design of Manufacturing Process and Intelligent Machines

7. Case Studies: Design Products

8. Case Studies Involving Information Content

9. Case Study: Design of an Organization

10. Mathematical Representation of the Design Axioms and Computerized Axiomatic System

DISCUSSION OF THE METHODConducting the Engineer’sApproach to Problem SolvingBILLY VAUGHN KOEN,University of Texas, Austin

For information about this title, please see the

full listing on page 13.

2003 • 276 pp. • 51 illus. • 0-19-515599-8 paper • APS KOEN

AXIOMATIC DESIGN AND FABRICATION OF COMPOSITESTRUCTURESApplications in Robots,Machine Tools, andAutomobilesDAI GIL LEE, Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technology, andNAM P. SUH, Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Designed to teach students and practicing

engineers how to streamline and improve the

design process for parts and machines made

out of composite materials, this book is organi-

zed into three parts. Part I provides founda-

tional material, Part II progresses to advanced

topics in composite mechanics, and Part III

covers axiomatic design and fabrication.

2005 • 600 pp. • 420 illus. • 0-19-517877-7cloth • APS DAIGI

Oxford Series on Advanced Manufacturing

Design

NEW!


COMPLEXITYTheory and ApplicationsNAM P. SUH,Massachusetts Institute of Technology

This book focuses Suh’s axiomatic design

theories on methods to understand and deal

with complexity. This multidisciplinary explo-

ration eliminates much of the confusion and

allows engineers to accommodate complexity

within simple, elegant design solutions.

2005 • 336 pp. • 125 illus. • 0-19-517876-9 cloth • APS SUHCOM



2. Introduction to Axiomatic Principles

3. Complexity Theory Based on Axiomatic Design

4. Reduction of Time-Independent Complexity

5. Reduction of Time-Independent Complexity through the Use of Functional Periodicity

6. Reduction of Complexity in Manufacturing Systems

7. Reduction of Complexity by Means of Geometric Functional Periodicity

8. Reduction of Complexity in Materials through Functional Periodicity

9. Complexity of Biological Systems

10. Complexity of Socio-Political-Economic Issues

FUNDAMENTALS OF SPACE SYSTEMSSecond EditionEdited by VINCENT L. PISACANE,United States Naval Academy

Fundamentals of Space Systems is designed

for use in an advanced undergraduate or

beginning graduate course in space systems

engineering or space system design. The

authors of the individual chapters are practicing

engineers and instructors who have extensive

experience in developing sophisticated exper-

imental and operational spacecraft systems. It

includes a chapter on each of the relevant

major disciplines and subsystems of the field

as well as the initial conceptual design of a

typical small spacecraft mission.

2005 • 688 pp. • 355 illus. • 0-19-516205-6 cloth • APS SACANE

ContentsPreface

1. Space Systems Engineering

2. Space Environment

3. Astrodynamics

4. Propulsion and Flight Mechanics

5. Attitude Determination and Control

6. Power Systems, Thermal Control

7. Configuration Management and Structures

8. Communications

9. Command and Telemetry

10. Data Processing

11. Embedded Flight Software

12. Survivability and Reliability

13. Integration and Test

14. Mission Operations

Index

Aerospace

NEW! NEW!


bio

med

ical

an

d

chem

ical

en

gin

eeri

ng T H E O X F O R D U N I V E R S I T Y P R E S S S E R I E S I N

Biomedical/Bioengineering

Recent dramatic advances in modern biology—including the advent of stem-cell

research and the human genome project—have revolutionized the life sciences.

The vast amount of information generated requires systematic analysis and synthesis

by engineering approaches.

At the same time, there have also been rapid progresses in engineering relevant

to biology and medicine, e.g. microelectro-mechanical systems, electro-optics,

information sciences, nanotechnology, microarrays, imaging, and smart materials.

These novel engineering techniques and concepts have allowed the probing of

biological structure and function with unprecedented accuracy, resolution, and

speed while advances in the life sciences have provided strong impetus for new

engineering design and challenges. The interdisciplinary field of bioengineering has

the challenge and opportunity to cross-fertilize the rapidly evolving developments

in engineering and medical sciences to enhance our knowledge of health and our

capability to diagnose, treat, and prevent diseases.

To fulfill this historic responsibility, educational materials must be systematically

developed to cover the broad range of bioengineering for the teaching of students

and for the continuing education of scientists, engineers, and physicians working

in the field. This new series is intended to assume this challenge by publishing

quality titles for all relevant undergraduate and graduate courses in bioengineering/

biomedical engineering.

We welcome the opportunity to review any proposals for appropriate textbook

projects. Please contact Carrie Pedersen, Editor, at (212) 726-6083 or

[email protected] for additional information.

THE OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS SERIES IN

BIOMEDICAL/BIOENGINEERING

SERIES EDITOR: Dr. Shu Chien, University of California at San Diego

M A N U S C R I P T S C U R R E N T LY I N D E V E LO P M E N T:

■ Foundations of Biomedical UltrasoundRichard Cobbold, University of Toronto


B I O M E D I C A L A N D C H E M I C A L E N G I N E E R I N G | 75

Bioengineering/Biomedic al

CLONING, GENEEXPRESSION, ANDPROTEIN PURIFICATIONExperimental Procedures and Process RationaleCHARLES HARDIN, JENNIFER PINCZES,ANDREW RIELL, DAVID PRESUTTI, WILLIAMMILLER, and DOMINIQUE ROBERTSON,all at North Carolina State University

On the forefront of modern scientific innova-tion, Cloning, Gene Expression, and ProteinPurification: Experimental Procedures andProcess Rationale effectively doubles as a laboratory manual for students and a referencebook for professional researchers. Designedfor advanced undergraduate and beginninggraduate students in molecular biology, thisunique combination lecture/laboratory re-source presents detailed protocols for themulti-step process involved in isolating a gene,cloning and characterizing it, expressing itsencoded protein, and purifying and character-izing the protein’s basic physical properties.

This volume includes both theoreticalbackground and practical procedures and isstructured around twenty experiments thatdemonstrate how to prepare, manipulate, andanalyze plasmids, produce fusion proteins inbacteria, and purify these proteins based onunique chemical properties or substrate affini-ties. The book describes advanced topics suchas the use of antibodies and the techniquesdeveloped to transform their structures, aswell as combinatorial approaches designed to manipulate the structure and functions of proteins and nucleic acids. Supplemental literature provides a variety of theoreticalexplanations encouraging a more intuitive understanding of the experimental mechanismsand behaviors of the chemical participants,while also giving students the tools needed tobecome “capable proactive researchers.”

2001 • 448 pp. • 126 illus. • 0-19-513294-7 paper • APS CLONI

Features■ Emphasizes electrophoresis, Southern

and Western blotting, and combinatorialtechniques

■ Defines clear reaction mechanisms; stipulatesthe functions of reagents; and helps stu-dents think about the precise consequencesof solution and procedural manipulations

■ Discusses flourophores, and solvent effectson protein structure

■ Characterizes plasmids, cDNAs, and anti-body probes (available from ATCC) inresearch literature

■ Includes carefully selected primary sourceresearch literature and articles from currentvendor literature

■ Contains a glossary of unfamiliar phrasesand jargon; important summary statementsand conclusions are italicized

■ Provides an alphabetized list of commonreagents for rapid reference

■ Offers extensive index of concepts and terms

■ Categorizes helpful and distinctive infor-mation into five types of supplemental literature: Innovation/Insight, Theory/Principle, Process Rationale, VendorLiterature, and Alternative Approaches

Contents

Preface

Introductory Unit

Introductory Lecture: Introduction to theBiochemical Laboratory

Introductory Lab 1: Basic Biochemical Techniques I:Pipet Calibration and Solution Preparation

Introductory Lab 2: Basic Techniques II:Absorbance Spectroscopy and ProteinConcentration Determinations

PART I: NUCLEIC ACIDS & CLONING

Unit 1Lecture 1: DNA Isolation

Lab 1.1: Media Preparation; Bacterial Growths;Plasmid Minipreps; HindIII Digestion of DNA,Commercial Bacteriophage λ DNA BstEII DigestSize Standards

Lab 1.2: Agarose Gel Electrophoresis; Photographyof HindIII Plasmid Digests Visualized byFluorescence of Intercalated Ethidium

Unit 2 Lecture 2: Construction of Recombinant Plasmids

Lab 2.1: Extraction and Cleanup of DNA Bands Cut from Agarose Gels, Quantitation of Yields,and Ligation of myo-3 HindIII DNA Insert Fragment into Linearized ß-gal Plasmid DNA

Unit 3Lecture 3: The Polymerase Chain Reaction

Lab 3.1: Polymerase Chain Reaction Test for myo-3 Gene Insert Orientation

Unit 4Lecture 4: Transcription of Genomic DNA andAnalysis of the Resulting mRNAs

Unit 5Lecture 5: Transformation and Gene Expression

Lab 5.1: Preparation of Fresh Transformation -Competent Cells

Lab 5.2: Colony Immunoblotting to Screen for Transformants

Unit 6Lecture 6: Analysis of DNA or RNA by DuplexHybridization: DNA Isolation, Labeling, and Probing

Lab 6.1: Labeling of DNA and Probe Constructionfrom Cloned C. elegans myo-3 Gene; Quantitation of DNA Concentration

Lab 6.2: Isolation of C. elegans Genomic DNA,Quantitation of DNA Concentration, and Digestion to Extract the myo-3 Gene

Lab 6.3: Southern Blotting

PART 2: PROTEIN PURIFICATION

Unit 7Lecture 7: Protein Purification

Lab 7.1: The Protein Purifier:A Learning Aid from Pharmacia

Lab 7.2: Induction and Purification of ß-Galactosidase Fusion Protein from Bacteria

Lab 7.3: Gel Filtration of Molecular WeightStandards and Protein Fractionation

Lab 7.4: Microplate ß-Galactosidase Assay toDetermine Fractions Containing Fusion Protein;MW Determination

Lab 7.5: Ion Exchange Column Chromatography

Lab 7.6: Affinity Chromatography and Microplate ß-Galactosidase Assays to Determine FractionsContaining Fusion Protein

Lab 7.7: BCA Protein Concentration Assays and ß-Galactosidase Assays to Construct an Enzyme Purification Table

Unit 8Lecture 8: Discontinuous Gel Electrophoresis,Protein Mobilities, and Apparent SizeDetermination

Lab 8.1: Discontinuous SDS Gel Electrophoresis

Unit 9Lecture 9: Immunochemical Techniques

Lab 9.1: Western Blotting

Unit 10Lecture 10: Combinatorial Biochemical Technology

Appendixes

Part 1: Terms List

Part 2: Terms List

Laboratory Reagents

Abbreviations List

Literature Sources for Biochemical Analysis,Methods, and Preparations

Copyright Acknowledgments

Suggested Schedule

Suggested Instructions for Lab Reports

Supplies Required

Index


BIOSEPARATIONSSCIENCE ANDENGINEERINGROGER G. HARRISON, University ofOklahoma, PAUL TODD, Space HardwareOptimization Technology, Inc.,SCOTT R. RUDGE, FeRx, Inc., andDEMETRI P. PETRIDES, Intelligen, Inc.

Designed for undergraduates, graduate students,

and industry practitioners, BioseparationsScience and Engineering fills a critical need

in the field. Current, comprehensive, and con-

cise, it covers bioseparations unit operations

in greater depth than other texts on this topic.

In each of the chapters, the authors use a con-

sistent method of explaining unit operations,

starting with a qualitative description noting

the significance and general application of the

unit operation. They then illustrate the scien-

tific application of the operation, develop the

required mathematical theory, and finally,

describe the applications of the theory in engi-

neering practice, with an emphasis on design

and scaleup. Unique to this text is a chapter

dedicated to bioseparations process design

and economics, in which a process simulator,

SuperPro® Designer®, is used to analyze and

evaluate the production of three important

biological products. Other unique features

include basic information about bioproducts

and engineering analysis and a chapter with

bioseparations laboratory exercises. Biosepara-tions Science and Engineering is ideal for

students and professionals alike.

* A Solutions CD is available. (0-19-516153-X)

* A website is available: www.biosep.ou.edu

2002 • 432 pp. • 145 illus. • 0-19-512340-9 cloth • APS BIOSEP


Features■ Incorporates numerous example problems

within the chapters

■ Offers extensive sets of problems at the endof chapters

■ Includes basic information about bioproducts

■ Provides thorough coverage of analyticalmethods for bioproducts

■ Uses the simulation software SuperPro®

Designer® to illustrate the analysis and evaluation of the production of citric acid,recombinant human insulin, and mono-clonal antibodies

■ Includes laboratory exercises that supporttext material

■ Supplemented by a website with new prob-lems and examples, and with links to usefuldatabases and manufacturers of biosepara-tions equipment and supplies

ContentsPreface

Most chapters end with the following sections:Summary, Nomenclature, Problems, and References.

Preface

1. Introduction to Bioproducts and Bioseparations

2. Analytical Methods

3. Cell Lysis and Flocculation

4. Filtration

5. Sedimentation

6. Extraction

7. Liquid Chromatography and Adsorption

8. Precipitation

9. Crystallization

10. Drying

11. Bioprocess Design

12. Laboratory Exercises in Bioseparations

Appendix: Table of Units and Constants

Index

INTRODUCTION TOBIOENGINEERINGEdited by S. A. BERGER, W. GOLDSMITH,and E. R. LEWIS, all at University of California, Berkeley

Ideal for introductory bioengineering courses,

the material in this book is based on the

course given at the University of California at

Berkeley. It contains contributions from

instructors in mechanical, electrical, chemical,

and nuclear engineering as well as from spe-

cialists in orthopedics and human biodynamics.

The topics mirror the fundamental engineering

science taught in the various engineering

areas, usually at the intermediate university level,

but as applied to problems in the biological

world. The basic principles of engineering

science are presented so that students will be

able to grasp the essence of a particular topic

quickly, whatever their background. Many

worked examples and problems (together with

selected solutions) are included throughout

the text.


2000 • 544 pp. • 357 illus. • 0-19-856515-1 paper • APS BIOENG

ContentsList of Contributors

1. Biomechanics of Solids, W. Goldsmith

2. Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, L.Talbot

3. Physiological Fluid Mechanics, S. A. Berger

4. Mass Transfer, M. C. Williams

5. Bioheat Transfer, T. K. Eto and B. Rubinsky

6. The Modeling Approach to the Study of Physiological Systems, E. L. Keller

7. A Brief Introduction to Network Theory,E. R. Lewis

8. Biomaterials, R. B. Martin

9. The Interaction of Biomaterials and Biomechanics, H. B. Skinner

Bioengineering/Biomedic al


10. Locomotion and Muscle Biomechanics,S. L. Lehman, R. Kram, and C.T. Farley

11. Principles of Electrophoretic Separations,P. D. Grossman and D. S. Soane

12. Medical Imaging, T. F. Budinger

13. Biological Applications of Ionizing Radiation,S. Kaplan and H. Maccabee

14. Bioeffects of Nonionizing Electromagnetic Fields, C. Susskind

Appendix A: Linear Transforms

Index

DRUG DELIVERYEngineering Principles for Drug TherapyW. MARK SALTZMAN, Yale University

Synthetic materials are a tremendous potential

resource for treating human disease. For the

rational design of many of these biomaterials it is

necessary to have an understanding of polymer

chemistry and polymer physics. Equally

important to those two fields is a quantitative

understanding of the principles that govern

rates of drug transport, reaction, and disap-

pearance in physiological and pathological

situations. This book is a synthesis of these

principles, providing a working foundation for

those in the field of drug delivery. It covers

advanced drug delivery and contemporary

biomaterials.

2001 • 384 pp. • 160 illus. • 0-19-508589-2 cloth • APS SALDRU


Contents

PART 1: INTRODUCTORY MATERIAL

1. Introduction

2. Drug Administration and Drug Effectiveness


3. Diffusion and Drug Dispersion

4. Diffusion in Biological Systems

5. Drug Permeation through Biological Barriers

6. Drug Transport by Fluid Motion

7. Pharmacokinetics of Drug Distribution

PART 3: DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS

8. Drug Modification

9. Controlled Drug Delivery Systems

10. Case Studies in Drug Delivery

11. Postscript

Appendixes:

A. Overview of Polymeric Biomaterials

B. Useful Data and Nomenclature

Index

TISSUE ENGINEERINGEngineering Principles for the Design of ReplacementOrgans and TissuesW. MARK SALTZMAN, Yale University

Tissue or organ transplantation are among

the few options available for patients with

excessive skin loss, heart or liver failure, and

many common ailments. Thus, the demand

for replacement tissue greatly exceeds the

supply, even before one considers the serious

constraints of immunological tissue type

matching to avoid rejection by the host system.

Tissue engineering promises to help sidestep

availability problems and overcome scientific

challenges. This book lays out the fundamen-

tals. It is ideal for specialized courses in the

subject and is a useful reference for profes-

sionals connected to the field. It is a companion

volume to Saltzman’s 2001 publication, DrugDelivery.

2004 • 544 pp. • 192 illus. • 0-19-514130-X cloth • APS TISENG


ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary,References, and Exercises.

Preface

1. How to Use This Book

PART 1. TISSUE EXCHANGE AND TISSUE DEVELOPMENT

2. Objectives of Tissue Engineering3. Elements of Tissue Development

PART 2. TISSUE ENGINEERINGFUNDAMENTALS

4. Cell Growth and Differentiation5. Cell and Tissue Mechanics6. Cell Adhesion7. Cell Migration8. Cell Aggregation and Tissue Equivalents9. Tissue Barriers to Molecular and

Cellular Transport

PART 3. TISSUE ENGINEERING PRACTICE10. Cell Delivery and Recirculation11. Delivery of Molecular Agents in

Tissue Engineering12. Cell Interactions with Polymers13. Approaches to Tissue Engineering14. Case Studies in Tissue Engineering

REFERENCES/APPENDIXESA. Introduction to PolymersB. Analysis of Molecular TransportC. Useful DataD. Nomenclature and Abbreviations

RECEPTORSModels for Binding,Trafficking, and SignalingDOUGLAS A. LAUFFENBURGER,University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign,and JENNIFER LINDERMAN,University of Michigan, Ann Arbor

This volume introduces chemical engineers

and bioengineers to important problems in

receptor biology and familiarizes cell biolo-

gists with the insights that can be gained from

engineering analysis and synthesis.

1996 • 376 pp. • 179 illus. • 0-19-510663-6 paper • APS LAUFF



2. Cell Surface Receptor/Ligand Binding Fundamentals

3. Receptor/Ligand Trafficking

4. Physical Aspects of Receptor/Ligand Binding and Trafficking Processes

5. Signal Transduction

6. Receptor-Mediated Cell Behavior

8. Future Directions

NEW!

Topics in Chemical EngineeringA S E R I E S O F T E X T B O O K S A N D M O N O G R A P H S

TOPICS IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING: A SERIES OF TEXTBOOKS AND MONOGRAPHS

was established at Oxford University Press to bring together the best minds from

academia and industry to write on key topics of interest to chemical engineers today.

Series Editor Keith E. Gubbins of North Carolina State University is joined by an

editorial board whose members represent various disciplines comprising the field

of chemical engineering.

This series offers a wide selection of books on key topics—monographs on

advanced areas of study and textbooks for undergraduate courses—written by

authors with unparalleled expertise in their respective fields. Over the next several

years, exciting new titles will be published, such as Thermo, a new textbook on

thermodynamics written by Carol C. Hall of North Carolina State University

specifically for chemical engineers.

In the future, the series will explore areas of expanding new research in chemical

engineering, including polymers, nanostructures, electronic materials, and separation

processes. Please let us know if you have an idea for a textbook in one of these areas

or in another subject area. Perhaps you are interested in helping us to develop new

projects and revisions of existing textbooks by acting as a reviewer. We are interested

in what you have to say and invite you to contact Jeremy Lewis, Associate Editor,


TOPICS IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERINGSERIES EDITOR: Keith E. Gubbins, North Carolina State University

ASSOCIATE EDITORS:

Mark A. Barteau, University of DelawareFrank S. Bates, University of Minnesota

George Georgiou, University of Texas, AustinSharon C. Glotzer, University of Michigan

Sangtae Kim, Purdue UniversityDouglas A. Lauffenburger, Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Manfred Morari, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH)W. Harmon Ray, University of Wisconsin, Madison

William B. Russel, Princeton University

C U R R E N T T I T L E S I N T H E S E R I E S

■ Chimowitz, An Introduction to Critical Phenomena in Fluids

■ Deen, Analysis of Transport Phenomena

■ Doraiswamy, Organic Synthesis Engineering

■ Floudas, Nonlinear and Mixed Integer Optimization:Fundamentals and Applications

■ Friedlander, Smoke, Dust, and Haze: Fundamentals of Aerosol Dynamics, Second Edition

■ Fuller, Optical Rheometry of Complex Fluids

■ Harrison, Todd, Rudge, and Petrides, BioseparationsScience and Engineering

■ Larson, The Structure and Rheology of Complex Fluids

■ Lauffenburger and Linderman, Receptors:Models for Binding,Trafficking, and Signaling

■ Morrison, Understanding Rheology

■ Ogunnaike and Ray, Process Dynamics,Modeling, and Control

■ Pearson, Discrete-Time Dynamic Models

■ Phan-Thien and Kim, Microstructures in Elastic Media

■ Pozrikidis, An Introduction to Theoretical andComputational Fluid Dynamics

■ Pozrikidis, Numerical Computation in Science and Engineering

■ Schmidt, The Engineering of Chemical Reactions,Second Edition

■ Saltzman, Drug Delivery: Engineering Principles for Drug Therapy

■ Saltzman, Tissue Engineering: Engineering Principlesfor the Design of Replacement Organs and Tissue

■ Varma and Morbidelli, Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering



PRINCIPLES OF POLYMER ENGINEERINGSecond EditionN. G. McCRUM, C. P. BUCKLEY,both of Oxford University, andC. B. BUCKNALL, Cranfield University

The second edition of Principles of PolymerEngineering provides up-to-date coverage for undergraduates studying materials andpolymer science. The opening chapters showwhy plastics and rubbers have such distinctiveproperties and how they are affected by temperature, strain rate, and other factors.The rest of the book concentrates on ways toexploit these properties to produce functionalcomponents within the constraints placed onthem. The main changes for the second ed tionare a new chapter on environmental issues andsubstantially rewritten sections on yield andfracture and forming.


1997 • 464 pp. • 231 illus. • 0-19-856526-7 paper • APS MCCR2


1. Structure of the Molecule

2. Structure of Polymeric Solids

3. The Elastic Properties of Rubber

4. Viscoelasticity

5. Yield and Fracture

6. Reinforced Polymers

7. Forming

8. Design

Further Reading

Answers

Index

POLYMER PHYSICSMICHAEL RUBINSTEIN, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, and RALPH H. COLBY, Penn State University

Polymer Physics thoroughly details the funda-mental concepts of polymer melts, solutions,and gels in terms of both static structure anddynamics. It goes beyond other introductorypolymer texts, deriving the essential tools ofthe physical polymer chemist or engineerwithout skipping any steps.

The book is divided into four parts. PartOne summarizes the necessary concepts of afirst course on polymers and covers the con-formations of single polymer chains. Part Twodeals with the thermodynamics of polymersolutions and melts, including chain confor-mations in those states. Part Three applies theconcepts of Part Two to the formation andproperties of polymer networks. Part Fourexplains the essential aspects of how polymersmove in both melt and solution states.

The text assumes a working knowledge ofcalculus, physics, and chemistry, but no priorknowledge of polymers. It is ideal for upper-level undergraduate and first-year graduatecourses in condensed matter physics, softmaterials, and polymers.

2003 • 512 pp. • 0-19-852059-X cloth • APS POLYMR

Features■ Presents established results in an easily

accessible way

■ Emphasizes physical insight rather thanmathematical rigor

■ Provides detailed experimental sections atthe end of each chapter

■ Includes more than 200 illustrations and350 exercises

ContentsEach chapter ends with Problems and a Bibliography.Preface

1. Introduction

PART 1: SINGLE CHAIN CONFORMATIONS2. Ideal Chains 3. Real Chains

PART 2: THERMODYNAMICS OF BLENDS AND SOLUTIONS

4. Thermodynamics of Mixing5. Polymer Solutions

PART 3: NETWORKS AND GELATION6. Random Branching and Gelation7. Networks and Gels

PART 4: DYNAMICS8. Unentangled Polymer Dynamics9. Entangled Polymer Dynamics

NotationsIndex

INTRODUCTION TOSYNTHETIC POLYMERSSecond EditionIAN M. CAMPBELL, University of Leeds

This text introduces the extensive field ofpolymer science to students taking degreecourses in chemistry, materials science, andrelated subjects covering polymers. By focus-ing on the few major polymers—for example,polystyrene and PVC, which are familiar tostudents—the book illustrates the basic prin-ciples of polymer science. It looks at the factorsthat give rise to the special properties of poly-mers, and emphasizes how polymer moleculescan be synthesized with different sizes andarchitectures in order to tailor the properties ofthe resulting material. The later chapters thenintroduce a wide range of polymers, some withspecial current applications and others withexciting potential for the future.

2000 • 232 pp. • 127 illus. • 0-19-856470-8 paper • APS INTRO2

ContentsEach chapter ends with Exercises.

1. Introduction

2. Average Molecular Masses and Polydispersity

3. Microscopic Features of Bulk Polymers

4. Major Techniques for Analysis and Structure Determination

5. Step-Growth Polymerization

6. Addition Polymerization via Free Radicals

7. Addition Polymerization via Ionic and Coordination Mechanisms

8. Properties of Common Polymers in Bulk

9. Some Specialty Polymers

10. Looking to the Future

Further reading

Index

Polymers


METHODS OF X-RAY ANDNEUTRON SCATTERINGIN POLYMER SCIENCERYONG-JOON ROE, University of Cincinnati

This book presents the basic theories underly-

ing x-ray and neutron scattering, as well as the

various techniques that have been developed

for their application to the study of polymers.

The two scattering methods are discussed

together from the beginning, so that students

can become equally familiar with both from

the outset. The book is introductory and may

be used as a textbook in polymer science class

or for self-study by polymer scientists new to

scattering techniques.

2000 • 352 pp. • 158 illus. • 0-19-511321-7 cloth • APS ROEMET

Contents1. Basics of X-ray and Neutron Scattering2. Experimental Techniques3. Crystalline Polymers4. Amorphous Polymers5. Small Angle Scattering6. Polymer Blends, Block Copolymers,

and Deuterium Labeling7. Methods of Study for Surfaces and Interfaces8. Inelastic Neutron ScatteringAppendixes:A. Refresher on Complex NumbersB. Fourier TransformC. Reciprocal LatticeD. Constants and Conversion FactorsGlossary of Symbols

POLYMER CHEMISTRYAn Introduction

Third EditionMALCOLM P. STEVENS, University of Hartford

Polymer Chemistry is an introductory text-

book intended for graduate and advanced un-

dergraduate students and industrial chemists

who work with polymers. The author’s pur-

pose in writing the book was to provide a

comprehensive overview of the chemistry of

macromolecular substances, with particular

emphasis on polymers that are important com-

mercially, and the properties that make them

important. Major topics include polymer syn-

thesis nomenclature, molecular weight, reac-

tions of polymers, recycling of polymers,

methods used for characterizing and testing

polymers, morphology, stereoregular poly-

mers, polymer blends, heterocyclic polymers,

inorganic polymers, and natural polymers.


1998 • 576 pp. • 95 illus. • 0-19-512444-8 cloth • APS POLY3

ContentsPreface

PART 1: POLYMER STRUCTURE AND PROPERTIES

1. Basic Principles

2. Molecular Weight and Polymer Solutions

3. Chemical Structure and Polymer Morphology

4. Chemical Structure and Polymer Properties

5. Evaluation, Characterization, and Analysis of Polymers

PART 2: VINYL POLYMERS6. Free Radical Polymerization

7. Ionic Polymerization

8. Vinyl Polymerization with Complex Coordination Catalysts

9. Reactions of Vinyl Polymers

PART 3: NONVINYL POLYMERS10. Step-Reaction and Ring-Opening

Polymerization

11. Polyethers, Polysulfides, and Related Polymers

12. Polyesters

13. Polyamides and Related Polymers

14. Phenol-, Urea-, and Melamine-Formaldehyde Polymers

15. Heterocyclic Polymers

16. Inorganic and Partially Inorganic Polymers

17. Miscellaneous Organic Polymers

18. Natural Polymers

Appendixes:

A. Commonly Used Polymer Abbreviations

B. Polymer Literature

C. Sources of Laboratory Experiments in Polymer Chemistry

Index

STRUCTURED FLUIDSPolymers, Colloids,SurfactantsTHOMAS A. WITTEN, University of Chicago

Designed for advanced undergraduate and

beginning graduate courses, this book presents

a thorough treatment of soft matter—fluids

containing polymers, colloidal particles, or

surfactant molecules. It provides a unified

account of their distinctive properties—such

as their large viscosities and their weak

elasticity—using basic statistical principles.

2004 • 240 pp. • 92 illus. • 0-19-852688-1 cloth • APS WITTEN

THE ENGINEERING OFCHEMICAL REACTIONSSecond EditionLANNY D. SCHMIDT, University of Minnesota

Thoroughly revised and updated in this sec-

ond edition, The Engineering of ChemicalReactions focuses explicitly on developing the

skills necessary to design a chemical reactor

for any application, including chemical pro-

duction, materials processing, and environ-

mental modeling. This edition also features

two new chapters on biological and environ-

mental reaction engineering that provide an

exciting introduction to these increasingly

important areas of today’s chemical engineer-

ing market.

Streamlined to enhance the logical flow of

the subject, The Engineering of ChemicalReactions, Second Edition, is easy for instruc-

tors to navigate and students to follow. Using

real reactions from chemical engineering, the

first seven chapters cover such fundamentals

as multiple reactions, energy management,

and catalytic processes. The final five chapters

explore more advanced topics including envi-

ronmental, polymer, solids processing, biolog-

ical, and combustion reactions. Practical, real-

world examples throughout the text consider

reactor and process choices in ways that

encourage students to think creatively and

build on previous knowledge.

The Engineering of Chemical Reactions,

Second Edition, is ideal for upper-level under-

graduate courses in chemical reactor engineer-

ing, chemical reactor design, and kinetics.

* A Solutions Manual (0-19-517662-6) is available to adopters.

2004 • 640 pp. • 222 illus. • 0-19-516925-5 cloth • APS SCHMD2

Topics in Chemical EngineeringA Series of Textbooks and Monographs

Polymers Reac tions

NewEdition!


Features■ Presents two new chapters, Biological

Reactions (Chapter 12), and EnvironmentalReactions (Chapter 13).

■ Covers growth industries including micro-electronic, food, pharmaceutical, ceramic,and environmental businesses that rely onreaction engineering

■ Discusses the chemical and petroleumindustries along with the major processesfor most established products and feed-stocks

■ Contains examples of varying difficultydrawn from polymerization processes,oxidation reactions and combustion,processing of solids, environmental reac-tions and safety, biological reactions, andthe petroleum and chemical commoditiesindustries

■ Offers more than one hundred new studyproblems

■ Reinforces student knowledge by repeatedlyemphasizing important points

ContentsEach chapter ends with Problems.Most chapters end with References.

Preface to the Second Edition

Preface to the First Edition

PART I: FUNDAMENTALS

1. Introduction

2. Reaction Rates, The Batch Reactor,and The Real World

3. Single Reactions in Continuous Isothermal Reactors

4. Multiple Reactions in Continuous Reactors

5. Nonisothermal Reactors

6. Multiple Steady States and Transients

7. Catalytic Reactors and Mass Transfer

PART II: APPLICATIONS

8. Nonideal Chemical Reactions

9. Reactions of Solids

10. Chain Reactions, Combustion Reactors,and Safety

11. Polymerization Reactions and Reactors

12. Biological Reaction Engineering

13. Environmental Reaction Engineering

14. Multiphase Reactors

Appendixes:

A: Integrating Differential Equations

B: Notation

C: Conversion Factors

Index

UNDERSTANDINGRHEOLOGYFAITH A. MORRISON,Michigan Technological University

Designed for advanced undergraduate- or

graduate-level courses in rheology or polymer

rheology, Understanding Rheology is also an

ideal self-teaching guide for practicing engi-

neers and scientists who find rheological

principles applicable to their work. Covering

the most important aspects of elementary

modern rheology, this detailed and accessible

text opens with an introduction to the field

and then provides extensive background chap-

ters on vector and tensor operations and

Newtonian fluid mechanics. It continues with

coverage of such topics as:

■ Standard Flows for Rheology

■ Material Functions

■ Experimental Observations

■ Generalized Newtonian Fluids

■ Generalized Linear-Viscoelastic Fluids

■ Nonlinear Constitutive Equations

■ Rheometry, including rheo-optics

Understanding Rheology incorporates help-

ful pedagogical aids including numerous

problems for each chapter, many worked

examples, and an extensive glossary. It also

contains useful appendixes on nomenclature,

mathematical tools, predictions of constitutive

equations, and birefringence.

* A Solutions CD is available. (0-19-514167-9 )

2001 • 560 pp. • 234 illus. • 0-19-514166-0 cloth • APS MORRHE


ContentsPreface

1. Introduction: How Much Do I Need to Learn about Rheology?

2. Vector and Tensor Operations

3. Newtonian Fluid Mechanics

4. Standard Flows for Rheology

5. Material Functions

6. Experimental Data

7. No Memory: Generalized Newtonian Fluids

8. Memory Effects: Generalized Linear Viscoelastic Fluids

9. Introduction to More Advanced Constitutive Modeling

10. Rheometry

Appendixes

References

Index

THE STRUCTURE AND RHEOLOGY OFCOMPLEX FLUIDSRONALD G. LARSON,University of Michigan, Ann Arbor

This text offers an up-to-date synopsis of

the relationship between the microstructure of

complex fluids and their mechanical and flow

properties, and also emphasizes the similarities

and differences among the various types of

complex fluids. It includes more than 350

illustrations, extensive literature citations, and

many interesting problems, worked examples,

and practical applications. Featuring coverage

of both foundational material and special

topics, this volume is for use in a one- or

two-semester graduate-level course in chemical

engineering, materials science, or physics.

1998 • 688 pp. • 360 illus. • 0-19-512197-X cloth • APS LARSTR


ContentsEach chapter is followed by References.

Chapters 1–3, 6–7, and 10 are followed by Problems and Worked Examples.

Preface

Acknowledgments


1. Introduction to Complex Fluids

2. Basic Forces

Rheology


PART 2: POLYMERS, GLASSY LIQUIDS,AND POLYMER GELS

3. Polymers

4. Glassy Liquids

5. Polymer Gels

PART 3: SUSPENSIONS

6. Particulate Suspensions

7. Particulate Gels

8. Electro-and Magnetoresponsive Suspensions

9. Foams, Emulsions, and Blends

PART 4: LIQUID CRYSTALS AND SELF-ASSEMBLING FLUIDS

10. Liquid Crystals

11. Liquid-Crystalline Polymers

12. Surfactant Solutions

13. Block Copolymers

Appendix: Momentum-Balance Equations in the Absence of Inertia

Common Notation

Author Index

Subject Index

ENGINEERINGRHEOLOGYSecond EditionROGER I. TANNER,University of Sydney, Australia

This book is a useful guide for making pre-

dictions about the mechanical and thermal

behavior of non-Newtonian materials in

engineering and process technology. It is

designed for graduate courses in rheology and

continuum mechanics.

2000 • 592 pp. • 134 illus. • 0-19-856473-2 cloth • APS TANNRH

Contents1. Introduction to Rheology

2. Review of Continuum Mechanics

3. Viscometric and Elongational Flows

4. Continuum-Derived Theories and Experimental Data

5. Microstructural Theories

6. Lubrication, Calendaring, and Related Flows

7. Fiber Spinning and Film Blowing

8. Computational Rheology and Applications

9. Temperature and Pressure Effects

10. Stability of Flow and Turbulence

Appendix: Formulas in Cartesian, Cylindrical,and Spherical Conditions

PROCESS DYNAMICS,MODELING, ANDCONTROLBABATUNDE A. OGUNNAIKE, University of Delaware, and W. HARMON RAY,University of Wisconsin, Madison

Outstanding in its breadth and coherence, this

volume combines a classroom-tested overview

of theory with a wealth of examples taken from

the chemical process industry. It includes a

unified approach to model representations

and also covers process model formation and

process identification, multivariable control,

statistical quality control, and model-based

control. It is designed to be used as an

introductory text in undergraduate courses

in process dynamics and control.


1994 • 1296 pp. • 446 illus. • 0-19-509119-1 cloth • APS OGUN


Contents

PART 1: INTRODUCTION1. Introductory Concepts of Process Control2. Introduction to Control System

Implementation

PART 2: PROCESS DYNAMICS3. Basic Elements of Dynamic Analysis4. The Process Model5. Dynamic Behavior of Linear

Low-Order Systems6. Dynamic Behavior of Linear

Higher Order Systems7. Inverse-Response Systems8. Time-Delay Systems9. Frequency-Response Analysis

10. Nonlinear Systems11. Stability

PART 3: PROCESS MODELING AND IDENTIFICATION

12. Theoretical Process Modeling13. Process Identification: Empirical

Process Modeling

PART 4: PROCESS CONTROL

Part 4A: Single-Loop Control14. Feedback Control Systems15. Conventional Feedback Controller Design16. Design of More Complex Control Structures17. Controller Design for Processes with

Difficult Dynamics18. Controller Design for Nonlinear Systems19. Model-Based Control

Part 4B: Multivariable Process Control20. Introduction to Multivariable Systems21. Interaction Analysis and Multiple

Single Loop Designs22. Design of Multivariable Controllers

Part 4C: Computer Process Control23. Introduction to Sampled-Data Systems24. Tools of Discrete-Time Systems Analysis25. Dynamic Analysis of Discrete-Time Systems26. Design of Digital Controllers

PART 5: SPECIAL CONTROL TOPICS27. Model Predictive Control28. Statistical Process Control29. Selected Topics in Advanced Process

Control30. Process Control System Synthesis—

Some Case Studies

PART 6: APPENDIXESA. Control System Symbols used in Process

and Instrumentation DiagramsB. Complex Variables, Differential Equations,

and Difference EquationsC. Laplace and z-TransformsD. Review of Matrix AlgebraE. Computer-Aided Control System DesignAuthor Index

Subject Index

PROCESS PLANTSIMULATIONB. V. BABU, Birla Institute of Technologyand Science, India

Exhaustive coverage of all topics related toplant simulation is provided. The text adoptsa generalized approach to modeling variousengineering systems so that the underlyingprinciples can be applied to any new system inengineering, science, or other applied disci-pline. It covers traditional and non-traditionaloptimization techniques, discusses case studieson specific-purpose and dynamic simulation,and includes an overview of professional soft-ware packages used in plant simulation, suchas Hysis® and FLUENT®. An accompanyingCD-ROM containing program codes and re-lated useful information is included in the text.

2004 • 556 pp. • 217 illus. • 0-19-566805-7 paper • APS BABU

ContentsPreface

1. Introduction

PART I: MODELLING2. Modelling Aspects

3. Classification of Mathematical Modelling

PART II: CHEMICAL SYSTEMS MODELLING4. Models in Mass-transfer Operations 5. Models in Heat-transfer Operations 6. Models in Fluid-flow Operations 7. Models in Reaction Engineering

PART III: TREATMENT OF EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS

8. Error Propagation and Data Regression



PART IV: OPTIMIZATION9. Traditional Optimization Techniques

10. Non-traditional Optimization Techniques

PART V: SIMULATION11. Modular Approaches and Equation-

solving Approach

12. Decomposition of Networks

13. Convergence Promotion and Physical and Thermodynamic Properties

14. Specific-purpose Simulation and Dynamic Simulation

15. Professional Simulation Packages

References

Index

ANALYSIS OF TRANSPORTPHENOMENAWILLIAM M. DEEN,Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Analysis of Transport Phenomena provides a

unified treatment of momentum, heat, and

mass transfer, emphasizing the concepts and

analytical techniques that apply to all of these

transport processes. It is mathematically self-

contained and is unique in its coverage of

scaling and approximation techniques and its

presentation of the finite Fourier transform

method for solving partial differential equations.

*A Solutions Manual CD is available.(0-19-516153-X)

1998 • 624 pp. • 191 illus. • 0-19-508494-2 cloth • APS DEEN


AN INTRODUCTION TO NONLINEARCHEMICAL DYNAMICSOscillations, Waves,Patterns, and ChaosIRVING R. EPSTEIN, Brandeis University,and JOHN A. POJMAN, University ofSouthern Mississippi

Epstein and Pojman explain why chemists

initially thought oscillating reactions violated

the second law of thermodynamics. They

emphasize the chemical mechanistic basis for

self-organization throughout and covers prac-

tical aspects of reactor design, data analysis,

and computer simulations. Chapters devoted

to such advanced topics as complex oscillations,

biological systems, polymers, interaction of fields

with waves, and Turing patterns are provided.

1998 408 pp.; 245 illus. 0-19-509670-3 paper APS EPSINT

ELEMENTS OF QUANTUMMECHANICSMICHAEL D. FAYER, Stanford University

Offering a solid grounding in the fundamen-

tals of quantum theory, this volume begins

with the most basic concepts. It goes on to pres-

ent balanced coverage of such various quan-

tum theory formalisms, as the Schrödinger

representation, raising and lowering operator

techniques, the matrix representation, and

density matrix methods.

*A Solutions Manual is available. (0-19-514726-X)

*An Instructor’s CD with PowerPoint Overheads is available.


2001 • 356 pp. • 53 illus. • 0-19-514195-4 cloth • APS FAYQM

NONLINEAR AND MIXED-INTEGER OPTIMIZATIONFundamentals andApplicationsCHRISTODOULOS A. FLOUDAS,Princeton University

Filling a void in chemical engineering and

optimization literature, this book presents the

theory and methods for nonlinear and mixed-

integer optimization, and discusses their

applications in the important area of process

synthesis. Other topics include modeling

issues in process synthesis and optimization-

based approaches in the synthesis of heat

recovery systems, distillation-based systems,

and reactor-based systems.

1995 • 480 pp. • 85 illus. • 0-19-510056-5 cloth • APS FLOUDA


SMOKE, DUST, AND HAZEFundamentals of Aerosol Dynamics Second EditionSHELDON K. FRIEDLANDER,University of California, Los Angeles

The only modern text that focuses on aerosol

dynamics, this book covers fundamental

concepts, experimental methods, and a wide

variety of applications. Using the aerosol

dynamics approach, the author integrates a

broad range of topics including stochastic

processes, aerosol transport theory, coagula-

tion, formation of agglomerates, classical

nucleation theory, and the synthesis of ultra-

fine solid particles.

2000 • 432 pp. • 163 illus. • 0-19-512999-7 cloth • APS FRISMO


OPTICAL RHEOMETRY OF COMPLEX FLUIDSGERALD G. FULLER,Stanford University

This book provides a self-contained presen-

tation of optical methods used to measure the

structure and dynamics of complex fluids sub-

ject to the influence of external fields. Appli-

cations are presented, along with case studies.

1995 • 288 pp • 105 illus. • 0-19-509718-1 cloth • APS FULOPT


MATHEMATICALMETHODS IN CHEMICALENGINEERINGARVIND VARMA, University of Notre Dame,and MASSIMO MORBIDELLI, ETH Zürich

An integrated treatment of linear operator

theory from determinants through partial

differential equations is provided. The book

features an extensive chapter on nonlinear

ordinary differential equations as well as

strong coverage of first-order partial differ-

ential equations and perturbation methods.

Numerous high-quality diagrams and graphics

support the concepts and solutions. Many

examples are included throughout the text,

and a large number of well-conceived prob-

lems at the end of each chapter reinforce the

concepts presented.

*A Solutions Manual is available.Please contact your Oxford sales representative at 1-800-280-0280 for additional information.

1997 • 704 pp. • 186 illus. • 0-19-509821-8 cloth • APS VARMA


Energyci

vil

and

en

viro

nm

enta

l en

gin

eeri

ng

RENEWABLE ENERGYSecond EditionEdited by GODFREY BOYLE,Open University

Stimulated by recent technological develop-

ments and increasing concern over the sus-

tainability and environmental impact of con-

ventional fuel usage, the prospect of producing

clean, sustainable power in substantial quan-

tities from renewable energy sources arouses

interest around the world. This book provides

a comprehensive overview of the principal

types of renewable energy—including solar,

thermal photovoltaics, bioenergy, hydro, tidal,

wind, wave, and geothermal. In addition, the

text explains the underlying physical and

technological principles of renewable energy

and examines the environmental impact and

future prospects of different energy sources.

It includes more than 350 detailed illustrations,

more than fifty tables of data, and a wide range

of case studies. Renewable Energy, Second

Edition, is ideal for undergraduate courses in

energy, sustainable development, and environ-

mental science.

2004 • 456 pp. • 350 illus. • 0-19-926178-4 paper • APS RENEW2

ContentsPreface

1. Introducing Renewable Energy, Gary Alexander and Godfrey Boyle

2. Solar Thermal Energy, Bob Everett

3. Solar Photovoltaics, Godfrey Boyle

4. Bioenergy, Stephen Larkin, Janet Ramage, and Johnathan Scurlock

5. Hydroelectricity, Janet Ramage

6. Tidal Power, David Elliott

7. Wind Energy, Derek Taylor

8. Wave Energy, Les Duckers

9. Geothermal Energy, Geoff Brown and John Garnish

10. Integration, Bob Everette and Godfrey Boyle

Acknowledgments

Index

ENERGY SYSTEMS AND SUSTAINABILITYEdited by GODFREY BOYLE,BOB EVERETT, and JANET RAMAGE,all at Open University

Today energy and sustainability are areas of

primary concern throughout the world.

Energy Systems and Sustainability provides

a thorough introduction to the economic,

social, environmental, and policy issues raised

by current systems of energy use. In addition,

it describes the key physical and engineering

features of these systems.

The book begins with an introductory

account of the present world energy situation.

This is followed by chapters explaining basic

energy concepts and describing the magni-

tudes and patterns of human energy needs.

The central part of the book deals with the

historical evolution and present status of con-

ventional fossil- and nuclear-fueled energy sys-

tems. These systems, along with hydropower

and traditional biofuels, currently supply the

majority of the world’s commercial energy. In

addition, a section on economics describes the

basic methods by which the monetary costs of

energy are calculated, and discusses the external

costs of energy production. The concluding

sections deal with the sustainability problems

associated with both fossil and nuclear fuel use,

and possible solutions using new technological

developments.

Energy Systems and Sustainability pro-

vides a fresh, contemporary perspective on

energy and sustainability for an undergraduate

audience. It is ideal for courses in energy,

sustainable development, environmental science,

and architecture.

2004 • 408 pp. • 300 illus. • 0-19-926179-2 paper • APS ENRSYS


C I V I L A N D E N V I R O N M E N T A L E N G I N E E R I N G | 85

Features■ Includes extensive coverage of the impor-

tant concepts and issues behind modernenergy production

■ Provides detailed descriptions of the mainmethods used to produce energy today

■ Lavishly illustrated with full-color photo-graphs and diagrams

■ Presents in-depth case studies and furtherexplanations on more advanced topics inboxed sections throughout the text

ContentsEach chapter begins with an Introduction and ends with References.

1. Introductory Overview, Godfrey Boyle

2. Primary Energy, Janet Ramage and Bob Everett

3. What Do We Use Energy For?, Bob Everett and Janet Ramage

4. Forms of Energy, Janet Ramage

5. Coal, Janet Ramage

6. Heat to Motive Power, Janet Ramage

7. Oil and Gas, David Crabbe

8. Oil and Gas Engines, Bob Everett

9. Electricity, Janet Ramage

10. Nuclear Power, Janet Ramage

11. The Future of Nuclear Power, David Elliott

12. Costing Energy, Bob Everett

13. Penalties: Assessing the Environmental and Health Impacts of Energy Use,Godfrey Boyle, Janet Ramage, and David Elliott

14. Remedies: Making Fossil Fuel Use More Sustainable, Godfrey Boyle

Acknowledgments

Index

ENERGY AND THEENVIRONMENTJAMES A. FAY, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, and DAN S. GOLOMB,University of Massachusetts, Lowell

Energy and the Environment offers a timely

treatment of a critical problem in urban-indus-

trial societies: the worldwide growth of energy

use and the destructive relationship between

this energy use and environmental degrada-

tion. This comprehensive text provides the

scientific and technological background for

understanding how our ever-increasing use of

energy threatens the natural environment at

local, regional, and global scales and how this

threat could be mitigated by more efficient use

of conventional energy sources and their

replacement by renewable energy sources.

Energy and the Environment is designed for

upper-level undergraduate and first-year

graduate courses in energy and environmental

sciences and technology.

*A Solutions Manual CD is available.(0-19-516153-X)

2002 • 336 pp. • 116 illus. • 0-19-515092-9 paper • APS FAY


ContentsAll chapters end with a Conclusion,Problems, and a Bibliography.

List of Tables

Foreword

Preface

1. Energy and the Environment

2. Global Energy Use and Supply

3. Thermodynamic Principles of Energy Conversion

4. Electrical Energy Generation,Transmission, and Storage

5. Fossil-Fueled Power Plants

6. Nuclear-Fueled Power Plants

7. Renewable Energy

8. Transportation

9. Environmental Effects of Fossil Fuel Use

10. Global Warming

11. Concluding Remarks

Appendix A: Measuring Energy

Index

SOIL MECHANICSLABORATORY MANUALSixth EditionBRAJA M. DAS,California State University, Sacramento

Now in its sixth edition, Soil MechanicsLaboratory Manual is designed for the jun-

ior-level soil mechanics/geotechnical engi-

neering laboratory course in civil engineering

programs. It includes eighteen laboratory pro-

cedures that cover the essential properties of

soils and their behavior under stress and

strain, as well as explanations, procedures,

sample calculations, and completed and blank

data sheets. Written by Braja M. Das, a

respected author of market-leading texts in

geotechnical and foundation engineering, this

unique manual provides a detailed discussion

of standard soil classification systems used by

engineers: the AASHTO Classification System

and the Unified Soil Classification System,

which both conform to recent ASTM speci-

fications.

The sixth edition includes not only the

stand-alone version of the Soil MechanicsLaboratory Test software but also ready-made

Microsoft Excel templates designed to per-

form the same calculations. These interactive

programs can be used to collect, organize, and

evaluate data for each of the book’s eighteen

labs. The resulting tables can be printed with

their corresponding graphs, creating easily

generated reports that display and analyze data

obtained from the manual’s laboratory tests.

2001 • 288 pp. • 57 illus. • 0-19-515046-5 paper • APS SOIL6


S oils


Features■ Includes sample calculations and graphs

relevant to each laboratory test

■ Supplies blank tables (that accompany eachtest) for laboratory use and report preparation

■ Contains a complete chapter on soil classi-fication (Chapter 9)

Contents1. Laboratory Test and Report Preparation

2. Determination of Water Content

3. Specific Gravity

4. Sieve Analysis

5. Hydrometer Analysis

6. Liquid Limit Test

7. Plastic Limit Test

8. Shrinkage Limit Test

9. Engineering Classification of Soils

10. Constant Head Permeability Test in Sand

11. Falling Head Permeability Test in Sand

12. Standard Proctor Compaction Test

13. Modified Proctor Compaction Test

14. Determination of Field Unit Weight of Compaction by Sand Cone Method

15. Direct Shear Test on Sand

16. Unconfined Compression Test

17. Consolidation Test

18. Triaxial Tests in Clay

References

Appendixes:

A. Weight-Volume Relationships

B. Data Sheets for Laboratory Experiments

C. Data Sheets for Preparation of Laboratory Reports

FUNDAMENTALS OF HYDRAULICENGINEERINGALAN L. PRASUHN,South Dakota State University

This text provides comprehensive treatment

of hydraulic engineering in both closed conduit

and open channel flow. It features a clear pres-

entation that incorporates more examples and

problems than most competitors. The carefully

organized coverage begins with basics of

hydrology, pipelines, and open channels and

also includes both hydrologic background

and traditional hydraulics. A good balance of

theory and applications and extensive appen-

dixes, including selected computer programs,

round out the text.

1987 • 528 pp. • illus. • 0-19-510732-2 paper • APS PRASUH

Contents1. Introduction: Overview of Hydraulic

Engineering

2. Review of Fluid Mechanics: Fluid Properties

3. Hydrology Precipitation: Evaporation,Transpiration, and Snow Melt

4. Groundwater Hydraulics: Groundwater Characteristics

5. Statistical Analysis of Hydrological Data:Probability, Return Period, and Probability Distributions

6. Pipelines: Hydraulics of Steady Flow in Closed Conduits

7. Open Channel Hydraulics: Pressure Distribution,Resistance, and the Manning Equation

8. Mechanics of Sediment Transport:Sediment Properties

9. Physical Modeling: Similitude and the Modeling Laws

10. Hydraulic Machinery:Analysis of Hydraulic Machinery

11. Drainage Hydraulics: Estimation of Drainage Runoff

ANALYSIS OFSTRUCTURESStrength and BehaviorT.S. THANDAVAMOORTHY,Structural Engineering Research Center,Chennai, India

Analysis of Structures: Strength andBehavior provides comprehensive coverage

of fundamental concepts, definitions, and

analytical techniques. It also discusses many

real-world topics and issues—including off-

shore structures, safety auditing of structures,

and experimental stress analysis. Featuring an

innovative layout and numerous worked

examples, this book is ideal for introductory

undergraduate courses in civil engineering.

2005 • 896 pp. • 400 illus. • 0-19-567003-5 •paper • APS THANDA

* A Solutions Manual is available to adopters.



2. Loads

3. Material Characteristics

4. Geometrical Properties

5. Analysis of Beams

6. Thin-Walled Members

7. Strength of Joints

8. Stability of Structures

9. Fatigue and Fracture

10. Vibration of Structures

11. Experimental Stress Analysis

12. Reinforced Concrete

13. Arches

14. Finite Element Modelling

15. Offshore Structures

16. Wind-Loaded Structures

17. Structures Under Seismic Excitation

18. Blast Response of Structures

19. Response of Structures to Man-Made Vibration

20. Safety Auditing of Concrete Structures

Index

S oils Struc turesHydraulics

NEW!

E N G I N E E R I N G E C O N O M I C S | 87

ENGINEERING ECONOMIC ANALYSISNinth EditionDONALD G. NEWNAN,TED G. ESCHENBACH,University of Alaska Anchorage, and JEROME P. LAVELLE,North Carolina State University

Now in a ninth edition, Engineering EconomicAnalysis offers comprehensive coverage of

financial and economic decision-making for

engineering projects, with an emphasis on prob-

lem solving, life cycle costs, and the time value

of money. The spreadsheet material from the

previous edition has been expanded, allowing

students to create and analyze more realistic

cash-flow models. The authors’ concise, acces-

sible writing style and practical emphasis make

this text ideal for undergraduate engineering

economy courses.

2004 • 737 pp. • 261 illus. • 0-19-516807-0cloth • APS NEWEN9

Features■ New pedagogical features include:

• Chapter-opening vignettes• Chapter objectives

■ The interior design is completely reworkedto improve readability, generate studentinterest, and facilitate comprehension of thematerial.

■ A new chapter has been added: Chapter 18,Accounting and Engineering Economy.

■ Chapter 10, Uncertainty in Future Events,has been completely rewritten to emphasizehow to make good choices by consideringthe uncertainty that is part of every engineer-ing economy application.

■ Chapter 13, Replacement Analysis, has beenrewritten to clarify the comparison of exist-ing assets with newer alternatives.

■ Appendix 7A, Difficulties in Solving for anInterest Rate, has been thoroughly revised to use the power of spreadsheets to solveproblems.

■ End-of-chapter problems are reorganizedand updated throughout.

■ A companion website is available:www.oup.com/us/engineeringeconomy

Enhanced Student Suppor t

PACKAGED WITH EVERY COPY OF THE TEXT:

■ Study Guide by Edward Wheeler

■ CD featuring interactive Excel spreadsheetsand tutorials

Enhanced Instruc tor Suppor t■ CD containing exam files by Meenakshi

Sundaram, Excel spreadsheets, andPowerPoint slides

■ Solutions Manual


ContentsEach chapter concludes with a Summary and Problems.

1. Making Economic Decisions

2. Engineering Costs and Cost Estimating

3. Interest and Equivalence

4. More Interest Formulas

5. Present Worth Analysis

6. Annual Cash Flow Analysis

7. Rate of Return AnalysisAppendix 7A: Difficulties in Solvingfor an Interest Rate

8. Incremental Analysis

9. Other Analysis Techniques

10. Uncertainty in Future Events

11. Depreciation

12. Income Taxes

13. Replacement Analysis

14. Inflation and Price Change

15. Selection of a Minimum Attractive Rate of Return

16. Economic Analysis in the Public Sector

17. Rationing Capital Among Competing Projects

18. Accounting and Engineering Economy

Appendix: Introduction to Spreadsheets

References

Index

Compound Interest Tables

engin

eering

econ

om

ics


ENGINEERING ECONOMYApplying Theory to Practice

Second EditionTED G. ESCHENBACH,University of Alaska Anchorage

This innovative text features spreadsheets,pedagogical graphs, and practical examplesfor immediate student and industry applica-tion. It combines the real-world orientation ofEschenbach’s pioneering casebook, Cases inEngineering Economy, with the theoreticalfoundation of his second edition of Bussey’sclassic advanced text, The Economic Analysisof Industrial Projects.

Engineering Economy, Second Edition,thoroughly covers the engineering economybasics that are taught in every course and test-ed on the FE exam. It also includes the toolsand concepts—such as cost estimating,sensitivity analysis, probability, and multipleobjectives—that are needed to successfullyapply engineering economy in industry practice outside the classroom. This secondedition has been thoroughly revised; it incor-porates adopter and reviewer suggestions inaddition to addressing the needs of hundredsof engineering instructors.

2003 • 594 pp • illus. • 0-19-516152-1 cloth • APS ESCH2

Features■ Simplified spreadsheet presentations that

focus on Excel

■ A unique insight into how to use Excelfunctions for MACRS depreciation

■ Improved coverage of replacement analysis,inflation, and sensitivity analysis

■ New problems, examples, and references

■ A unified discussion of general engineeringeconomy factors now includes arithmeticand geometric gradients

■ The comparison of mutually exclusive alternatives now precedes discussion of con-strained project selection/capital budgeting

ContentsEach chapter ends with a Summary.

Preface

PART 1: BASIC CONCEPTS AND TOOLS1. Making Economic Decisions

2. The Time Value of Money

3. Equivalence—A Factor Approach

4. Spreadsheets and Economic Analysis

PART 2: ANALYZING A PROJECT5. Present Worth

6. Equivalent Annual Worth

7. Internal Rate of Return

8. Benefit/Cost Ratios and Other Measures

PART 3: COMPARING ALTERNATIVES AND PROJECTS

9. Mutually Exclusive Alternatives

10. Replacement Analysis

11. Constrained Project Selection

PART 4: ENHANCEMENTS FOR THE REAL WORLD12. Depreciation

13. Income Taxes

14. Public-Sector Engineering Economy

15. Inflation

PART 5: DECISION-MAKING TOOLS16. Estimating Cash Flows

17. Sensitivity Analysis

18. Uncertainty and Probability

19. Multiple Objectives

APPENDIXESA. Accounting Effects in Engineering Economics

B. End-of-Period Compound Interest Tables

Index

com

pu

ter ap

plicatio

ns

C O M P U T E R A P P L I C A T I O N S | 89

ADVANCED EXCEL®FOR SCIENTIFIC DATA ANALYSISROBERT DE LEVIE, Bowdoin College

Advanced Excel® For Scientific Data Analysisbegins where most books dealing with scientificapplications of Excel end. It focuses on threeareas—least squares, Fourier transformation, anddigital simulation—and illustrates these withextensive examples. Detailed descriptions andsample applications of standard and specializeduses of least squares for fitting data to a variety offunctions are discussed. The text also includes anumber of sample macros and functions to facili-tate common data analysis tasks. These macrosand functions are provided in uncompiled, com-puter-readable format so students can modifythem and use them as starting points for makingtheir own personalized data analysis tools.

2004 • 638 pp. • 239 illus. • 0-19-515275-1 paper • APS RLEVIE

ContentsPreface

1. Survey of Excel

2. Simple Linear Least Squares

3. Further Linear Least Squares

4. Non-Linear Least Squares

5. Fourier Transformation

6. Convolution, Deconvolution, and Time-Frequency Analysis

7. Numerical Integration of Ordinary Differential Equations

8. Write Your Own Macros

9. Macros for Least Squares and for the Propagation of Uncertainty

10. Fourier Transform Macros

11. Miscellaneous Macros

Appendixes

SPICESecond EditionGORDON W. ROBERTS, McGill University, andADEL S. SEDRA, University of Waterloo

This volume features methodologies for analyzingtransistor and op amp circuits, more than 100SPICE examples, and numerous chapter prob-lems. SPICE decks and the examples in thisbook, as well as examples from the first edition,are all available on-line at www.macs.ece.mcgill.ca/~roberts/ROBERTS/SPICE/misc/introduction.html



ContentsPreface

1. Introduction to SPICE


3. Diodes

4. Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)

5. Field-Effect Transistors (FETs)

6. Differential and Multistage Amplifiers

7. Frequency Response

8. Feedback

9. Output Stages and Power Amplifiers

10. Analog Integrated Circuits

11. Filters and Tuned Amplifiers

12. Signal Generators and Waveform-Shaping Circuits

13. MOS Digital Circuits

14. Bipolar Digital Circuits

AppendixesIndex

AN INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL METHODS IN C++Revised Edition

B. H. FLOWERS, University of London

Designed for the many applied mathematiciansand engineers who wish to explore computerizednumerical methods, this text explores the powerof C++ as a tool for work in numerical methods.

2000 • 584 pp. • 10 illus. • 0-19-850693-7 paper • APS FLOWER

Contents1. Preliminaries

2. Expressions, Statements and Functions

3. Errors, Theorems, and Speed

4. Roots of Non-Linear Equations

5. Classes

6. Derived Classes and Streams

7. Integer Arithmetic

8. Tests of Randomness

9. Vectors and Matrices

10. Direct Solution of Linear Equations

11. Errors in Matrix Manipulation

12. Iterative Solutions of Systems of Equations

13. Matrix Eigenvalue Problems

14. Interpolation and Data Fitting

15. Graphics

16. Differentiation and Integration

17. Orthogonal Polynomials

18. Differential Equations

19. More about Differential Equations

20. Recursive Data Types—Lists

21. Elements of Fourier Analysis

Addendum: Programming in Windows

Bibliography

Appendixes

Index


C FOR YOURSELFLearning C UsingExperimentsRICHARD P. HALPERN,State University of New York, New Paltz

This innovative text provides beginning pro-grammers with a concise, accessible introduc-tion to the world of C. Assuming no prior pro-gramming experience, it features computerexperiments which serve to clarify presentedconcepts and to guide readers into making discoveries on their own. The book covers the fundamentals from pointers and arrays tostructures, files, and recursion.

* An Instructor’s Manual is available.Please contact your Oxford sales representative at 1-800-280-0280 for additional information.

1997 • 240 pp. • 38 illus. • 0-19-510841-8 paper • APS SCS26

TeX UNBOUNDLaTeX and TeX Strategies forFonts, Graphics, and MoreALAN HOENIG,City University of New York

This book offers comprehensive instructionon advanced management of TeX systems and using them for complex jobs involvinggraphics and unusual fonts. Providing numer-ous examples throughout, the book’s 15 chapters break down conveniently into threesets that cover installing and running TeX,LaTeX, and MetaFont; font installation andselection; and graphics.

1998 • 608 pp. • 135 illus. • 0-19-509686-X paper • APS HOENIG

FORTRAN 95/2003EXPLAINEDThird EditionMICHAEL METCALF, CERN, Switzerland, JOHNK. REID, KR Associates, and MALCOLMCOHEN, The Numerical Algorithms Group

Written by the leading experts in the develop-ment of the language, Fortran 95/2003Explained significantly expands on the sec-ond edition. The opening chapters contain acomplete description of the Fortran 95 lan-guage and are followed by coverage of three formally approved extensions. Six completely

new chapters detail the features that are new inFortran 2003. The distinction between thevarious language levels is kept clear through-out. The text contains numerous examples,exercises with solutions, and an extensiveindex. It is ideal for courses in Fortran and asa professional reference.

2004 • 440 pp. • 113 illus. • 0-19-852693-8paper • APS FORTR3

Contents1. Whence Fortran?

2. Language Elements

3. Expressions and Assignments

4. Control Constructs

5. Program Units and Procedures

6. Array Features

7. Specification Statements

8. Intrinsic Procedures

9. Data Transfers

10. Operations on External Files

11. Floating-Point Exception Handling

12. Allocable Array Extensions

13. Enhanced Module Facilities

14. Interoperability with C

15. Type Parameters and Procedure Pointers

16. Object-Oriented Programming

17. Establishing and Moving Data

18. Miscellaneous Enhancements

19. Input/Output Enhancements

Appendixes

A. Intrinsic Procedures

B. Obsolescent Features

C. Pointer Example

D. Avoiding Complication Cascades

E. Fortran Terms

F. Solutions to Exercises

Index

GETTING STARTED WITH MATLAB VERSION 6:A Quick Introduction for Scientists and EngineersRUDRA PRATAP,Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore

This book contains six self-guided lessons andfeatures the latest release of MATLAB, but canbe used with earlier versions. It thoroughlyintroduces the basics and covers usefuladvanced MATLAB functions. It includesnumerous problems and examples and worksas a handy stand-alone tutorial or a supplementfor any text that uses MATLAB.

2001 • 256 pp. • 70 illus. • 0-19-515014-7 paper • APS PRATP6

ContentsPreface

1. Introduction

2. Tutorial Lessons

3. Interactive Computation

4. Programming in MATLAB:Scripts and Functions

5. Applications

6. Graphics

7. Errors

8. What Else Is There?

Appendix

Bibliography

Index

INTRODUCING DELPHIPROGRAMMINGTheory through Practice

Third EditionJOHN BARROW, HELENE GELDERBLOM,and LINDA MILLER

Written by three members of the UNISA

Department of Information Systems, this

book teaches programming in Delphi, a major

computer language used to design a variety of

programs.

2004 • 560 pp. • 289 illus. • 0-19-578135-X paper • APS DELPHI

Contents1. Introduction to Visual Programming

2. Programming with Visual Components

3. String Variables

4. Using Numbers

5. Conditional Execution

6. Nested and Multiple Conditions

7. Repetition

8. Arrays, Lists, and Indexes

9. Menus and Actions

10. Events and Parameters

11. Methods and Parameters

12. Procedures and Parameters

13. Functions and Exceptions

14. The Integrated Debugger

15. Simple Databases in Delphi

16. Database Programming Using Data Modules and Multiple Forms

17. Reporting

18. Objects

19. Deployment

20. File Types

21. Components naming Conventions

22. Internet Applications in Delphi

Index

NewEdition!

New EditionForthcoming!

ADVANCED ENGINEERINGMATHEMATICSThird Edition

MERLE C. POTTER,Michigan State University (Emeritus)

J. L. GOLDBERG,University of Michigan, Ann Arbor (Emeritus)

EDWARD F. ABOUFADEL,Grand Valley State University

This third edition of Advanced EngineeringMathematics has been completely updated and

revised to reflect changes in undergraduate

engineering education based on the widespread

use of computers. Designed specifically for

engineering students, it introduces mathematical

methods essential to solving real-world problems.

Written in a clear, accessible style, the third

edition incorporates three software packages—

Maple,™ Excel,® and MATLAB®—in problems

and examples throughout the text. Topics cov-

ered include series methods, Laplace trans-

forms, matrix theory and applications, vector

analysis, Fourier series and transforms, partial

differential equations, numerical methods using

finite differences, complex variables, and wavelets.

Advanced Engineering Mathematics,Third Edition, is ideal for upper-level under-

graduate or first-year graduate courses in

advanced engineering mathematics, engineer-

ing analysis, or applied mathematics.

* A Solutions Manual is available to adopters.(0-19-522215-6)

February 2005 • 624 pp. • 247 illus.0-19-516018-5 • cloth • APS POTTER

Features■ Written for engineering students

■ Focuses on real-world problems

■ Incorporates Maple™ throughout, with someapplications of Excel® and MATLAB®

■ Reviews solutions of ordinary differentialequations

■ Presents a new chapter on wavelets and anew section on Fourier transforms

ContentsPreface

1. Ordinary Differential Equations

1.1. Introduction

1.2. Definitions

1.3. Differential Equations of First Order

1.4. Physical Applications

1.5. Linear Differential Equations

1.6. Homogeneous, Second-Order, Linear Equations with Constant Coefficients

1.7. Spring–Mass System: Free Motion

1.8. Nonhomogeneous, Second-Order,Linear Equations with Constant Coefficients

1.9. Spring–Mass System: Forced Motion

1.10. Variation of Parameters

1.11. The Cauchy–Euler Equation

1.12. Miscellania

2. Series Method

2.1. Introduction

2.2. Properties of Power Series

2.3. Solutions of Ordinary Differential Equations

2.4. The Method of Frobenius: Solutions About Regular Singular Points

2.5. The Gamma Function

2.6. The Bessel–Clifford Equation

2.7. Laguerre Polynomials

2.8. Roots Differing by an Integer:The Wronskian Method

2.9. Roots Differing by an Integer: Series Method

2.10. Bessel’s Equation

2.11. Nonhomogeneous Equations

3. Laplace Transform

3.1. Introduction

3.2. The Laplace Transform

3.3. Laplace Transforms of Derivatives and Integrals

3.4. Derivatives and Integrals of Laplace Transforms

3.5. Laplace Transforms of Periodic Functions

3.6. Inverse Laplace Transforms: Partial Fractions

co n t i n u e d o n t h e n e x t p a g e

E N G I N E E R I N G M A T H E M A T I C S | 91

engin

eering

math

ematics

NewEdition!


3.7. A Convolution Theorem

3.8. Solution of Differential Equations

3.9. Special Techniques

4. The Theory of Matrices

4.1. Introduction

4.2. Notation and Terminology

4.3. The Solution of Simultaneous Equations by Gaussian Elimination

4.4. Rank and the Row–Reduced Echelon Form

4.5. The Arithmetic of Matrices

4.6. Matrix Multiplication—Definition

4.7. The Inverse of a Matrix

4.8. The Computation of A-1

4.9. Determinants of n x n Matrices

4.10. Linear Independence

4.11. Homogeneous Systems

4.12. Nonhomogeneous Equations

5. Matrix Applications

5.1. Introduction

5.2. Norms and Inner Products

5.3. Orthogonal Sets and Matrices

5.4. Least Squares Fit of Data

5.5. Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors

5.6. Symmetric and Simple Matrices

5.7. Systems of Linear Differential Equations:The Homogeneous Case

5.8. Systems of Linear Differential Equations:The Nonhomogeneous Case

6. Vector Analysis

6.1. Introduction

6.2. Vector Algebra

6.3. Vector Differentiation

6.4. The Gradient

6.5. Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates

6.6. Integral Theorems

7. Fourier Series

7.1. Introduction

7.2. A Fourier Theorem

7.3. The Computation of the Fourier Coefficients

7.4. Forced Oscillations

7.5. Miscellaneous Expansion Techniques

8. Partial Differential Equations

8.1. Introduction

8.2. Wave Motion

8.3. Diffusion

8.4. Gravitational Potential

8.5. The D’Alembert Solution of the Wave Equation

8.6. Separation of Variables

8.7. Solution of the Diffusion Equation

8.8. Electric Potential about a Spherical Surface

8.9. Heat Transfer in a Cylindrical Body

8.10. The Fourier Transform

8.11. Solution Methods Using the Fourier Transform


9.1. Introduction

9.2. Finite-Difference Operators

9.3. The Differential Operator Related to the Difference Operator

9.4. Truncation Error

9.5. Numerical Integration

9.6. Numerical Interpolation

9.7. Roots of Equations

9.8. Initial-Value Problems: Ordinary Differential Equations

9.9. Higher-Order Equations

9.10. Boundary-Value Problems: Ordinary Differential Equations

9.11. Numerical Stability

9.12. Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations

10. Complex Variables

10.1. Introduction

10.2. Complex Numbers

10.3. Elementary Functions

10.4. Analytic Functions

10.5. Complex Integration

10.6. Cauchy’s Integral Theorem

10.7. Cauchy’s Integral Formulas

10.8. Taylor Series

10.9. Laurent Series

10.10. Residues

11. Wavelets

11.1. Introduction

11.2. Wavelets as Functions

11.3. Multiresolution Analysis

11.4. Daubechies Wavelets and the Cascade Algorithm

11.5. Wavelets Filters

11.6. Haar Wavelet Functions of Two Variables

For Further Study

Appendices

A. US Engineering Units, SI Units,and Their Conversion

B.1. Gamma Function

B.2. Error Function

B.3. Bessel Functions

C. Overview of Maple


Index

MATHEMATICALTECHNIQUESAn Introduction for theEngineering, Physical, andMathematical Sciences

Third EditionD. W. JORDAN and P. SMITH,both at Keele University

This textbook offers an accessible and com-

prehensive grounding in many of the mathe-

matical techniques required in the early stages

of an engineering or science degree and also in

the routine methods needed by first and sec-

ond year mathematics students. With nearly

500 worked examples, more than 2,000 prob-

lems (with selected answers), more than 120

computing projects, and almost 700 illustra-

tions, this book is ideal for introductory

undergraduate courses.

* A companion website is available:www.oup.com/uk/booksites/content/0199249725/

2002 • 808 pp. • 690 illus. • 0-19-924972-5 paper • APS MATH

Contents1. Elementary Methods, Differentiation,

Complex Numbers

2. Matrix Algebra and Vectors

3. Integration and Differential Equations

4. Transforms and Fourier Series

5. Multivariable Calculus

6. Discrete Mathematics

7. Probability and Statistics

8. Projects Using Symbolic Computation

E N G I N E E R I N G M A T H E M A T I C S | 93

NONLINEAR ORDINARYDIFFERENTIALEQUATIONSAn Introduction to Dynamical SystemsThird Edition

D. W. JORDAN and P. SMITH,both of Keele University

A standard in the field, Nonlinear OrdinaryDifferential Equations takes a qualitative

approach and is designed for advanced under-

graduate and graduate courses in dynamical

systems in mathematics or mathematics-relat-

ed subjects. It emphasizes practical applica-

tions of theory, with several hundred examples

and problems covering a wide variety of appli-

cations. Prerequisites are kept to a minimum,

with appendixes containing the necessary

mathematical theory.

1999 • 560 pp. • 230 illus. • 0-19-856562-3 paper • APS NONORD

Contents1. Second-Order Differential Equations

in the Phase Plane

2. Plane Autonomous Systems and Linearization

3. Geometrical Aspects of Plane Autonomous Systems

4. Periodic Solutions; Averaging Methods

5. Perturbation Methods

6. Singular Perturbation Methods

7. Forced Oscillations: Harmonic and Subharmonic Response, Stability,and Entrainment

8. Stability

9. Determination of Stability by Solution Perturbation

10. Liapunov Methods for Determining Stability of the Zero Solution

11. The Existence of Periodic Solutions

12. Bifurcations and Manifolds

13. Poincaré Sequences, Homoclinic Bifurcation, and Chaos

Hints and Answers to the Problems

Appendixes:

A. Existence and Uniqueness Theorems

B. Topographic Systems

C. Norms for Vectors and Matrices

D. A Contour Integral

References and Further Reading

Index

MATHEMATICALMODELING OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMSAn IntroductionDIRAN BASMADJIAN,University of Toronto (Emeritus)

Mathematical Modeling of Physical Systemsprovides a concise and lucid introduction to

mathematical modeling for students and pro-

fessionals approaching the topic for the first

time. It is based on the premise that modeling

is as much an art as it is a science—an art that

can be mastered only by sustained practice. To

provide that practice, the text contains

approximately 100 worked examples and

numerous practice problems drawn from

mechanical, electrical, chemical, and environ-

mental engineering, as well as from econom-

ics, physics, and chemistry.

Problems range from classical examples,

such as Euler’s treatment of the buckling of the

strut, to contemporary topics like silicon chip

manufacturing and the dynamics of the human

immunodeficiency virus (HIV). The required

mathematics are confined to simple treatments

of vector algebra, matrix operations, and ordi-

nary differential equations. Both analytical and

numerical methods are explained in enough

detail to function as learning tools for the be-

ginner or as refreshers for the more informed

reader.

Mathematical Modeling of PhysicalSystems is ideal for advanced engineering,

mathematics, physics, and chemistry students.


2002 • 368 pp. • 111 illus. • 0-19-515314-6 cloth • APS MAMPS

ContentsEach chapter ends with Practice Problems.

Preface

Notation

1. Getting Started and Beyond

2. Some Mathematical Tools

3. Geometrical Concepts

4. The Effect of Forces

5. Compartmental Models

6. One-Dimensional Distributed Systems

7. Some Simple Networks

8. More Mathematical Tools: Dimensional Analysis and Numerical Methods

Index

MATHEMATICALMETHODS IN CHEMICALENGINEERINGARVIND VARMA, University of Notre Dame,and MASSIMO MORBIDELLI, ETH Zürich

Providing an integrated treatment of linear

operator theory from determinants through

partial differential equations, this book features

an extensive chapter on nonlinear ordinary

differential equations as well as strong coverage

of first-order partial differential equations and

perturbation methods. Numerous high-quality

diagrams and graphics support the concepts

and solutions. Many examples are included

throughout the text, and a large number of

well-conceived problems at the end of each

chapter reinforce the concepts presented.


1997 • 704 pp. • 186 illus. • 0-19-509821-8 cloth • APS VARMA

ContentsEach chapter ends with References,Additional Reading, and Problems.

1. Matrices and Their Application

2. First-Order Nonlinear Ordinary Differential Equations and Stability Theory

3. Theory of Linear Ordinary Differential Equations

4. Series Solutions and Special Functions

5. Fundamentals of Partial Differential Equations

6. First-Order Partial Differential Equations

7. Generalized Fourier Transform Methods for Linear Partial Differential Equations

8. Laplace Transform

9. Perturbation Methods

Index


FUNDAMENTALPROBLEMS OFALGORITHMIC ALGEBRACHEE KENG YAP, New York University

Popular computer algebra systems such as

Maple, Macsyma, Mathematica, and REDUCE

are now basic tools on most computers.

Efficient algorithms for various algebraic oper-

ations underlie all these systems. Computer

algebra, or algorithmic algebra, is the study of

these algorithms and their properties and rep-

resents a rich intersection of theoretical com-

puter science with classical mathematics.

Fundamental Problems of Algorithmic Algebraprovides a systematic and focused treatment of

a collection of core problems—the computa-

tional equivalents of the classical FundamentalProblem of Algebra and its derivatives.

1999 • 528 pp. • 22 illus. • 0-19-512516-9 cloth • APS YAPALG


1. Arithmetic

2. The Greatest Common Denominator

3. Subresultants

4. Modular Techniques

5. Fundamental Theorem of Algebra

6. Roots of Polynomials

7. Sturm Theory

8. Gaussian Lattice Reduction

9. Lattice Reduction and Applications

10. Linear Systems

11. Elimination Theory

12. Gröbner Bases

13. Bounds in Polynomial Ideal Theory

14. Continued Fractions

References

Index

Index to Symbols

APPLIED PARTIALDIFFERENTIALEQUATIONSRevised EditionJOHN OCKENDON and SAM HOWISON,both at Oxford University, ANDREW LACEY,Heriot-Watt University, and ALEXANDERMOVCHAN, Liverpool University

Partial differential equations are used in

mathematical models of a huge range of real-

world phenomena, from electromagnetism

to financial markets. This revised edition of

Applied Partial Differential Equations con-

tains many new sections and exercises including

American options, transform methods, free

surface flows, linear elasticity and complex

characteristics.

2003 • 464 pp. • 85 illus. • 0-19-852771-3paper • APS OCKNDN


1. First-Order Scalar Quasilinear Equations

2. First-Order Quasilinear Systems

3. I ntroduction to Second-Order Scalar Equations

4. Hyperbolic Equations

5. Elliptic Equations

6. Parabolic Equations

7. Free Boundary Problems

8. Non-Quasilinear Equations

9. Miscellaneous Topics

Conclusion

References

Index

COMPUTER ARITHMETICAlgorithms and Hardware DesignsBEHROOZ PARHAMI,University of California, Santa Barbara

Computer Arithmetic provides a balanced,

comprehensive treatment of computer arith-

metic, covering topics in arithmetic unit

design and circuit implementation that com-

plement the architectural and algorithmic

speedup techniques used in high-performance

computer architecture and parallel processing.

It is ideal for graduate and advanced under-

graduate courses in computer arithmetic and

advanced digital design.


1999 • 512 pp. • 285 illus. • 0-19-512583-5 cloth • APS PARHAM


ContentsEach chapter ends with Problems and References.

Preface

PART 1. NUMBER REPRESENTATION

1. Numbers and Arithmetic

2. Representing Signed Numbers

3. Redundant Number Systems

4. Residue Number Systems

PART 2. ADDITION/SUBTRACTION

5. Basic Addition and Counting

6. Carry–Lookahead Adders

7. Variations in Fast Adders

8. Multioperand Addition

PART 3. MULTIPLICATION

9. Basic Multiplication Schemes

10. High-Radix Multipliers

11. Tree and Array Multipliers

12. Variations in Multipliers

PART 4. DIVISION

13. Basic Division Schemes

14. High-Radix Dividers

15. Variations in Dividers

16. Division by Convergence

PART 5. REAL ARITHMETIC

17. Floating-Point Representations

18. Floating-Point Operations

19. Errors and Error Control

20. Precise and Certifiable Arithmetic

PART 6. FUNCTION EVALUATION

21. Square-Rooting Methods

22. The Cordic Algorithms

23. Variations in Function Evaluation

24. Arithmetic by Table Lookup

PART 7. IMPLEMENTATION TOPICS

25. High-Throughput Arithmetic

26. Low-Power Arithmetic

27. Fault-Tolerant Arithmetic

28. Past, Present, and Future

Index


NUMERICALCOMPUTATION IN SCIENCE ANDENGINEERINGC. POZRIKIDIS,University of California, San Diego

This text provides an accessible introductionto scientific numerical computation and its ap-plications. Fundamental and practical issuesare discussed in a unified manner with a gen-erous, but not excessive, dose of numericalanalysis. The topics are introduced on a need-to-know basis in order to concisely illustratethe practical implementation of a variety ofalgorithms and to demystify seemingly eso-teric numerical methods. The book usesschematic illustrations to demonstrate conceptsand facilitate understanding by providingreaders with a helpful interplay between ideasand visual images. Real-world examples, drawnfrom various branches of science and engineer-ing, are presented in those cases where it wouldbe difficult for readers to produce their own.The text is further enhanced by an accompa-nying library of Fortran programs, available forfree at the companion website.

* A companion website is available: http://stokes.ncsd.edu/c_pozrikidis/NCSE/mainpage.html

1998 • 640 pp. • 188 illus. • 0-19-511253-9 cloth • APS POZNUM


ContentsPreface

PseudoCode Language Commands

1. Numerical Computation

2. Numerical Matrix Algebra and Matrix Calculus

3. Linear Algebraic Equations

4. Nonlinear Algebraic Equations

5. Eigenvalues of Matrices

6. Function Interpolation and Differentiation

7. Numerical Integration

8. Approximation of Functions, Lines, and Surfaces

9. Ordinary Differential Equations:Initial-Value Problems

10. Ordinary Differential Equations; Boundary-Value, Eigenvalue, and Free-Boundary Problems

11. Finite-Difference Methods for Partial-Differential Equations

Appendixes:

A. Calculus RefresherB. Orthogonal PolynomialsC. UNIX PrimerD. Fortran PrimerE. Fortran Programs

Index

INTRODUCTION TOCOMPLEX ANALYSISRevised EditionH. A. PRIESTLEY, Oxford University

Here is a straightforward and concise intro-

duction to elementary complex analysis. The

emphasis is on those aspects of the theory that

are important in other branches of mathe-

matics, and no prior knowledge of topology is

assumed. Basic techniques are explained and

the major theorems are presented, helping

readers to gain an understanding of the theo-

retical as well as practical applications. In

addition, this revised edition includes many

exercises that will aid undergraduates wishing

to gain a firm understanding of the subject.

1990 • 232 pp. • 59 illus. • APS PRSTLY0-19-853428-0, paper • 0-19-852561-3, cloth

Contents1. The Complex Plane

2. Holomorphic Functions and Power Series

3. Prelude to Cauchy’s Theorem

4. Cauchy’s Theorem

5. Consequences of Cauchy’s Theorem

6. Singularities and Multifunctions

7. Cauchy’s Residue Theorem

8. Applications of Contour Integration

9. Fourier and Laplace Transforms

10. Conformal Mapping and Harmonic Functions

OXFORD USERS’ GUIDETO MATHEMATICS INSCIENCE ANDENGINEERINGEdited by EBERHARD ZEIDLER,Max Planck Institute for Mathematics in the Sciences, Leipzig, Germany

The Oxford User’s Guide to Mathematics inScience and Engineering emphasizes the

relationships between the different branches

of mathematics and the applications of mathe-

matics in engineering and the natural sciences.

The text covers a broad spectrum of mathe-

matics including analysis, algebra, geometry,

foundations of mathematics, calculus of varia-

tions and optimization, theory of probability

and mathematical statistics, numerical mathe-

matics and scientific computing, and the history

of mathematics.

2004 • 1312 pp. • 316 illus. • 0-19-850763-1 flexicover • APS ZEIDLE

ContentsIntroduction: Formulas, Graphs, and Tables

1. Analysis

2. Algebra

3. Geometry

4. Foundations of Mathematics

5. Calculus of Variations and Optimization

6. Stochastic Calculus—Mathematics of Chance

7. Numerical Mathematics

Appendixes

Index

INTRODUCTION TOMONTE-CARLO METHODSFOR TRANSPORT ANDDIFFUSION EQUATIONSB. LAPEYRE, École Nationale des Ponts etChaussees, France, É. PARDOUX, UniversitèDevence, France, and R. SENTIS, Commissariatà l’Énergie Atomique, France

Translated by Alan and Fionn Craig

This text is for graduate students in mathe-

matics, physics, engineering, economics,

finance and the biosciences that are interested

in using Monte-Carlo methods for the resolu-

tion of partial differential equations, transport

equations, the Boltzmann equation and the

parabolic equations of diffusion. It includes

applied examples, particularly in mathematical

finance, along with discussions of the limits of

the methods used and descriptions of specific

techniques.

2003 • 176 pp. • 0-19-852593-1 paper • APS LAPMON

INTRODUCTION TOPARALLEL COMPUTINGW. P. PETERSEN and P. ARBENZ,both at ETHZ, Switzerland

This practical student guide to scientific

computing on parallel computers covers such

topics as linear algebra, fast Fourier transform,

and Monte-Carlo simulations. The text begins

with hardware instruction and goes on to

discuss shared memory machines and distrib-

uted memory machines. It is designed for

advanced undergraduate and graduate courses

in applied mathematics, computer science,

and engineering.

2004 • 288 pp. • 105 illus. • 0-19-851577-4 paper • APS PETPAR


PARALLELOPTIMIZATIONTheory, Algorithms,and ApplicationsYAIR CENSOR, University of Haifa, Israel, andSTAVROS A. ZENIOS, University of Cyprus

This book offers a unique pathway to methods

of parallel optimization by introducing parallel

computing ideas into both optimization

theory and some numerical algorithms for

large-scale optimization problems. The three

parts of the book bring together relevant theory,

careful study of algorithms, and modeling of

significant real-world problems such as image

reconstruction, radiation therapy treatment

planning, financial planning, transportation

and multi-commodity network flow problems,

planning under uncertainty, and matrix bal-

ancing problems.

1998 • 576 pp. • 87 illus. • 0-19-510062-X cloth • APS CENPAR

LINEAR VECTOR SPACES AND CARTESIAN TENSORSJAMES K. KNOWLES,California Institute of Technology

Linear Vector Spaces and Cartesian Tensorsdiscusses the theory of finite dimensional

Euclidian spaces. It makes a careful distinction

between real and complex spaces, with an

emphasis on real spaces, and focuses on those

elements of the theory that are especially

important in applications to continuum

mechanics. The geometric content of the the-

ory and the distinction between matrices and

tensors are emphasized, and absolute- and

component-notation are both employed.

1997 • 128 pp. • 2 illus. • 0-19-511254-7 paper or cloth • APS SME05

MATRICES FORENGINEERSALLAN D. KRAUS,University of Akron

Designed to provide a foundation in matrix

theory and versatility in the manipulation of

matrices, this book includes topics such as

how to obtain the characteristic polynomial of

a matrix and the factorizations of a coefficient

matrix for ease of computation. It presents

linear transformations from an intuitive and

engineering point of view, in which conditions

at one point in a system induce conditions at

another.

2002 • 272 pp. • 12 illus. • 0-19-515013-9 paper • APS AKRAUS

VISUAL COMPLEXANALYSISTRISTAN NEEDHAM,University of San Francisco

This first course on complex analysis uses

geometry (not calculation) as the means of

explanation. Ideal for undergraduate students

in mathematics, physics, and engineering, the

book’s intuitive explanations, lack of advanced

prerequisites, and consciously user-friendly

prose help students to master the subject easily.

1999 • 616 pp. • 501 illus. • 0-19-853446-9 paper • APS NEEVIS

NONLINEAR SCIENCEEmergence and Dynamics of Coherent StructuresSecond Edition

ALWYN SCOTT,University of Arizona

This second edition covers new theoretical

concepts and empirical results in molecular

dynamics, solid-state physics, neuroscience,

fluid dynamics and biophysics. With more

than 350 problems, including hints and

solutions, this is an invaluable resource for

graduate students and researchers in the

applied sciences.

2003 • 480 pp. • illus. • 0-19-852852-3 paper • APS SCLIN2


MODERN PROBLEMS IN CLASSICALELECTRODYNAMICSCHARLES A. BRAU, Vanderbilt University

Designed as an upper-level undergraduate/

beginning graduate text and as a reference for

research scientists, Modern Problems inClassical Electrodynamics addresses a wide

range of topics in contemporary physics—

including lasers and nonlinear optics—not

found in other texts. It uses experimentally

oriented examples, real-world applications,

and clear, accessible presentations of classical

theory to make the material both engaging and

relevant to a broad audience.


* A companion website is available: www.physics.vanderbilt.edu/brau/book/Index.html

2003 • 608 pp. • 270 illus. • 0-19-514665-4 cloth • APS BRAU

Features■ Provides more than 200 experimentally

oriented examples and homework exercisestaken from condensed-matter physics, par-ticle physics, optics, and atomic physics

■ Uses SI Units throughout the text

ContentsPreface

0. Prologue

0.1. Introduction

0.2. Electrostatics

0.3. Magnetostatics

0.4. Electrodynamics

0.5. The Maxwell Equations andElectromagnetic Waves

0.6. Conservation Laws

1. Relativistic Kinematics

1.1. The Principles of Special Relativity

1.2. The Lorentz Transformation

1.3. 4-Vectors and 4-Tensors1.4. Electromagnetic Fields

2. Relativistic Mechanics and Field Theory

2.1. Relativistic Free Particle2.2. Charged Particle in a Vector Potential2.3. The Maxwell Equations2.4. Invariance and Conservation Laws

3. Time-Independent Electromagnetic Fields

3.1. Electrostatics3.2. Boundary-Value Problems with Conductors3.3. Magnetostatics

4. Electromagnetic Waves

4.1. Plane Waves4.2. Canonical Equations of an

Electromagnetic Field4.3. Waves in Plasmas

5. Fourier Techniques and Virtual Quanta

5.1. Fourier Transformation5.2. Method of Virtual Quanta

6. Macroscopic Materials6.1. Polarization and Magnetization6.2. Properties of Dielectric and

Magnetic Materials

7. Linear, Dispersive Media7.1. Linear Media7.2. Reflection and Refraction at Surfaces7.3. Energy Loss by Fast Particles Traveling

Through Matter

8. Nonlinear Optics8.1. Nonlinear Susceptibility8.2. Multiphoton Processes8.3. Nonlinear Index of Refraction8.4. Raman Processes

9. Diffraction9.1. Geometrical Optics9.2. Gaussian Optics and Laser Resonators9.3. Diffraction

10. Radiation by Relativistic Particles10.1. Angular and Spectral Distribution

of Radiation10.2. Bremsstrahlung and Transition Radiation10.3. Thomson Scattering10.4. Synchrotron Radiation and Undulator

Radiation10.5. Coherent Emission from Multiple Particles10.6. Radiation from Relativistic Particles

Traveling Through Matter

11. Fundamental Particles in Classical Electrodynamics11.1. Electromagnetic Mass and the

Radiation Reaction11.2. Magnetic Monopoles11.3. Spin

Appendix: Units and DimensionsA.1. ArbitrarinessA.2. SI UnitsA.3. Gaussian UnitsA.4. Conversion of Formulas Between

SI and Gaussian UnitsIndex

physics an

d

physical scien

ces

P H Y S I C S A N D P H Y S I C A L S C I E N C E S | 97


ATOMIC PHYSICSAn Exploration ThroughProblems and SolutionsDMITRY BUDKER and DEREK F. KIMBALL,both at University of California, Berkeley,and DAVID P. DEMILLE, Yale University

Written as a collection of problems, hints and

solutions, this book provides help in learning

about both fundamental and applied aspects

of this rapidly developing field. The authors

draw upon a broad spectrum of phenomena

and techniques and adopt an experimentalist’s

approach avoiding formal calculations when-

ever possible in favor of “back-of-the-enve-

lope” estimates, symmetry arguments, and

physical analogies. Special attention is given to

a discussion of ideas and experimental meth-

ods in several “hot areas”—such as cold atoms

and Bose–Einstein condensates, tests of fun-

damental symmetries, atomic magnetometers,

and frequency comb metrology with ultra-

short laser pulses.

2004 • 456 pp. • 83 illus. • 0-19-850950-2 paper • APS BUDATO

Contents1. Atomic Structure

2. Atoms in External Fields

3. Interaction of Atoms with Light

4. Interaction of Light with Atoms in External Fields

5. Atomic Collisions

6. Cold Atoms

7. Molecules

8. Experimental Methods

9. Miscellaneous Topics

Appendixes

A. Units, Conversion Factors, and Typical Values

B. Reference Data for Hydrogen and Alkali Atoms

C. Spectroscopic Notation for Atoms and Diatomic Molecules

D. Description of Polarization States of Light

E. Euler Angles and Rotation Matrices

F. The Wigner–Eckart Theorem and Irreducible Tensors

G. The Density Matrix

H. Elements of the Feynman Diagram Technique

A V A I L A B L E I N A P R I L !

RELATIVITY,GRAVITATION AND COSMOLOGYA Basic IntroductionTA-PEI CHENG,University of Missouri, St. Louis

Designed for advanced undergraduate cours-

es, this book introduces the general theory of

relativity and covers special relativity in the

formalism of Minkowski’s four-dimensional

space-time, the principle of equivalence,

Riemannian geometry and tensor analysis, and

Einstein’s field equation and cosmology. The

author presents the subject from the very be-

ginning with an emphasis on physical examples

and simple applications without the full tensor

apparatus. In addition, many modern topics in

cosmology are discussed, including inflation

and cosmic microwave anisotropy to the “dark

energy” that propels as accelerating universe.

April 2005 • 336 pp. • 120 illus. • 0-19-852957-0paper • APS RELCHE

Contents

Relativity—Metric Description of Spacetime

1. Introduction and Overview

2. Special Relativity and the Flat Spacetime

3. The Principle of Equivalence

4. Metric Description of a Curved Space

5. General Relativity as a Geometric Theory of Gravity—I

6. Spacetime Outside a Spherical Star

Cosmology

7. The Homogenous and Isotropic universe

8. The Expanding Universe and Thermal Relics

9. Inflation and the Accelerating Universe

Relativity—Full Tensor Formulation

10. Tensors in Special Relativity

11. Tensors in General Relativity

12. General Relativity as a Geometric Theory of Gravity—II

13. Linearized Theory and Gravitational Waves

A V A I L A B L E I N M A R C H !

A MODERNINTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM FIELD THEORYMICHELE MAGGIORE,University of Geneva, Switzerland

This book introduces modern developments

in quantum field theory without assuming pre-

vious knowledge of the field. Along with stan-

dard topics like Feynman diagrams, it discuss-

es effective lagrangians, renormalization group

equations, the path integral formulation, spon-

taneous symmetry breaking, and non-abelian

gauge theories.

March 2005 • 304 pp. • 61 illus.0-19-852074-3 • pape • APS MACQUA


2. Lorentz and Poincaré Symmetries in Quantum Field Theory

3. Classical Field Theory

4. Quantization of Free Fields

5. Perturbation Theory and Feynman Diagrams

6. Cross Sections and Decay Rates

7. Quantum Electrodynamics

8. The Low-Energy Limit of the Electroweak Theory

9. Path Integral Quantization

10. Non-Abelian Gauge Theories

11. Spontaneous Symmetry Breaking

THEORY OF OPTICALPROCESSES INSEMICONDUCTORSBulk and MicrostructuresP. K. BASU, University of Kolkata, India

This volume introduces the physical phenom-

ena involved in optoelectronic devices and is

ideal for graduate students and engineers

interested in designing new materials, devices

and applications. It provides simple quantum

mechanical explanations of important optical

processes and describes band-to-band, inter-

subband and excitonic absorption and recom-

bination in bulk, quantum wells, wires, dots,

superlattices and strained layers including

electro-optic effects. It also covers the neces-

sary background material in the classical

NEW! NEW!

P H Y S I C S A N D P H Y S I C A L S C I E N C E S | 99

theory of absorption, quantization of radiation,

and band picture based on k-p perturbation.

Previous knowledge of quantum mechanics

and solid state theory is assumed.

2003 • 464 pp. • 160 illus. • 0-19-852620-2paper • APS BASU

MAGNETISM INCONDENSED MATTERSTEPHEN BLUNDELL, Oxford University

This exceptional volume describes the

modern theory of the magnetic properties of

solids. Starting with fundamental principles,

it outlines the theory of magnetic behavior,

describes experimental techniques, and dis-

cusses current research topics. Featuring

numerous illustrations, this volume is ideal for

final-year undergraduate students and gradu-

ate students in the physical sciences.

2001 • 256 pp. • 156 illus. • 0-19-850591-4 paper • APS MAGBLU

INTRODUCTORYSTATISTICAL MECHANICSSecond EditionROGER BOWLEY and MARIANA SANCHEZ,both of University of Nottingham

Authors Bowley and Sanchez explain the

ideas and techniques of statistical mechanics

in a simple and progressive way that is acces-

sible to undergraduates. The book includes

numerous examples from solid state physics as

well as from theories of radiation from black

holes and data from the Cosmic Background

Explorer. This second edition features three

new chapters on phase transitions and additional

exercises at the end of each chapter.

2000 • 360 pp. • 81 illus. • 0-19-850576-0 paper • APS BOWL

INTRODUCTION TOMESOSCOPIC PHYSICSSecond EditionYOSEPH IMRY,Weizmann Institute of Science, Israel

This text is an introduction to the physics

of structures larger than a nanometer (one

billionth of a meter) but smaller than a micro-

meter (one millionth of a meter).

2002 • 256 pp. • 30 illus. • 0-19-850738-0 cloth • APS IMRY2

PHYSICS AND PHYSICAL SCIENCEThe Quantum Theory of LightThird EditionRODNEY LOUDON, University of Essex

Here is a detailed account of the basic theory

needed to understand the properties of light

and its interactions with atoms, focusing on

the many nonclassical effects that have now

been observed in quantum-optical experi-

ments. Ideal for advanced undergraduate or

graduate students, it includes topics that

have come into prominence over the last

two decades, such as the beamsplitter theory,

squeezed light, two-photon interference,

balanced homodyne detection, travelling-

wave attenuation and amplification, quantum

jumps, and the ranges of nonlinear optical

processes important in the generation of non-

classical light.

2000 • 448 pp. • 109 illus. • 0-19-850176-5 paper • APS LOUDQU

FUNDAMENTALS OF BEAM PHYSICSJAMES B. ROSENZWEIG,University of California, Los Angeles

This book presents beam physics using a

unified approach that emphasizes basic

concepts and analysis methods. The central

concepts underpinning the physics of acceler-

ators, charged particles, and photon beams are

built up from familiar, intertwining compo-

nents, such as electromagnetism, relativity,

and Hamiltonian dynamics. Aspects of experi-

mental techniques are introduced. Numerous

exercises and examples drawn from devices

such as synchrotrons and free-electron lasers

are included to illustrate relevant physical

principles.

2003 • 304 pp. • 108 illus. • 0-19-852554-0 cloth • APS ROSFUN

BAND THEORY AND ELECTRONICPROPERTIES OF SOLIDSJOHN SINGLETON, Oxford University

Written for students in physics and material

science, this much-needed introduction takes

a pedagogical approach to the subject through

the extensive use of illustrations, examples,

and problem sets. The author draws on his

extensive experience teaching band theory to

provide the reader with a thorough under-

standing of the field. Considerable attention

is paid to the vocabulary and quantum-

mechanical training necessary to learn about

the electronic, optical, and structural properties

of materials in science and technology. The

text also offers several chapters on the newest

experimental techniques used to study band

structure.

2001 • 240 pp. • 144 illus. • 0-19-850644-9paper • APS SINGBA

INTRODUCTION TO THE THEORY OFFERROMAGNETISMSecond EditionAMIKAM AHARONI, Weizmann Institute of Science, Rehovoth, Israel (Emeritus)

This second edition introduces the founda-tions of the different subfields of ferromagnet-ism, highlighting the direction and tendencyof the most recent research. New to this edition is updated material on the nucleationproblem and numerical micromagnetics.

2001 • 336 pp. • 21 illus. • 0-19-850809-3 paper • APS AHARNI

SUPERCONDUCTIVITYJ. F. ANNETT and H. H. WILLS,both of University of Bristol

Superconductivity provides a basic intro-duction to one of the most innovative areas in condensed matter physics today. This bookincludes ample tutorial material, includingillustrations, chapter summaries, graded problem sets, and concise examples.

2004 • 208 pp. • 0-19-850756-9 paper• APS ANNETT


MODERN CLASSICALOPTICSGEOFFREY A. BROOKER, Oxford University

Praised as ‘one of the best new optics booksseen for some time,’ this book provides aunique presentation of classical optics fromthe modern perspective. It stands out for itsreadability and stimulating discussions, closeties to experimental physics, and excellentchoice of worked problem sets.

2003 • 400 pp. • 132 illus. • 0-19-859965-Xpaper • APS BROOKR

STRUCTURE AND DYNAMICSAn Atomic View of MaterialsMARTIN T. DOVE, University of Cambridge

This book describes how the arrangement ofatoms in a solid and the way they move are relat-ed to the forces between atoms, and how theyaffect the behavior and properties of materials.

2003 • 360 pp. • 186 illus. • 0-19-850678-3 paper • APS DOVEMA

ATOMIC PHYSICSC. FOOT, Oxford University

This text covers the latest advances and the

applications to Bose-Einstein Condensation of

atoms, matter-wave interferometry and quan-

tum computing with trapped ions. To comple-

ment the usual quantum mechanical treatment

of atomic structure the book strongly em-

phasizes the experimental basis of the subject,

especially in the later chapters. It includes

ample tutorial material: examples, illustrations,

chapter summaries, and graded problem sets.

2003 • 288 pp. • 0-19-850696-1 paper • APS FOOTAT

OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDSMARK FOX, University of Sheffield

Optical Properties of Solids discusses the fun-damental principles of absorption, reflection,luminescence and light scattering for a widerange of materials, including crystalline insula-tors and semiconductors, glasses, metals, andmolecular materials. Classical and quantummodels are used where appropriate along withrecent experimental data. Examples includesemiconductor quantum wells, organic semi-conductors, vibronic solid state lasers, andnonlinear optics.

2002 • 318 pp. • 164 illus. • 0-19-850612-0paper • APS FOXOPT

SOFT CONDENSEDMATTERRICHARD A.L. JONES, University of Sheffield

Probably one of the most fashionable areas in

the physical sciences today, Soft CondensedMatter provides an excellent introduction to

the topic, and includes colloids, polymers,

liquid crystals, and amphiphiles.

2002 • 230 pp. • 118 illus. • 0-19-850589-2paper • APS JONESR

PARTICLE ASTROPHYSICSDONALD PERKINS, Oxford University

Maintaining a balance between theory and

application and featuring more than 100

worked problems, this text presents the

background of elementary particle physics

and the astrophysics of the early universe.

2003 • 256 pp. • 110 illus. • 0-19-850952-9 paper • APS PERPAR

AN INTRODUCTION TO NONLINEAR FINITEELEMENT ANALYSISJUNUTHULA NARASIMHA REDDY,Texas A&M University

Containing many detailed formulations, com-

puter implementation (i.e. pseudo codes),

examples and exercises, this text provides a

clear understanding of nonlinear finite ele-

ment analyses concepts. It is ideal for graduate

students of engineering—in particular, aero-

space, civil and mechanical—and applied

mathematics as well as engineers and scientists

working in industry—in particular, the aero-

space and automobile industry.

2004 • 440 pp. • 133 illus. • 0-19-852529-X cloth • APS REDDY

CHAOS AND TIME-SERIES ANALYSISJULIEN CLINTON SPROTT,University of Wisconsin, Madison

Chaos and Time-Series Analysis provides abroad coverage in an accessible style thatemphasizes physical concepts and usefulresults over rigorous mathematical proofs.

2003 • 400 pp. • 0-19-850840-9 paper • APS SPROTT


I N D E X | 101

ind

exAAboufadel, Edward F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91-92

Adebiyi, George A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Advanced Engineering Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . 91-92

Advanced Excel For Scientific Data Analysis . . . . . . . 89

Advanced Mechanics of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-62

Aerospace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Afuah, Allan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Aharoni, Amikam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Akhtar, Shakil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Allan’s Circuits Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Allen, Phillp E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Altan, Taylan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Analog and Digital Control System Design . . . . . . . . 36

Analog Filter Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Analysis of Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Analysis of Transport Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Anderson, Philip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Annett, J. F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Applied Partial Differential Equations,Revised Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Arbenz, P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-53

Artificial Intelligence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54

Assembly Language Introduction to Computer Architecture, An . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Atomic Physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Atomic Physics: An Exploration through Problems and Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Axiomatic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Axiomatic Design and Fabrication of Composite Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Aziz, A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66-67

BBabu, B. V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-83

Band Theory and Electronic Properties of Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Barrow, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Barry, Robert L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Basmadjian, Diran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Basu, P. K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98-99

Behforooz, Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Bélanger, Pierre R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Benbow, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Berger, S.A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Beyond Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Bioengineering/Biomedical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-77

BIOMEDICAL AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74-83

Bioseparations Science and Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Bishop, Christopher M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Blundell, Stephen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Bobrow, Leonard S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 22

Bonabeau, Eric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Boone, Bradley G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Boyle, Godfrey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-85

Bowley, Roger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Brau, Charles A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Bridgwater, John. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Brooker, Geoffrey A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Buckley, C.P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Buckman, Bruce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 77

Bucknall, C.B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Budker, Dmitri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Burbidge, John L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Burns, Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

CC for Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Cady, Fredrick M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Campbell, Ian M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Campbell, Stephen A. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Censor, Yair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Chaos and Nonlinear Dynamics, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Chaos and Time Series Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Chemical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Chen, Chi-Tsong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-30, 36

Chen, Gang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Cheng, Ta-Pai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Chimowitz, Eldred H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Chinowsky, Paul S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22

Circuit Design, Filters, and Fabrication . . . . 39-44

Circuits of the Mind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

CIVIL AND ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-86

Classical Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Cleghorn, W. L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-69

Clements, Alan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-47

Cloning, Gene Expression,and Protein Purification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

CMOS Analog Circuit Design, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Cohen, Malcolm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Colby, Ralph H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Comer, David J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Complexity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Computational Intelligence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54

Computer-Aided Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89-90

Computer Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Computer Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-51

COMPUTER ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-55

Computers, Ethics, and Society, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Conant, R. Jay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-62

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-37

Control Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Contractor, Noshir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Conway, Steve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Cooper, George R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Cowan, Ruth Schwartz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Craigg, Alan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Craigg, Fionn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Craver Jr., W. Lionel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5


Index

DDaniel, Isaac M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Das, Braja M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85-86

Davidson, P. A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

DeCarlo, Raymond A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Deen, William M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

de Levie, Robert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

DeMille, David P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71-73

Design of Analog Filters . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42

Design of Feedback Control Systems, 4/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Digital Control System Design, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Digital Control Systems, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Digital Integrated Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Digital Logic/Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Digital Logic and State Machine Design, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Digital Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Dimitrijev, Sima. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Discrete-Time Dynamic Models . . . . . . . . 78

Discussion of the Method . . . . . . . . . . 13, 72

Doraiswamy, L.K.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Dorigo, Marco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Dove, Martin T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Dragga, Sam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Drug Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

EElectric Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Electric Circuits Fundamentals. . . . . . . . . 22

Electric Machinery and Transformers, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-34

Electric Motors and Their Controls . . . . . 34

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45

Electrical Engineering, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Electrical Properties of Materials, 7/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 70

Electromagnetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33

Electronic Instrument Design . . . . . . . . . . 53

Elementary Linear Circuit Analysis, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Elementary Signal Detection Theory . . . 54

Elements of Electromagnetics, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33

Elements of Power Electronics . . . . . . . . . 34

Elements of Quantum Mechanics . . . . . 83

Energy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-85

Energy and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . 85

Energy Systems andSustainability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-85

Engineering as a Profession . . . . . . 4-5

Engineering Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Engineering Economic Analysis, 9/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

ENGINEERING ECONOMICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87-88

Engineering Economy, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Engineering Management . . . . . . 8-12

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91-96

Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Engineering of Chemical Reactions, 2/e, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-81

ENGINEERING PROFESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Engineering Rheology, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Engineering Tribology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Engineers and Their Profession, 5/e . . . . . 4

Engines of Our Ingenuity, The . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Environmental Ethics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Environmental Ethics Today . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Epstein, Irving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Ermann, David M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Eschenbach, Ted G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87-88

Ethics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Everett, Bob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-85

Experiment Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

FFay, James A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Fayer, Michael D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fiber Optics and Optoelectronics . . . . . . 39

Floudas, Christodoulos A. . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Flowers, B.H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63-65

Foot, C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Fortran 95/2003 Explained, 3/e . . . . . . . . 90

Fowler, Kim R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Fox, Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Franco , Sergio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Friedlander, Sheldon K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fuller, Gerald G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Fundamentals of Beam Physics . . . . . . . . 99

Fundamental Concepts in the Design of Experiments, 5/e . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Fundamental Problems of Algorithmic Algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Fundamentals of Hydraulic Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Fundamentals of Space Systems . . . . . . . 73

GGelderblom, Helene. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Getting Started with MATLAB,Version 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Girifalco, Louis A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Goebel, Randy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54

Goldberg, J. L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91-92

Goldsmith, W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Golomb, Dan S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Goodman, James . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Ghoshdastidar, P. S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Gravano, Salvatore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Grimmett, Geoffrey R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Grung, B.L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Guided-Wave Photonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Guru, Bhag S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 33-34

HHalpern, Richard P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Hardin, Charles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-48

Harrison, Roger G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Hicks, Charles R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Hilborn, Robert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Hiziroglu, Hüseyin R. . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-34

Hoenig, Alan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Holberg, Douglas R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Hostetter, Gene H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37

Houp, Kenneth W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Howison, Sam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Huang, Han-Way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Hudson, Fredrick J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Human Side of Managing Technological Innovation,The, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

IImry, Yoseph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Innovation Management, 2/e . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Integrated Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Introducing Delphi Programming. . . . . . 90

Introduction to Bioengineering . . . . . . . . 76

Introduction to Complex Analysis, Revised Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Introduction to Critical Phenomena in Fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Introduction to Electrical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19

Introduction to Electrical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19

Introduction to Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Introduction to the Engineering Profession, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Introduction to Error Control Codes . . . 36

Introduction to Fluid Mechanics . . . . 64-65

Introduction to Mesoscopic Physics, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Introduction to Mixed-Signal IC Test and Measurement, An . . . . . . . . . . 43

Introduction to Monte CarloMethods for Transport and Diffusion Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Introduction to Nonlinear Chemical Dynamics, An . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Introduction to Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis, An . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Introduction to Numerical Methods in C++, An, Revised Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Introduction to Optical FiberCommunication Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Introduction to Parallel Computing . . . . 95

Introduction to the Physics ofSemiconductor Devices, An . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Introductory Statistical Mechanics, 2/e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Introduction to Synthetic Polymers, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Introduction to Theoretical andComputational Fluid Dynamics. . . . . . . . 63

Introduction to the Theory ofFerromagnetism, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Introduction to Thermal and Fluid Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66-67

Ishai, Ori . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

JJespers, Paul G.A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Jones, Ian P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 70, 95

Jones, Richard A.L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Jones, Jr. William B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Jordan, D.W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93

KKarniadakis, George Em . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Katz, Ira M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-65

Katz, Ralph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Kay, J.W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Kemper, John D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Kenjo, Takashi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Khare, B. P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Kim, Sangtae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Kimball, Derek F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Knowles, James K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Kobayashi, Shiro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Koen, Billy Vaughn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 72

Kraus, Allan D. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 66-67, 96

Krein, Philip T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Kuo, Benjamin C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

I N D E X | 103

LLacey, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Lapeyre, B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Larson, Ronald G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-82

Lathi, B.P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-28, 37-38

Lauffenburger, Douglas A. . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Lavelle, Jerome P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Lee, Dai Gil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Lewis, E.R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Lienhard, John H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Lin, Pen-Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Linderman, Jennifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Linear Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Linear Circuit Analysis, 2/e. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Linear System Theory and Design, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Linear Systems and Signals, 2/e. . . . . 26-28

Linear Vector Spaces andCortesian Tensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Logic Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Loudon, Rodney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

MMachines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-69

Machines and Power . . . . . . . . . . 33-34

Mackworth, Alan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54

MacLennan, Bruce J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Maggiore, Michele . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Magnetism in Condensed Matter . . . . . . 99

Managing Innovation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Managing Strategic Innovation and Change, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Martin, Ken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Materials Science . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-71

Materials Science for Electrical and Electronic Engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 93

Mathematical Modeling of Physical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Mathematical Techniques, 3/e . . . . . . . . . 92

Matrices for Engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

McCrum, N.G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

McGillem, Clare D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Mechanical Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-73

Mechanics of Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-69

Mechanics of Materials . . . . . . . . 60-63

Mechanics of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Meredith, James E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Metal Cutting Principles, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . 70

Metal Forming and the Finite-Element Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Metcalf, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Methods of X-Ray and Neutron Scattering in Polymer Science . . . . . . . . . 80

Microcontrollers and Microcomputers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Microelectronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-26

Microelectronic Circuits, 5/e . . . . . . . . 24-25

Microstructures in Elastic Media . . . . . . . 78

Miller, Karen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Miller, Linda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Miller, William . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

MIT-Pappalardo Series in Mechanical Engineering, The . . . . . 58-59

Models of Computation and Formal Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Modern Classical Optics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Modern Digital and AnalogCommunication Systems, 3/e . . . . . . 37-38

Modern Introduction to Quantum Field Theory, A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Modern Problems in ClassicalElectrodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Monge, Peter R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Moorthi, V. P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Morbidelli, Massimo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 93

Morrison, Faith A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

MOSFET Theory and Design . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Movchan, Alexander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

NNanoscale Energy Transport and Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Needham, Tristan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-50

Networks for Computer Scientists and Engineers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49-50

Neural Networks and Intellect . . . . . . . . . 55

Neural Networks for Pattern Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Newnan, Donald G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Nonlinear and Mixed-IntegerOptimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Nonlinear Ordinary DifferentialEquations, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Nonlinear Science, 2/e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Numerical Computation in Science and Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

OOckendon, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Ogunnaike, Babatunde A. . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Oh, Soo-Ik . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Oldham, William D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

One Thousand Exercises in Probability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Operation and Modeling ofthe MOS Transistor, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Optical Electronics in ModernCommunications, 5/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Optical Properties of Solids . . . . . . . . . . 100

Optical Rheometry of Complex Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Organic Synthesis Engineering . . . . . . . . 78

Oxford Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering, The . . . . . . 16-17

Oxford Series on AdvancedManufacturing, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-57

Oxford University Press Series inBiomedical/Bioengineering, The . . . . . 74

Oxford User’s Guide to Mathematicsin Science and Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

P-QParallel Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Pardoux, A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Parhami, Behrooz . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-51, 94

Particle Astrophysics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Paste Flow and Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Pearsall, Thomas E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Pearson, Ronald K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Pennock, Gordon R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Period Batch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Perkins, Donald . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Perlovsky, Leonid I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Peterson, W. P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Petrides, Demetri P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Phan-Thien, Nhan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Photonics/Optoelectronics and Communications . . . . . . . . . 37-39

PHYSICS AND PHYSICAL SCIENCES . . . . . . . . . . 97-99

Physics and Physical Science, 3/e . . . . . . 99

Pinczes, Jennifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Pisacane, Vincent L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Pojman, John A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Polymer Chemistry, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Polymer Physics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Polymers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79-80

Pool, Robert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Poole, David. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54

Potter, Merle C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91-92

Power Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Pozrikidis, C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 95

Prasuhn, Alan L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Pratap, Rudra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Presutti, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Priestley, H.A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Principles of Abrasive Processing. . . . . . . 57

Principles of Computer Hardware, The, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-47

Principles of Design, The. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Principles of Polymer Engineering, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Principles of Programming Languages, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Principles of Vibration, 2/e . . . . . . . . . 62-63

Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Probability/Random Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-32

Probability and Random Processes, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Process Dynamics, Modeling,and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Process Plant Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 82-83

Production Flow Analysis for Planning Group Technology . . . . . . . . . . 57

Professional Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 82-83, 96, 100

Programmer’s View of Computer Architecture, A. . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

RRaman, Meenakshi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Ramage, Janet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-85

Ramakalyan, A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Ray, W. Harmon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-81

Receptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Relativity, Gravitation, and Cosmology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Reddy, Junuthula Narasimha . . . . . . . 100

Reid, John K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Renewable Energy, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Reporting Technical Information, 10/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Rheology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-82

Riell, Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Roberts, Gordon W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 89

Robertson, Dominique . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Roe, Ryong-Joon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Rosenzweig, James B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Roulston, David J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Rubinstein, Michael . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Rudge, Scott R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Russell, Lynn D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

SSadiku, Matthew N.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33

Saltzman, W. Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Sanchez, Mariana . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Sanders, Billy R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Santina, Mohammed S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Sarma, Mulukutla S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19

Savant, Clement J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Schaffer, James P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-65

Schaumann, Rolf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42

Schmidt, Lanny D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-81

Schmidtz, David . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Schroder, Darrell C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5


Schwarz, Steven E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Science and Engineering ofMicroelectronic Fabrication, The, 2/e . . . 41

Scott, Alwyn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Sedra, Adel S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-25, 89

Seebauer, Edmund G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Semiconductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-45

Sentis, R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Shahian, Bahram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Sharma, Sangeeta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Shauf, Michele S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Shaughnessy Jr., Edward J. . . . . . . . 64-65

Shaw, Alan W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Shaw, Milton C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Sherwin, Spencer J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Shigley, Joseph E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Sibigtroth, James . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Signal Processing and Linear Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Signal Processing Using Optics . . . . . . . . 31

Signals and Systems, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Singleton, John . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Smith, Kenneth C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-25

Smith, P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93

Smoke, Dust & Haze, 2/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Social Aspects of Engineering . . . . 5-6

Social History of AmericanTechnology, A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Soft Condensed Matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Software and Hardware Engineering:Motorola M68HC11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Software and Hardware Engineering:Motorola M68HC12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Software Engineering Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Soil Mechanics Laboratory Manual, 6/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85-86

Soils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85-86

Solecki, Roman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-70

Solymar, Laszlo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 70

Spectral/HP Element Methods for CFD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

SPICE, 2/e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Sprott, Julien Clinton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Statistical Mechanics of Solids . . . . . . . . . 63

Statistics and Neural Networks . . . . . . . . 55

Stefani, Raymond T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Stevens, Malcolm P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Steward, Fred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Stirzaker, David R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Strategic Corporate Management for Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Structure and Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Structure and Rheology of Complex Fluids, The . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-82

Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Structured Fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Stubberud, Allen R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Suh, Nam P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73

Suhanic, George . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Superconductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Swarm Intelligence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Systems and Signals . . . . . . . . . . 26-31

Systems and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

TTanner, Roger I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Tarquin, Anthony J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Taylor, R. Gregory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Tebeaux, Elizabeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Technical Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Technical Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

TeX Unbound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Thandavamoorthy, T. S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Theories of Communication Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, 3/e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Theory of Optical Processes inSemiconductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98-99

Theraulaz, Guy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Thermal and Fluid Sciences . . . . 66-67

Thermodynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Tissue Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Titterington, D.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Todd, Paul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Tongue, Benson H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62-63

Topics in Chemical Engineering:A Series of Textbooks and Monographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Tsividis, Yannis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Turbulence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Turner Jr., Kenneth V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Tushman, Michael L. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

UUicker, John J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Understanding Rheology . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Understanding Semiconductor Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Using the MCS-51 Microcontroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

VVable, Madhukar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Valiant, Leslie G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Van Valkenburg , Mac E. . . . . . . . . . 41, 43

Varma, Arvind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 93

Visual Complex Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

WWalsh, Donald . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 70

Warner Jr., R.M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Warrier, Ravi K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Welty, James R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66-67

Wenz, Peter S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Whitney, Daniel E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Wickens, Thomas D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Williams, J.A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Willott, Elizabeth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Wills, H.H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Witten, Thomas A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

YYariv, Amnon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Yap, Chee Keng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

ZZak, Stanislaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Zeidler, Eberhard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Zenios, Stavros A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Zheng, Youlu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Index

oxfo

rd u

niversity p

ress aro

un

d th

e wo

rldNorth America

UNITED STATESOxford University Press

198 Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10016-4314

USAEMAIL: www.oup.com/us/higheredPHONE: 1-800-280-0280FAX: 1-212-726-6450

CANADAOxford University Press

70 Wynford Drive, Don Mills

Toronto, Ontario M3C 1J9

Canada

EMAIL: [email protected]: 416-441-2941FAX: 416-441-0345

Central America

MEXICOOxford University Press

Antonio Caso #142

Colonia San Rafael

Mexico D.F., 06470

EMAIL: [email protected]: 52-55-5592-4277FAX: 52-55-5535-2897WEB: www.oup.com/mx

South America

ARGENTINAOxford University Press

California 2082

Edificio Central Park

Oficina 315

Buenos Aires, Argentina C1289AANEMAIL: [email protected]: 54-11-4302-8000FAX: 54-11-4502-3900

UK/Europe

UNITED KINGDOMOxford University Press

Great Clarendon Street

Oxford OX2 6DP, UK

EMAIL: [email protected]: 44-1865-353-618FAX: 44-1865-353-646

Africa

SOUTH AFRICASouth Africa Head Office:

Oxford University Press

Vasco Blvd N1 City

Goodwood, Capetown 7460

South Africa


Australia, New Zealand,and Singapore

AUSTRALIAOxford University Press

253 Normanby Road,

South Melbourne

VIC 3205 Australia


East Asia

JAPANOxford University Press

Edomizaka Mori Bldg 6F

4-1-40 Toranomon, Minato-ku

Tokyo 105-8529, Japan


KOREAOxford University Press

#706 Chungdong B/D

15-5, Chung-dong, Chung-ku

Seoul, 100-120, Korea


HONG KONG/CHINAOxford University Press

18 F, Warwick House

Taikoo Place 979 King’s Road

Quarry Bay, Hong Kong


TAIWANOxford University Press

5th Fl., Room A, No. 58

Minsheng East Road, Section 1

Taipei, Taiwan


Southeast Asia

MALAYSIAOxford University Press

Penerbit Fajar Bakti

4 Jalan Pemaju U1/15, Seksyen U1

Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park

Shah Alam, 40150

Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia


THAILANDOxford University Press

Libris Thailand Co., Ltd.

35/2 Sukumvit 101 (off soi 43)

Bangjak Prakanong

Bangkok 10260

Thailand


South Asia

INDIAIndia Head Office:


YMCA Library Building, 1st Floor

Jai Singh Road, PO Box 43

New Delhi, 110-001, India

EMAIL: [email protected]: 91-11-2374-7124/5FAX: 91-11-2374-2312

NEW DELHI Oxford University Press

Oxford House

2/11 Ansari Road, Daryaganj

New Delhi, 100-002, India

EMAIL: [email protected]: 91-11-2327-3841/2, 2325-3647FAX: 91-11-2327-7812

MUMBAIOxford University Press

Oxford House

167, Vidyanagari Marg

Kalina, Santacruz East

Mumbai, 400-098, India


CHENNAIOxford University Press

Oxford House

Anna Salai, PO Box 1079

Chennai, 600-006, India

EMAIL: [email protected]: 91-44-2811-0832, 2811-1861FAX: 91-44-2811-0962

KOLKATAOxford University Press

Plot No. A1-5

Block GP, Sector V, Salt Lake

Electronic Complex

Kolkata, 700-091, India


Pakistan

KARACHIOxford University Press

Plot No. 38, Sector 15

Korangi Industrial Area

Karachi, 74900, PakistanEMAIL: [email protected]: 92-21-505-1522FAX: 92-21-505-5071

International SalesEMAIL: [email protected]: 212-726-6453

For Purchase of…any title in this catalog for use in corporate training and continuingeducation please contact:

Vera Plummer

Special Sales

EMAIL: [email protected]: 1-800-334-4249, EXT. 6004FAX: 1-212-726-6446

CORPORATE TERMS1–4 units: 0% discount5–9 units: 10% discount10–99 units: 25% discount100+ units: 35% discountFreight: F.O.B. Cary, N.C.Terms: net 60 days

All sales non-returnable.

Ox

ford

Un

iversity Press

P.O.B

ox

36

Lavallette,N

J 08

73

5-0

03

6

PLA

CE

STAM

P

HER

E

F O R M O R E I N F O R M AT I O N A B O U T

Oxford University Press textbooks,visit our World Wide Web site at:

www.oup.com/us/highered

Please recommend

library acquisition

of books needed for

teaching and research.

Ple

ase

cons

ider

me

for

an e

xam

inat

ion

copy

of(

plea

se b

e sur

e to

incl

ude A

PS co

des)

:

APS

APS

APS

APS

CO

URS

E N

AM

EC

LASS

SIZ

E

SEM

ESTE

R(S)

OFF

ERED

:❏

FALL

❏W

INTE

R❏

SPRI

NG

CU

RREN

T TE

XT

DEC

ISIO

N D

ATE

POSS

IBIL

ITY

OF

CH

AN

GE

FOR

NEX

T SE

MES

TER:

❏V

ERY

LIKE

LY❏

POSS

IBLE

❏N

OT

LIKE

LY

SHIP

TO

:

NA

ME/

DEP

AR

TMEN

TIN

STIT

UTI

ON

AD

DRE

SSC

ITY/

STAT

E/Z

IP

E-M

AIL

AD

DRE

SSO

FFIC

E PH

ON

E

OFF

ICE

HO

URS

BEST

TIM

E TO

CA

LL

SHA

UG

H C

OM

AR

C49

-704

E X A M I N AT I O N C O P Y R E Q U E S T F O R M

To be considered for an examination copy,please fill out the card below.

You may also fax us your request on school letterhead

giving course name, expected enrollment, and

your decision date to College Sales Coordinator at

212-726-6450,or e-mail us the above information at

[email protected]

To request your examination copy in Canada,

please contact:


College Department

70 Wynford Drive

Don Mills, Ontario M3C 1J9

[email protected]

engineering 2005

198 Madison AvenueNew York, NY 10016

NonprofitOrganizationU.S. Postage

PAIDOxford University

Press